2019 Escalade Escalade - Cadillac...84161699 A Escalade 2019 Escalade Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals

84161699 A

Escalade

2019

Escalade

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

19_CAD_Escalade_COV_en_US_84161699A_2018APR27.ai 1 4/10/2018 2:40:44 PM19_CAD_Escalade_COV_en_US_84161699A_2018APR27.ai 1 4/10/2018 2:40:44 PM

Cadillac Escalade Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico-12460268) - 2019 - CRC - 4/18/18

Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . . . . . 27

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Instruments and Controls . . . . . . . . 123

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 362

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Customer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . 388

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404


2 INTRODUCTION

Introduction

The names, logos, emblems, slogans,vehicle model names, and vehiclebody designs appearing in this manualincluding, but not limited to, GM, theGM logo, CADILLAC, the CADILLACEmblem, and ESCALADE aretrademarks and/or service marks ofGeneral Motors LLC, its subsidiaries,affiliates, or licensors.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “General Motorsof Canada Company” for CadillacMotor Division wherever it appears inthis manual.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment thatwas not purchased on the vehicle,model variants, country specifications,features/applications that may not beavailable in your region, or changessubsequent to the printing of thisowner’s manual.

Refer to the purchase documentationrelating to your specific vehicle toconfirm the features.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle OwnersA French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

Propriétaires Canadiens

On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ceguide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170USA

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 84161699 A First Printing ©2018 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


INTRODUCTION 3

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in the backof the manual. It is an alphabeticallist of what is in the manual and thepage number where it can be found.

Danger, Warning, andCautionWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “Do Not,”“Do not do this,” or “Do not let thishappen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message, gauge,or indicator.

M : Shown when the owner’s manualhas additional instructions orinformation.

* : Shown when the service manualhas additional instructions orinformation.

0 : Shown when there is moreinformation on another page —“see page.”


4 INTRODUCTION

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbols thatmay be found on the vehicle and whatthey mean. See the features in thismanual for information.

u : Air Conditioning System

G : Air Conditioning Refrigerant Oil

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

9 : Dispose of Used ComponentsProperly

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

_ : Flame/Fire Prohibited

H : Flammable

[ : Forward Collision Alert

+ : Fuses

j : ISOFIX/LATCH System ChildRestraints

| : Lane Change Alert

@ : Lane Departure Warning

A : Lane Keep Assist

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

X : Park Assist

~ : Pedestrian Ahead Indicator

O : Power

7 : Rear Cross Traffic Alert

I : Registered Technician

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Seat Belt Reminders

I : Side Blind Zone Alert

h : Start/Stop

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : StabiliTrak/Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)

a : Under Pressure

V : Vehicle Ahead Indicator


IN BRIEF 5

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . 8Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Heated and Cooled Front Seats . . . 12Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . . . . 13Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . 13Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . 15Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . 17

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Vehicle FeaturesInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . 19Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . . . . 21Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . . . . 21Surround Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . 21Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Automatic ParkingAssist (APA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Universal Remote System . . . . . . . . . 23Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26


6 IN BRIEF

Instrument Panel


IN BRIEF 7

1. Air Vents 0 183.

2. Head-Up Display (HUD) 0 151 (IfEquipped).

3. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn andLane-Change Signals 0 171.

Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 124.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer0 126.

4. Hazard Warning Flashers 0 171.

5. Instrument Cluster 0 134.

6. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission 0 210.

Tow/Haul Mode Selector Button.See Tow/Haul Mode 0 214.

Range Selection Mode Buttons (IfEquipped). See Manual Mode0 213.

7. Magnetic Ride Control Button.See Magnetic Ride Control 0 225.

Pedal Adjust Switch (IfEquipped). See Adjustable Throttleand Brake Pedal 0 202.

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 222.

8. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System 0 170.

9. Infotainment 0 176.

10. Glove Box Button. See Glove Box0 119.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 251 (IfEquipped).

Park Assist Button. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 238.

11. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 177.

Instrument Panel Storage 0 119.

12. CD Player. See the infotainmentmanual.

13. ENGINE START/STOP Button.See Ignition Positions 0 203.

14. Steering Wheel Controls 0 124.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Controls. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 149.

15. Horn 0 124.

16. Steering Wheel Adjustment 0 124.

17. Hood Release. See Hood 0 280.

18. Cruise Control 0 226 (IfEquipped).

Adaptive Cruise Control 0 229 (IfEquipped).

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 244 (If Equipped).

Heated Steering Wheel 0 124 (IfEquipped).

Phone Button. See theinfotainment manual.

19. Automatic Transfer Case Knob (IfEquipped). See Four-Wheel Drive0 215.

20. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Outof View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check EngineLight) 0 140.

21. Electric Parking Brake 0 220 (IfEquipped).

22. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 167.

23. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 172.


8 IN BRIEF

Initial Drive InformationThis section provides a brief overviewabout some of the important featuresthat may or may not be on yourspecific vehicle.

For more detailed information, refer toeach of the features which can befound later in this owner’s manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is used to remotely lockand unlock the doors from up to 60 m(197 ft) away from the vehicle.

K : Press to unlock the driver door.Press K again within three seconds tounlock all remaining doors.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization 0 155.

b : Press twice to open or close theliftgate. Press once to stop the liftgatefrom moving.

c : Press twice to open the liftglass.

7 : Press and release to initiatevehicle locate. The turn signal lampsflash and the horn sound three times.

Press 7 and hold for more thanthree seconds to sound the panicalarm.

Press 7 again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Keys 0 27 and Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System 0 28.

Remote Vehicle StartThe engine can be started fromoutside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press and release Q on the RKEtransmitter.

2. Immediately press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

Start the vehicle normally afterentering.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on.

Remote start can be extended.


IN BRIEF 9

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start 0 35.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the doors frominside the vehicle:

. Press Q or K on a power doorlock switch.

. Push down the manual lock knobon the driver door to lock alldoors. Push down the lock knobon a passenger door to lock thatdoor only.

. Pull the door handle once tounlock that door. Pull the handleagain to unlatch it.

To lock or unlock the doors fromoutside the vehicle press Q or K onthe RKE transmitter or use the key inthe front doors. The key cylinder iscovered by a cap. See Door Locks 0 36.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 28.

Power Door Locks

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

See Door Locks 0 36.

Keyless Access

The RKE transmitter must be within1 m (3 ft) of the liftgate or door beingopened. Pressing the button on thedriver door handle will unlock thedriver door. If the handle button ispressed again within five seconds, thepassenger doors and liftgate willunlock. See “Keyless Access Operation”in Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 28.

Liftgate


10 IN BRIEF

To open the liftgate, press K on the

power door lock switch or press K onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter twice to unlock all doors.Press the touch pad (1) on theunderside of the liftgate handle andlift up. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 28.

Use the pull cup to lower and closethe liftgate. Do not press the touchpad while closing the liftgate. This willcause the liftgate to be unlatched.

To open the liftglass, press thebutton (2) above the license plate.Close the liftglass before opening theliftgate to avoid damaging it.

Power Liftgate Operation

If equipped with a power liftgate, theswitch is on the overhead console. Thevehicle must be in P (Park).

Choose the power liftgate mode byselecting MAX or 3/4. Press8 onthe overhead console or on the RKEtransmitter pressb twice quickly.

Press any liftgate button while theliftgate is moving to stop it. Pressingagain reverses the direction.

To close, pressl on the bottom ofthe liftgate next to the latch.

To disable the power liftgate function,select OFF on the liftgate switch. SeeLiftgate 0 40.

Windows

Power windows work when theignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 207.

Using the window switch, press toopen or pull to close the window.

The windows may be temporarilydisabled if they are used repeatedlywithin a short time.

Seat Adjustment

Uplevel Seat Adjustment

If equipped, the ignition must be onto use all uplevel seat features.

Uplevel Seat Control

1. Feature Select2. Up3. Rearward


IN BRIEF 11

4. Down5. Forward

. Move Feature Select (1) to displayseat adjustments on theinfotainment display. Press andrelease or hold to scroll throughfeatures.

. Press Up (2) to make upwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.

. Press Rearward (3) to makerearward adjustments of theselected feature.

. Press Down (4) to make downwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.

. Press Forward (5) to make forwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.

Base Seat Adjustment

To adjust the seat:

. Move the seat forward or rearwardby sliding the control forward orrearward.

. Raise or lower the front part of theseat cushion by moving the frontof the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat by movingthe rear of the control up or down.

See Power Seat Adjustment 0 62.

Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust the seatback:

. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

See Reclining Seatbacks 0 65.


12 IN BRIEF

Memory Features

If equipped, memory seats allow twodrivers to save and recall their uniqueseat positions for driving the vehicle,and a shared exit position for gettingout of the vehicle. Other featurepositions may also be saved, such aspower mirrors and power steeringwheel, if equipped. Memory positionsare linked to RKE transmitter 1 or 2for automatic memory recalls.

Before saving, adjust all availablememory feature positions. Turn theignition on and then press and releaseSET; a beep will sound. Thenimmediately press and hold 1, 2,

orB (Exit) until two beeps sound.To manually recall these positions,press and hold 1, 2, orB until thesaved position is reached.

When Auto Memory Recall is enabledin vehicle personalization, positionspreviously saved to memory buttons1 and 2 are recalled when the ignitionis changed from off to on or ACC/ACCESSORY.

When Easy Exit Options is enabled invehicle personalization, the featureautomatically recalls the previouslysaved exit position when exiting thevehicle.

Memory adjustments may not beavailable upon delivery or after serviceuntil steps in “Saving MemoryPositions” section are performed. SeeMemory Seats 0 65.

Second Row SeatsThe second row seatbacks can befolded for additional cargo space,or the seats can be folded and

tumbled for easy entry/exit to thethird row seats. The seatbacks alsorecline.

See Second Row Seats 0 71.

Third Row SeatsThird row seatbacks can be folded. SeeThird Row Seats 0 76.

Heated and Cooled FrontSeats

The buttons are near the climatecontrols on the center stack. Tooperate, the engine must be running.


IN BRIEF 13

PressI or+ to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.

Press J or z to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion and seatback.

PressC or { to cool the driver orpassenger seat.

See Heated and Cooled Front Seats0 69.

Head Restraint AdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatback reclineangle as little as necessary whilekeeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the proper position.

See Head Restraints 0 61 and PowerSeat Adjustment 0 62.

Seat Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to useseat belts properly:

. Seat Belts 0 78

. How to Wear Seat Belts Properly0 79

. Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 81

. Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 106

Passenger Sensing System

United States

Canada and Mexico

The passenger sensing system willturn off the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. No other airbag is affectedby the passenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System 0 93

The passenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the overhead consolewhen the vehicle is started. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator0 139.


14 IN BRIEF

Mirror Adjustment

Interior Mirror

Adjustment

Adjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind the vehicle.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

The mirror automatically dims toreduce the glare of headlamps frombehind. The dimming feature comeson when the vehicle is started.

Rear Camera Mirror

If equipped, this automatic dimmingrearview mirror provides a wide anglecamera view of the area behind thevehicle. Adjust the mirror with the tabpushed forward so that the display isoff. See Rear Camera Mirror 0 54.

Exterior Mirrors

Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press (1) or (2) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move each mirror in thedesired direction.

3. Press either (1) or (2) again todeselect the mirror.

See Power Mirrors 0 52.

Power Folding Mirrors

1. Press{ to fold the mirrorsinward.

2. Press{ again to return themirrors to the driving position.

Heated Mirrors

PressK to heat the outside mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate Control System0 177.


IN BRIEF 15

Steering Wheel Adjustment

To adjust the power tilt andtelescoping steering wheel:

Press the control to move the steeringwheel up and down or forward andrearward.

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving.

Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustmentIf equipped, the position of thethrottle and brake pedals can bechanged.

Press the top of the switch to movethe pedals closer to your body. Pressthe bottom of the switch to move thepedals away.

See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal0 202.

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction, which lets pedal settings besaved and recalled. See Memory Seats0 65.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

There are dome lamps in the overheadconsole and the headliner, if equipped.

To change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

OFF : Turns the lamps off, even whena door is open.

DOOR : The lamps come onautomatically when a door is opened.

ON : Turns all dome lamps on.


16 IN BRIEF

Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped. To operate, the ignitionmust be on or in ACC/ACCESSORY orusing Retained AccessoryPower (RAP).

Pressm orn next to each readinglamp to turn it on or off.

For more information about interiorlighting, see Instrument PanelIllumination Control 0 172.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

P : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL). Turningthe headlamp control toP again willturn the automatic headlamps andDRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada, theoff position only works when thevehicle is shifted into the P (Park)position.

AUTO : Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off, dependingon outside lighting.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

5 : Turns on the headlamps togetherwith the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

See:

. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 167

. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)0 169

. Automatic Headlamp System 0 170


IN BRIEF 17

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper control is on theturn signal lever.

The windshield wipers are controlledby turning the band withz FRONTon it.

1 : Fast wipes.

w : Slow wipes.

3 INT : Use this setting forintermittent wipes or Rainsense™.For intermittent wipes, turn

thez FRONT band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

To turn on Rainsense,pressz AUTO on the lever, then

turn thez FRONT band on thewiper lever to adjust the sensitivity.

. Turn the band up to a higher INTsetting for more sensitivity tomoisture.

. Turn the band down to the lowerINT setting for less sensitivity tomoisture.

Move the band out of the3 INTposition to deactivate Rainsense.

OFF : Turns the windshield wipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, turn the banddown, then release. For several wipes,hold the band down.

Lm : Push the paddle at the top ofthe lever to spray washer fluid on thewindshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 124.

Climate ControlsThe climate control buttons and thetouch screen are used to adjust theheating, cooling, and ventilation.

Center Stack Climate Controls

1. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

2. Fan Control

3. OFF (Fan)

4. Driver and Passenger Heated andCooled Seats

5. Recirculation


18 IN BRIEF

6. Rear Window Defogger

7. Defrost

8. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

Climate Control Display

1. Outside Temperature Display


3. Fan Control

4. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)

5. A/C Mode (Air Conditioning)

6. Climate Control Selection(Application Tray Button)

7. Rear (Rear Climate ControlTouch Screen)

8. Air Delivery Mode Control

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 177 and Rear Climate ControlSystem 0 182 (If Equipped).

Transmission

Range Selection Mode

The Range Selection Mode switch,if equipped, is on the shift lever.

1. To enable the Range Selectionfeature, move the shift lever tothe L (Manual Mode) position.The current range will appearnext to the L. This is the highestattainable range with all lowergears accessible. As an example,

when 5 (Fifth) gear is selected,1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gearsare available.

2. Press the plus/minus buttons onthe shift lever to select thedesired range of gears for currentdriving conditions. See ManualMode 0 213.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/Haul Modecan be used.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active. SeeTow/Haul Mode 0 214.

Four-Wheel DriveIf equipped with four-wheel drive, theengine's driving power can be sent toall four wheels for extra traction.


IN BRIEF 19

Automatic Transfer Case

This transfer case knob is to the leftof the steering column.

The different drive options that maybe available are the following:

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Thissetting is used for driving in moststreet and highway situations.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive) : This setting is ideal for usewhen road surface traction conditionsare variable.

Do not use AUTO mode to park on asteep grade with poor traction such asice, snow, mud or gravel. In AUTOmode only the rear wheels will holdthe vehicle from sliding when parked.If parking on a steep grade, use 4 m tokeep all four wheels engaged.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Usethis setting when extra traction isneeded, such as on snowy or icy roadsor in most off-road situations.

N (Neutral) : Shift to this setting onlywhen towing the vehicle. See TrailerTowing 0 261.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low) : Choose

4 n when driving in deep sand, mud,or snow, and while climbing ordescending steep hills.

See Four-Wheel Drive 0 215.

Vehicle Features

Infotainment SystemSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE), andvoice or speech recognition. It alsoincludes information on settings.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steering wheelcontrols. See “Steering WheelControls” in the infotainment manual.


20 IN BRIEF

Cruise Control

J : Press to turn the system on andoff. A white indicator appears in theinstrument cluster when cruise isturned on.

+RES : If there is a set speed inmemory, press the control up brieflyto resume that speed or press andhold to accelerate. If the cruise controlis already active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET− : Press the control down brieflyto set the speed and activate cruisecontrol. If the cruise control is alreadyactive, use to decrease vehicle speed.

* : Press to disengage cruise controlwithout erasing the set speed frommemory.

See Cruise Control 0 226 or AdaptiveCruise Control 0 229 (if equipped).

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the instrumentcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems.

y orz : Move SEL up or down togo to the previous or next selection.

S or T : Press to move between theinteractive display zones in thecluster. Press S to go back to theprevious menu.

SEL : Press to open a menu or select amenu item. Press and hold to resetvalues on certain screens.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)0 149.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, FCA may help avoid orreduce the harm caused by front-endcrashes. FCA provides a greenindicator,V, when a vehicle isdetected ahead. This indicatordisplays amber if you follow a vehicleahead too closely. When approachinga vehicle ahead too quickly, FCAprovides a flashing red alert on thewindshield and rapidly beeps or pulsesthe driver seat.


IN BRIEF 21

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 244.

Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB)If the vehicle has Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), it also has FAB, whichincludes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA).When the system detects a vehicleahead in your path that is traveling inthe same direction that you may beabout to crash into, it can provide aboost to braking or automaticallybrake the vehicle. This can help avoidor lessen the severity of crashes whendriving in a forward gear.

See Forward Automatic Braking (FAB)0 247.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)If equipped, LKA may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel if thevehicle approaches a detected lanemarking without using a turn signal inthat direction. It may also provide aLane Departure Warning (LDW) alert

as the lane marking is crossed. Thesystem will not assist or alert if itdetects that you are actively steering.Override LKA by turning the steeringwheel. LKA uses a camera to detectlane markings between 60 km/h(37 mph) and 180 km/h (112 mph).

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)0 250 and Lane Keep Assist (LKA)0 251.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)If equipped, the LCA system is alane-changing aid that assists driverswith avoiding lane change crashesthat occur with moving vehicles in theside blind zone (or spot) areas or withvehicles rapidly approaching theseareas from behind. The LCA warningdisplay will light up in thecorresponding outside mirror and willflash if the turn signal is on. The SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA) system isincluded as part of the LCA system.

See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) 0 248and Lane Change Alert (LCA) 0 248.

Surround VisionIf equipped, views around the vehicleappear in the infotainment display toaid with parking and low-speedmaneuvers.

See “Surround Vision” underAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 238.

Front Vision Camera

If equipped, a view of the area in frontof the vehicle appears on theinfotainment display to aid withparking and low-speed maneuvers.

See “Front Vision Camera” underAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 238.

Rear Vision Camera (RVC)If equipped, RVC shows a view of thearea behind the vehicle on theinfotainment display when the vehicleis shifted into R (Reverse) to aid withparking and low-speed backingmaneuvers.

See Assistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 238.


22 IN BRIEF

Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) SystemIf equipped, the RCTA system shows atriangle with an arrow on theinfotainment display to warn of trafficbehind your vehicle that may crossyour vehicle's path while inR (Reverse). In addition, beeps willsound, or the driver seat will pulse.


Park AssistIf equipped, Front and Rear ParkAssist (FRPA) uses sensors on thefront and rear bumpers to assist withparking and avoiding objects duringlow speed parking maneuvers.It operates at speeds less than 8 km/h(5 mph). FRPA may display a warningtriangle on the infotainment displayand a graphic on the instrumentcluster to provide the object distance.In addition, multiple beeps or seatpulses may occur if very close to anobject.

The vehicle may also have a higherspeed Backing Warning System andthe Reverse Automatic Brakingsystem.

See Driver Assistance Systems 0 237.

Automatic ParkingAssist (APA)If equipped, the APA system helps tosearch for and maneuver the vehicleinto parallel or perpendicular parkingspots using automatic steering,displays, and beeps. When the vehiclespeed is below 30 km/h (18 mph),touchO to enable the system.

See “Automatic Parking Assist (APA)”under Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing 0 238.

Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB)If the vehicle has Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) it also has the RABsystem, which is designed to helpavoid or reduce the harm caused bybacking crashes when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse). If the system

detects the vehicle is backing too fastto avoid a crash with a detected objectbehind your vehicle in your path, itmay automatically brake hard toa stop.


Power Outlets

Power Outlets 12 Volt DirectCurrent

Accessory power outlets can be usedto plug in electrical equipment, suchas a cell phone, MP3 player, etc.

The vehicle has five accessory poweroutlets:

. One near the cupholders on thecenter console

. One inside the center console

. One on the rear of the centerconsole

. One in the third row seat on thedriver side

. One in the rear cargo area on thepassenger side


IN BRIEF 23

Lift the cover to access and replacewhen not in use.

See Power Outlets 0 128.

Universal Remote System

If equipped with the Universal Remotesystem, these buttons will be in thefront overhead console.

This system provides a way to replaceup to three remote controltransmitters used to activate devicessuch as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home automationdevices.

See Universal Remote System 0 164.

Sunroof

1. SLIDE Switch2. TILT Switch

If equipped, the sunroof only operateswhen the ignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 207.

Slide Switch

Express-Open/Express-Close : Toexpress-open the sunroof, fully pressand release I (1). Press the switchagain to stop the movement. Toexpress-close the sunroof, fully pressand releaseK (1). Press the switchagain to stop the movement.

Open/Close (Manual Mode) : Toopen the sunroof, press andhold I (1). Release the switchto stop the movement. Press andholdK (1) to close the sunroof.Release the switch to stop themovement.

Tilt Switch

Vent : From the closed position,pressJ (2) to vent the sunroof.

PressK (2) to close thesunroof vent.


24 IN BRIEF

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise. Theair deflector will retract when thesunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshadewhich can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually.

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theautomatic reversal feature will detectthe object and stop the sunroof.

See Sunroof 0 58.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/ElectronicStability ControlThe vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) that limits wheel spinand the StabiliTrak system that assistswith directional control of the vehiclein difficult driving conditions. Bothsystems come on automatically whenthe vehicle is started and beginsto move.

. To turn off TCS, press andrelease g on the center stack. The

traction off light i displays in theinstrument cluster. Theappropriate Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message displays.

. To turn off both TCS andStabiliTrak, press and hold guntil i and g illuminate in theinstrument cluster and theappropriate DIC message displays.

. Press and release g again to turnon both systems.

StabiliTrak will automatically turn onif the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h(35 mph). Traction control willremain off.

See Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 222.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss in pressureof one of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop as soonas possible and inflate the tires to therecommended pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label.


IN BRIEF 25

See Vehicle Load Limits 0 197. Thewarning light will remain on until thetire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that the tirepressures are getting low and the tiresneed to be inflated to the properpressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System0 322.

Tire Fill Alert (If Equipped)

This feature provides visual andaudible alerts outside the vehicle tohelp when inflating an underinflatedtire to the recommended cold tirepressure. See “Tire Fill Alert (IfEquipped)” under Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 323.

Fuel

Premium Recommended

Use premium 93 octane — (R+M)/2 —unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline isrecommended. Unleaded gasoline withan octane rating as low as 87 may beused, but it will reduce performanceand fuel economy. See RecommendedFuel 0 253.

E85 or FlexFuel

No E85 or FlexFuel

Gasoline-ethanol fuel blends greaterthan E15 (15% ethanol by volume),such as E85, cannot be used in thisvehicle.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is time tochange the engine oil and filter. Theoil life system should be reset to 100%only following an oil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Using the DIC controls on theright side of the steering wheel,display OIL LIFE on the DIC. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 149. When remaining oil life islow, the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message will appear onthe display.


26 IN BRIEF

2. Press and hold SEL on the DICcontrols for a few seconds toclear the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message and reset the oillife at 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil ischanged. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oilchange.

The oil life system can also be reset asfollows:

1. Display OIL LIFE on the DIC. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 149.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message is not on, thesystem is reset.

See Engine Oil Life System 0 284.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuel mileage.Here are some driving tips to get thebest fuel economy possible:

. Set the climate controls to thedesired temperature after theengine is started, or turn them offwhen not required.

. Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

. Brake gradually and avoid abruptstops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speed limitsor drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires with thesame TPC Spec number moldedinto the tire's sidewall nearthe size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside ServiceU.S.: 1-800-224-1400

Canada: 1-800-882-1112

TTY Users (U.S. Only): 1-888-889-2438

New Cadillac owners are automaticallyenrolled in the Roadside ServiceProgram.

See Roadside Service 0 382.


KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 27

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

DoorsLiftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . 53Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Rear Camera Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Child-View Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle with aRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the RKE transmitterin the vehicle, and children orothers could be caught in the pathof a closing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with an RKEtransmitter.


28 KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS

Press the button on the side of theRKE transmitter to remove the key.Never pull the key out withoutpressing the button.

The key is used for the driver door.

See your dealer if a replacement keyor additional key is needed.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Service 0 382.

With an active OnStar or connectedservice plan, an OnStar Advisor mayremotely unlock the vehicle. SeeOnStar Overview 0 392.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement 0 388.

If there is a decrease in the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) operating range:

. Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Other vehiclesor objects may be blocking thesignal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” later inthis section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see your dealeror a qualified technician forservice.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Keyless Access system allows forvehicle entry when the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter iswithin 1 m (3 ft). See “Keyless AccessOperation” later in this section.



The RKE transmitter functions maywork up to 60 m (197 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System0 28.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

If enabled, the turn signal lamps flashonce on the second press to indicatelocking has occurred. If enabled, thehorn chirps when Q is pressed againwithin three seconds. See VehiclePersonalization 0 155.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed and Unlocked DoorAnti-Lockout is enabled, all doors willlock and then the driver door willimmediately unlock. See VehiclePersonalization 0 155. If the passengerdoor is open when Q is pressed, alldoors lock.

Pressing Q arms the alarm system.See Vehicle Alarm System 0 48.

If equipped with auto mirror folding,pressing and holding Q forone second will fold the mirrors,if enabled. See Vehicle Personalization0 155.

K : Press once to unlock the driverdoor. If K is pressed again withinthree seconds, all remaining doorsunlock. The interior lamps may comeon and stay on for 20 seconds or untilthe ignition is turned on.

If enabled, the turn signal lamps flashtwice to indicate unlocking hasoccurred. If enabled, the exteriorlamps may turn on. See VehiclePersonalization 0 155.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the alarm system. See VehicleAlarm System 0 48.

If equipped with auto mirror folding,pressing and holding K forone second will unfold the mirrors,if enabled. See Vehicle Personalization0 155.

Press and hold K until the windowsfully open, if remote windowoperation is enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 155.

c : Press twice to open the liftglass.

b : Press twice to open or close theliftgate. Press once to stop the liftgatefrom moving.

7 : Press and release to initiatevehicle locator. The turn signal lampsflash and the horn sounds three times.

Press and hold 7 for more thanthree seconds to activate the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds for 30 seconds,or until 7 is pressed again or thevehicle is started. The ignition mustbe off for the panic alarm to work.



/ : If equipped, press and release Q,then immediately press and hold /until the turn signals flash or for atleast four seconds. The engine may bestarted from outside the vehicle usingthe RKE transmitter. See RemoteVehicle Start 0 35.

Keyless Access Operation

The Keyless Access system allows forthe doors and liftgate to be accessedwithout pressing the RKE transmitterbutton. The RKE transmitter must bewithin 1 m (3 ft) of the liftgate or doorbeing opened. The buttons are on theoutside door handles.

Keyless Access can be programmed tounlock all doors on the first lock/unlock press from the driver door. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 155.

If equipped with memory seats, RKEtransmitters 1 and 2 are linked toseating positions of memory 1 or 2.See Memory Seats 0 65.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking from theDriver Door

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) ofthe door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on the driver doorhandle will unlock the driver door.If the lock/unlock button is pressedagain within five seconds, allpassenger doors and the liftgate willunlock.

Driver Side Shown, Passenger Similar

Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:

. It has been no more thanfive seconds since the first lock/unlock button press.

. Two lock/unlock button presseswere used to unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has been openedand all doors are now closed.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking from thePassenger Doors

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) ofthe door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on a passenger doorhandle will unlock all doors. Pressingthe lock/unlock button will cause alldoors to lock if any of the followingoccur:

. The lock/unlock button was usedto unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has been openedand all doors are now closed.



Disable/Enable Keyless Unlocking ofExterior Door Handles and Liftgate

If equipped, keyless unlocking of theexterior door handles and liftgate canbe disabled and enabled.

Disabling Keyless Unlocking:

With the vehicle off, press and hold Qand K on the RKE transmitter at thesame time for approximatelythree seconds. The turn signal lampswill flash four times quickly toindicate access is disabled. Using anyexterior handle to unlock the doors oropen the liftgate will cause the turnsignal lamps to flash four timesquickly, indicating access is disabled.If disabled, disarm the alarm systembefore starting the vehicle.

Enabling Keyless Unlocking:

With the vehicle off, press and hold Qand K on the RKE transmitter at thesame time for approximatelythree seconds. The turn signal lampswill flash twice quickly to indicateaccess is enabled.

Passive Locking

Keyless Access will lock the vehicleseveral seconds after all doors areclosed, if the vehicle is off and at leastone RKE transmitter has beenremoved from the interior, or noneremain in the interior.

If other electronic devices interferewith the RKE transmitter signal, thevehicle may not detect the RKEtransmitter inside the vehicle.If passive locking is enabled, the doorsmay lock with the RKE transmitterinside the vehicle. Do not leave theRKE transmitter in an unattendedvehicle.

To customize the doors toautomatically lock when exiting thevehicle, see “Remote Lock, Unlock,Start” under Vehicle Personalization0 155.

Temporary Disable of PassiveLocking

Temporarily disable passive locking bypressing and holding K on theinterior door switch with a door openfor at least four seconds, or until three

chimes are heard. Passive locking willthen remain disabled until Q on theinterior door is pressed, or until thevehicle is turned on.

Remote Left In Vehicle Alert

When the vehicle is turned off and anRKE transmitter is left in the vehicle,the horn will chirp three times afterall doors are closed. To turn on or offsee Vehicle Personalization 0 155.

Remote No Longer in Vehicle Alert

If the vehicle is on with a door open,and then all doors are closed, thevehicle will check for RKEtransmitters inside. If an RKEtransmitter is not detected, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) will displayNO REMOTE DETECTED and the hornwill chirp three times. This occursonly once each time the vehicle isdriven. To turn on or off see VehiclePersonalization 0 155.



Keyless Liftgate Opening

Press the touch pad on the rear of theliftgate above the license plate to openthe liftgate when all doors areunlocked or when the transmitter iswithin 1 m (3 ft).

Keyless Liftglass Opening

Press the exterior liftglass button toopen the liftglass when all doors areunlocked or when the transmitter iswithin 1 m (3 ft).

Key Access

To access a vehicle with a weaktransmitter battery, see Door Locks0 36.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmed tothe vehicle will work. If a transmitteris lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased and programmed throughyour dealer. The vehicle can bereprogrammed so that lost or stolentransmitters no longer work. Eachvehicle can have up to eighttransmitters matched to it.

Programming with RecognizedTransmitters

A new transmitter can be programmedto the vehicle when there are tworecognized transmitters.

To program, the vehicle must be offand all transmitters, both currentlyrecognized and new, must bewith you.

1. Remove the key from therecognized transmitter.

2. Place the two recognizedtransmitters in the cupholder oron the passenger seat.

3. Remove the key lock cylinder capon the driver door handle. SeeDoor Locks 0 36. Insert thevehicle key into the key lockcylinder on the driver doorhandle; then turn the keycounterclockwise, to the unlockposition, five times within10 seconds.

The DIC displays READY FORREMOTE #2, 3, 4, ETC.

4. Open the center console storagearea and the storage tray.

5. Place the new transmitter in thetransmitter pocket/insert, infront of the center consolestorage area.

6. Press ENGINE START/STOP.When the transmitter is learned,the DIC display will show that itis ready to program the nexttransmitter.

7. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket/insert andpress K or Q on the transmitter.



To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4–7.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdENGINE START/STOP forapproximately 12 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

8. Put the key back into thetransmitter.

9. Replace the key lock cylindercap. See Door Locks 0 36.

Programming without RecognizedTransmitters

If two currently recognizedtransmitters are not available, followthis procedure to program up to eighttransmitters. This feature is notavailable in Canada. This procedurewill take approximately 30 minutes tocomplete. The vehicle must be off andall transmitters to be programmedmust be with you.

1. Remove the vehicle key from thetransmitter.

2. Remove the key lock cylinder capon the driver door handle. SeeDoor Locks 0 36. Insert the

vehicle key into the key lockcylinder on the driver doorhandle; then turn the keycounterclockwise, to the unlockposition, five times within10 seconds.

The DIC displays REMOTELEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

3. Wait for 10 minutes until theDIC displays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARN,then press ENGINESTART/STOP.

The DIC will again displayREMOTE LEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

4. Repeat Step 3 two additionaltimes. After the third time allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during the nextsteps.

The DIC should now displayREADY FOR REMOTE # 1.

5. Place the new transmitter in thetransmitter pocket/insert, infront of the center consolestorage area. The storage areawill need to be opened to accessthe transmitter pocket/insert.

6. Press ENGINE START/STOP.When the transmitter is learned,the DIC display will show that itis ready to program the nexttransmitter.

7. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket/insert andpress K or Q on the transmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 5–7.



When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdENGINE START/STOP forapproximately 12 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

8. Return the key back into thetransmitter.

9. Replace the key lock cylindercap. See Door Locks 0 36.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

If the transmitter battery is weak or ifthere is interference with the signal,the DIC may display NO REMOTEDETECTED or NO REMOTE KEY WASDETECTED PLACE KEY INTRANSMITTER POCKET THENSTART YOUR VEHICLE when startingthe vehicle.

To start the vehicle:

1. Open the center console storagearea and the storage tray.

2. Place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket/insert.

3. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral) press the brake pedaland ENGINE START/STOP.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.

Battery Replacement

Caution

When replacing the battery, do nottouch any of the circuitry on thetransmitter. Static from your bodycould damage the transmitter.

Replace the battery if the DIC displaysREPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY.

1. Press the button on the side ofthe RKE transmitter near thebottom to remove the key. Neverpull the key out without pressingthe button.



2. Separate the two halves of thetransmitter using a flat toolinserted into the bottom centerof the transmitter. Do not usethe key slot.

3. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

4. Insert the new battery on theback housing, positive side facingdown. Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

5. Align the front and back housingthen snap the transmittertogether.

Remote Vehicle StartThe climate control system will comeon when the vehicle is startedremotely depending on the outsidetemperature.

The rear defog and heated and cooledseats, if equipped, may also come on.See Heated and Cooled Front Seats 0 69and Vehicle Personalization 0 155.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.Check local regulations for anyrequirements on remote starting ofvehicles.

Do not use remote start if the vehicleis low on fuel. The vehicle could runout of fuel.

The vehicle cannot be remotestarted if:

. The transmitter is in the vehicle.

. The hood is not closed.

. There is an emission controlsystem malfunction and themalfunction indicator lamp is on.

. The hazard flashers are on.

. Two remote vehicle starts or astart with an extension havealready been used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).



The engine will turn off during aremote vehicle start if:

. The coolant temperature getstoo high.

. The oil pressure gets low.

The RKE transmitter range may beless while the vehicle is running.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System0 28 or Vehicle Personalization 0 155.

Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

1. Press and release Q.

2. Immediately press and hold /until the turn signal lamps flashor for at least four seconds.

When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps will turn on. Thedoors will be locked and theclimate control system maycome on.

The engine will continue to runfor 15 minutes. RepeatSteps 1 and 2 for one 15-minutetime extension.

Turn the ignition on to operate thevehicle.

Extending Engine Run Time

The engine run time can be extendedby 15 minutes, for a total of30 minutes, if during the first15 minutes Steps 1 and 2 are repeatedwhile the engine is still running. Anextension can be requested30 seconds after starting.

A maximum of two remote starts, or asingle start with an extension, isallowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must be turnedon and then back off to use remotestart again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.


. Turn the ignition on and then off.

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. The doors can beunlocked and opened whilethe vehicle is moving. Thechance of being thrown out ofthe vehicle in a crash isincreased if the doors are notlocked. So, all passengersshould wear seat beltsproperly and the doors shouldbe locked whenever thevehicle is driven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heat

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

and can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock the doors frominside the vehicle:

. Press Q or K on a power doorlock switch.

. Push down the manual lock knobon the driver door to lock alldoors. Push down the lock knobon a passenger door to lock thatdoor only.

. Pull the door handle once tounlock that door. Pull the handleagain to unlatch it.

To lock or unlock the doors fromoutside the vehicle:

. Press Q or K on the RKEtransmitter

. Use the key in the front doors. Thekey cylinder is covered by a cap.See “Driver Door Key LockCylinder Access” later in thissection.

Keyless Access

The RKE transmitter must be within1 m (3 ft) of the liftgate or door beingopened. Press the button on the door

handle to open. See “Keyless AccessOperation” in Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 28.

Driver Door Key Lock CylinderAccess (Slotted Cap Access) (InCase of Dead Battery)

To access the driver door key lockcylinder:

1. Pull the door handle (1) to theopen position and hold it openuntil cap removal is complete.

2. Insert the key (4) into theslot (3) on the bottom of thecap (2) and lift the key upward.



3. Remove the cap (2).

4. Use the key (4) in the cylinder.

To replace the slotted cap:

1. Pull the door handle (1) to theopen position and hold it openuntil cap installation is complete.

2. Position the bottom edge of thecap under the lower edge of themetal piece (6). The tabs (7)attach to metal piece (6) at thepositions (5).

3. Rotate the cap upward to installinto place.

4. Check that the cap is secure.

5. Release the door handle.

Free-Turning Locks

The door key lock cylinder turns freelywhen either the wrong key is used,or the correct key is not fully inserted.The free turning door lock featureprevents the lock from being forcedopen. To reset the lock, turn it to thevertical position with the correct keyfully inserted. Remove the key andinsert it again. If this does not resetthe lock, turn the key halfway aroundin the cylinder and repeat the resetprocedure.

Power Door Locks

Press Q or K on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 28.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Delayed LockingThis feature delays the locking of thedoors until five seconds after all doorsare closed.



Delayed locking can only be turned onwhen the Unlocked Door Anti-Lockoutfeature has been turned off.

When Q is pressed on the power doorlock switch while a door or the liftgateis open, a chime will sound threetimes indicating delayed locking isactive.

The doors will lock automaticallyfive seconds after all doors are closed.If a door is reopened before that time,the five-second timer will reset whenall doors are closed again.

Press Q on the door lock switch again

or press Q on the RKE transmitter tolock doors immediately.

This feature can also be programmed.See Vehicle Personalization 0 155.

Automatic Door LocksThe doors will lock automaticallywhen all doors are closed, the ignitionis on, and the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

If a vehicle door is unlocked and thenopened and closed, the doors will lockeither when your foot is removed fromthe brake or the vehicle speedbecomes faster than 13 km/h (8 mph).

To unlock the doors:

. Press K on the power door lockswitch.

. Shift the transmission intoP (Park).

Automatic door locking cannot bedisabled. Automatic door unlockingcan be programmed. See VehiclePersonalization 0 155.

Lockout ProtectionIf the ignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY and the power door lockswitch is pressed with the driver dooropen, all the doors will lock and onlythe driver door will unlock.

If the vehicle is off and locking isrequested while a door is open, whenall doors are closed the vehicle willcheck for RKE transmitters inside.If an RKE transmitter is detected andthe number of RKE transmitters inside

has not reduced, the driver door willunlock and the horn will chirp threetimes.

Lockout Protection can be manuallyoverridden with the driver door openby pressing and holding Q on thepower door lock switch.

Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

If Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout isturned on and the vehicle is off, thedriver door is open, and locking isrequested, all the doors will lock andthe driver door will remain open.Press the button again to lock thedriver door. The Unlocked DoorAnti-Lockout feature can be turned onor off. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 155.

Safety LocksThe rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.



Press { to activate the safety locks onthe rear doors. The indicator lightcomes on when activated.

Press { again to deactivate the safetylocks.

Doors

Liftgate

{ Warning

Exhaust gases can enter the vehicleif it is driven with the liftgate ortrunk/hatch open, or with anyobjects that pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousness andeven death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

See Engine Exhaust 0 209.

Caution

To avoid damage to the liftgate orliftgate glass, make sure the areaabove and behind the liftgate isclear before opening it.



Power Liftgate Operation

{ Warning

You or others could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

Caution

Driving with an open andunsecured liftgate may result indamage to the power liftgatecomponents.

The power liftgate switch is on theoverhead console. The vehicle must bein P (Park).

The modes are:

MAX : Opens to maximum height.

3/4 : Opens to a reduced height thatcan be set from 3/4 to fully open. Useto prevent the liftgate from openinginto overhead obstructions such as agarage door or roof-mounted cargo.The liftgate can be manually openedall the way.

OFF : Opens manually only.

To power open or close the liftgate,select MAX or 3/4 mode and then:

. Pressb twice quickly on the RKEtransmitter until the liftgatemoves.

. Press8 on the overheadconsole. The driver door must beunlocked or locked without thesecurity armed.

. Press the touch pad on theunderside of the liftgate handleafter unlocking all doors. A lockedvehicle can be opened if the RKEtransmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) ofthe touch pad.



. Pressl on the bottom edge ofthe liftgate next to the latch toclose.

Press any liftgate button, the touchpad, orb on the RKE transmitterwhile the liftgate is moving tostop it. Pressing any liftgatebutton or pressingb twice quicklyon the RKE transmitter restarts theoperation in the reverse direction.Pressing the touch pad on the liftgatehandle will restart the motion, butonly in the opening direction.

Caution

Manually forcing the liftgate toopen or close during a power cyclecan damage the vehicle. Allow thepower cycle to complete.

The power liftgate may be temporarilydisabled in extremely lowtemperatures, or after repeated powercycling over a short period of time.If this occurs, the liftgate can still beoperated manually.

If the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park)while the power function is inprogress, the liftgate will continue tocompletion. If the vehicle isaccelerated before the liftgate hascompleted moving, the liftgate maystop or reverse direction. Check forDriver Information Center (DIC)messages and make sure the liftgate isclosed and latched before driving.

Falling Liftgate Detection

If the power liftgate automaticallycloses after a power opening cycle, itindicates that the system is reactingto excess weight on the liftgate or apossible support strut failure.A repetitive chime will sound whilethe falling liftgate detection feature isoperating. Remove any excess weight.If the liftgate continues toautomatically close after opening, seeyour dealer for service before usingthe power liftgate.

Interfering with the power liftgatemotion or manually closing theliftgate too quickly after poweropening may resemble a support strutfailure. This could also activate thefalling liftgate detection feature. Allowthe liftgate to complete its operationand wait a few seconds beforemanually closing the liftgate.



Obstacle Detection Features

If the liftgate encounters an obstacleduring a power open or close cycle,the liftgate will automatically reversedirection and move a short distanceaway from the obstacle. Afterremoving the obstruction, the powerliftgate operation can be used again.If the liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle,the power function will deactivate.After removing the obstructions,manually close the liftgate. This willallow normal power operationfunctions to resume.

If the vehicle is locked while theliftgate is closing, and an obstacle isencountered that prevents the liftgatefrom completely closing, the horn willsound as an alert that the liftgate didnot close.

Pinch sensors are on the side edges ofthe liftgate. If an object is caughtbetween the liftgate and the vehicleand presses against a sensor, the

liftgate will reverse direction and stopat a partially open position. Theliftgate will remain open until it isactivated again or closed manually.

Setting the 3/4 Mode

To change the position the liftgatestops at when opening:

1. Select MAX or 3/4 mode andpower open the liftgate.

2. Stop the liftgate movement atthe desired height by pressingany liftgate button. Manuallyadjust the liftgate position ifneeded.

3. Press and holdl on thebottom edge of the liftgate nextto the latch on the outside of theliftgate until the turn signalsflash and a beep sounds. Thisindicates the setting has beenrecorded.

The liftgate cannot be set below aminimum programmable height.If there is no light flash or sound,then the height adjustment may betoo low.

Manual Operation

Select OFF to manually operate theliftgate.

Caution

Attempting to move the liftgate tooquickly and with excessive forcemay result in damage to thevehicle.

Operate the liftgate manually with asmooth motion and moderate speed.The system includes a feature whichlimits the manual closing speed toprotect the components.



To open the liftgate, press K on the

power door lock switch or press K onthe RKE transmitter twice to unlockall doors. Press the touch pad (1) onthe underside of the liftgate handleand lift up.

Press the button (2) above the licenseplate to open the liftglass, or pressctwice quickly on the RKE transmitter.Do not leave the liftglass open whenraising the liftgate.

There will be a delay in the release ofthe liftglass if there is an attempt toopen it while the rear wiper is inmotion.

Use the pull cup to lower and closethe liftgate. Do not press the touchpad while closing the liftgate. This willcause the liftgate to be unlatched.

The liftgate can be opened whenlocked if the RKE transmitter is within1 m (3 ft) of the touch pad. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 28.

The liftgate has an electric latch.If the battery is disconnected or haslow voltage, the liftgate will not open.The liftgate will resume operationwhen the battery is reconnected andcharged.

Hands-Free Operation

If equipped, the liftgate may beoperated with a kicking motion nearthe center of the rear bumper at thelocation of the projected logo. TheRKE transmitter must be within 1 m(3 ft) of the rear bumper to operatethe power liftgate hands-free.

The hands-free feature will not workwhile the liftgate is moving. To stopthe liftgate while in motion use one ofthe liftgate switches.

The hands-free feature can becustomized. See Vehicle Personalization0 155. Choose from the following:

On-Open and Close : The kickingmotion is activated to both open andclose the liftgate.

On-Open Only : The kicking motion isactivated to only open the liftgate.

Off : The feature is disabled.



Kick Zone

To operate, move your foot in aforward kicking motion near thecenter of the rear bumper at thelocation of the projected logo, thenpull it back. The kick must comewithin 14 cm (6 in) of the rearbumper to activate. Then step back.

Caution

Splashing water may cause theliftgate to open. Keep the RKEtransmitter away from the rearbumper detection area or turn the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

liftgate mode to OFF when cleaningor working near the rear bumper toavoid accidental opening.

. Do not sweep your foot sideto side.

. Do not keep your foot under thebumper; the liftgate will notactivate.

. Do not touch the liftgate until ithas stopped moving.

This feature may be temporarilydisabled under some conditions. If theliftgate does not respond to the kick,open or close the liftgate by anothermethod or start the vehicle. Thefeature will be re-enabled.

When closing the liftgate using thisfeature, there will be a short delay.The taillamps will flash and a chimewill sound.

Step away from the liftgate before itstarts moving.

Projected Logo

If equipped with this feature, a vehiclelogo will be projected for one minuteonto the ground near the rear bumperwhen an RKE transmitter is detectedwithin approximately 2 m (6 ft) fromthe rear bumper. The projected logomay not be visible under brighterdaytime conditions.

. 1 m (3 ft) Hands-Free OperationDetection Zone

. 2 m (6 ft) Projected LogoDetection Zone



The projected logo shows where tokick towards the rear bumper.

The projected logo will not berestarted using the same RKEtransmitter unless it has been out ofrange for longer than 20 seconds.

If an RKE transmitter is againdetected within approximately 2 m(6 ft) of the liftgate, or another kickhas been detected, the one-minutetimer will be reset.

The projected logo will not workunder these conditions:

. The vehicle battery is low.

. The transmission is not inP (Park).

. Hands Free Liftgate Control is setto off in vehicle personalization.See Vehicle Personalization 0 155.

. Power liftgate is turned off.

. The vehicle remains parked for72 hours or more, with no RKEtransmitter use or Keyless Accessoperation. To re-enable, press anybutton on the RKE transmitter oropen and close a vehicle door.

The projected logo will not work for asingle RKE transmitter when atransmitter:

. Has been left withinapproximately 5 m (15 ft) of theliftgate for several minutes.

. Has been left inside the vehicleand all vehicle doors are closed.

. Has approached the area outsideof the liftgate five times within10 minutes.



Hands-Free Liftgate and Projected Logo Availability

Action Hands-Free Liftgate Projected Logo

RKE transmitter entering projected logodetection zone

Operative On for one minute

RKE transmitter left inside projectedlogo detection zone for minimum of10 minutes

Operative Off until RKE transmitter button pressor a door is opened and closed

RKE transmitter brought in and out ofprojected logo detection zone five timesor more within 10 minutes

Operative Off for one hour or until RKEtransmitter button press or a door isopened and closed

Vehicle remains parked for more than72 hours

Operative Off until RKE transmitter button pressor a door is opened and closed

Vehicle battery is low Non-operative Off

Transmission is not in P (Park) Non-operative Off

Power liftgate is turned off Non-operative Off

Hands-free liftgate is disabled invehicle personalization

Non-operative Off



Power Assist Steps

{ Warning

Never place hands or other bodyparts between the deployed powerassist steps and the vehicle. You orothers could be seriously injured.

{ Warning

Never step on a moving assist step.You or others could be seriouslyinjured.

Disable the assist steps before jackingor placing any object under thevehicle.

Too much ice buildup may preventdeployment of the power assist steps.Check the step position before exitingthe vehicle. If this happens, disablethe power assist steps, clear the ice,then enable the assist steps andconfirm normal function prior to use.

Keep hands, children, pets, objects,and clothing clear of the power assiststeps when in motion. The steps willreverse direction if they encounter anobstruction when opening or closing.Remove the obstruction, then openand close the door on the same sideto complete the motion of the assiststeps. If the obstruction is not cleared,the assist steps remain extended whiledriving.

To change the settings:

1. TouchF.

2. Touch Running Boards icon.

The options are:

OFF : Disables the power assist steps,so they will not deploy.

ON : Power assist steps will deploywhen a door is opened. When a dooris closed the assist steps willautomatically retract afterthree seconds.

Extended : Keeps the steps deployedwhen the vehicle is in P (Park) orN (Neutral). This setting may be usedwhen cleaning the steps.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm System

The indicator light, on the instrumentpanel near the windshield, indicatesthe status of the system.

Off : Alarm system is disarmed.

On Solid : Vehicle is secured duringthe delay to arm the system.



Fast Flash : Vehicle is unsecured.A door, the liftgate or the hoodis open.

Slow Flash : Alarm system is armed.

Arming the Alarm System

1. Turn off the vehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle in one ofthree ways:

. Use the RKE transmitter.

. Use the Keyless Accesssystem.

. With a door open, press Qon the interior of the door.

3. After 30 seconds, the alarmsystem will arm and theindicator light will begin toslowly flash. Pressing Q on theRKE transmitter a second timewill bypass the 30-second delayand immediately arm the alarmsystem.

The vehicle alarm system will not armif the doors are locked with the key.

If the driver door is opened withoutfirst unlocking with the RKEtransmitter, the horn will chirp andthe lights will flash to indicatepre-alarm. If the vehicle is not started,or the door is not unlocked bypressing K on the RKE transmitterduring the 10-second pre-alarm, thealarm will be activated.

The alarm will also be activated if apassenger door, the liftgate, or thehood is opened without firstdisarming the system. When thealarm is activated, the turn signalsflash and the horn sounds for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorized event.

Disarming the Alarm System

To disarm the alarm system or turnoff the alarm if it has been activated:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Unlock the vehicle using theKeyless Access system.

. Start the vehicle.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:

. Lock the vehicle after alloccupants have exited.

. Always unlock a door with theRKE transmitter, or use theKeyless Access system.

Unlocking the driver door with thekey will not disarm the system orturn off the alarm.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed on the RKEtransmitter and the horn chirps threetimes, an alarm occurred previouslywhile the alarm system was armed.

If the alarm has been activated, amessage will appear on the DIC.

Power Sounder, InclinationSensor and Intrusion Sensor

In addition to the standardtheft-deterrent system features, thissystem may also have a powersounder, inclination sensor andintrusion sensor.



The power sounder provides anaudible alarm which is distinct fromthe vehicle’s horn. It has its ownpower source, and can sound an alarmif the vehicle’s battery iscompromised.

The inclination sensor can set off thealarm if it senses movement of thevehicle, such as a change in vehicleorientation.

The intrusion sensor monitors thevehicle interior, and can activate thealarm if it senses unauthorized entryinto the vehicle’s interior. Do notallow passengers or pets to remain inthe vehicle when the intrusion sensoris activated.

Before arming the theft-deterrentsystem and activating the intrusionsensor:

. Make sure all doors and windowsare completely closed.

. Secure any loose items such assunshades.

. Make sure there are noobstructions blocking the sensorsin the front overhead console.

. Close DVD screens before leavingthe vehicle.

Inclination and IntrusionSensors Disable Switch

It is recommended that the intrusionand inclination sensors be deactivatedif pets are left in the vehicle or thevehicle is being transported.

With the vehicle turned off, pressoin the front overhead console. Theindicator light will come onmomentarily, indicating that thesesensors have been disabled for thenext alarm system arming cycle.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement 0 388.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the vehicle isturned off.

The immobilization system isdisarmed when the ignition is on anda valid transmitter is found in thevehicle.

The security light in the instrumentcluster comes on if there is a problemwith arming or disarming thetheft-deterrent system.



The system has one or moretransmitters matched to animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle. Only a correctly matchedtransmitter will start the vehicle.If the transmitter is ever damaged,you may not be able to start thevehicle.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn thevehicle off and try again.

If the RKE transmitter appears to beundamaged, try another transmitter orplace the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket/insert next to thecenter console storage area betweenthe driver and front passenger seats.See “Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 28.

If the engine does not start with theother transmitter or when thetransmitter is in the pocket/insert, thevehicle needs service. See your dealerwho can service the theft-deterrentsystem and have a new transmitterprogrammed to the vehicle.

Do not leave the transmitter or devicethat disarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If you cuttoo sharply into the right lane, youcould hit a vehicle on the right.Check the inside mirror or glanceover your shoulder before changinglanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen from thedriver seat.



Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Press (1) or (2) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.The indicator light comes on.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move the mirror up,down, right, or left.

3. Adjust the outside mirror so thatthe side of the vehicle and thearea behind are seen.

4. Press either (1) or (2) again todeselect the mirror. The indicatorlight goes off.

Exterior Automatic DimmingMirror

If equipped, the driver outside mirrorautomatically adjusts for the glare ofheadlamps behind. This feature comeson when the vehicle is started. SeeAutomatic Dimming Rearview Mirror0 53.

Turn Signal Indicator

The vehicle may have a turn signalindicator on the mirrors that flashesin the direction of the turn or lanechange.

Folding Mirrors

Power Folding

1. Press{ to fold the mirrorsinward.

2. Press{ again to return themirrors to the driving position.

Resetting the Power Folding Mirrors

Reset the power folding mirrors if:

. The mirrors are accidentallyobstructed while folding.

. They are accidentally manuallyfolded/unfolded.


KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 53. The mirrors will not stay in the

unfolded position.

. The mirrors vibrate at normaldriving speeds.

Fold and unfold the mirrors one timeusing the mirror controls to resetthem to their normal position.A popping noise may be heard duringthe resetting of the power foldingmirrors. This sound is normal after amanual folding operation.

Auto Mirror Folding

If equipped, press and hold Q on theRKE transmitter for approximatelyone second to automatically fold theexterior mirrors. Press and hold K onthe RKE transmitter for approximatelyone second to unfold. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 28.

This feature is turned on or offthrough vehicle personalization. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 155.

Heated MirrorsK : Press to heat the outside mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate Control System0 177.

Reverse Tilt MirrorsIf equipped with memory seats, thepassenger and/or driver mirror tilts toa preselected position when thevehicle is in R (Reverse). This allowsthe curb to be seen when parallelparking.

The mirror(s) return to the originalposition when:

. The vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or remains inR (Reverse) for about 30 seconds.

. The ignition is turned off.

. The vehicle is driven inR (Reverse) above a set speed.

To turn this feature on or off, seeVehicle Personalization 0 155.

Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind your vehicle.

If equipped with OnStar, there may bethree buttons at the bottom of themirror. See OnStar Overview 0 392.

To avoid accidental OnStar calls, cleanthe mirror with the ignition off. Donot spray glass cleaner directly on themirror. Use a soft towel dampenedwith water.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe rearview mirror automaticallydims to reduce the glare of theheadlamps from behind. This featurecomes on when the vehicle is started.



Rear Camera MirrorIf equipped, this automatic dimmingmirror provides a wide angle cameraview of the area behind the vehicle.

Pull the tab rearward to turn on thedisplay. Push the tab forward to turnit off. When off, the mirror isautomatic dimming. Adjust the mirrorfor a clear view of the area behind thevehicle while the display is off.

To adjust the brightness, press thebutton (1) on the back of the rearviewmirror without covering the lightsensor (2).

Each button press cycles thebrightness between five settings.

{ Warning

The Rear Camera Mirror (RCM) hasa limited view. Portions of the road,vehicles, and other objects may notbe seen. Do not drive or park thevehicle using only this camera.Objects may appear closer thanthey are. Check the outside mirrorsor glance over your shoulder whenmaking lane changes or merging.Failure to use proper care mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage.



The camera that provides the RearCamera Mirror (RCM) image is abovethe license plate, next to the RearVision Camera (RVC).

To clean the rear camera, see RearWindow Wiper/Washer 0 126.

Troubleshooting

If the tab is in the rearward positionand a blue screen and d are displayedin the mirror and the display shutsoff, see your dealer for service.

The RCM may not work properly ordisplay a clear image if:

. There is glare from the sun orheadlamps. This may obstructobjects from view.

. Dirt, snow, or other debris blocksthe camera lens. Clean the lenswith a soft damp cloth.

. The back of the vehicle has beendamaged and the position andmounting angle of the camera haschanged.

Child-View Mirror

If equipped, the child-view mirror ison the overhead console. Press thefixed button on the cover to release.Push the mirror back up when notin use.



Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helpless adult,or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windows closedin warm or hot weather. They canbe overcome by the extreme heatand suffer permanent injuries oreven death from heat stroke.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce the sound,open either a front window or thesunroof, if equipped.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriously injuredor killed if caught in the path of aclosing window. Never leave theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter in a vehicle withchildren. When there are children inthe rear seat, use the windowlockout switch to prevent operationof the windows. See Keys 0 27.

Power windows work when theignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 207.

Using the window switch, press toopen or pull to close the window.

The windows may be temporarilydisabled if they are used repeatedlywithin a short time.



Window Lockout

This feature stops the rear passengerwindow switches from working.

. PressZ to engage the rearwindow lockout feature. Theindicator light is on when engaged.

. PressZ again to disengage.

Window Express Movement

All windows can be opened withoutholding the window switch. Press theswitch down fully and quickly releaseto express open the window.

If equipped, pull the window switchup fully and quickly release to expressclose the window.

Briefly press or pull the windowswitch in the same direction to stopthat window’s express movement.

Window Automatic ReversalSystem

The express-close feature will reversewindow movement if it comes incontact with an object. Extreme coldor ice could cause the window toauto-reverse. The window will operatenormally after the object or conditionis removed.

Automatic Reversal SystemOverride

{ Warning

If automatic reversal systemoverride is active, the window willnot reverse automatically. You orothers could be injured and thewindow could be damaged. Beforeusing automatic reversal system

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

override, make sure that all peopleand obstructions are clear of thewindow path.

When the engine is on, override theautomatic reversal system by pullingand holding the window switch ifconditions prevent it from closing.

Programming the PowerWindows

Programming may be necessary if thevehicle battery has been disconnectedor discharged. If the window is unableto express-up, program eachexpress-close window:

1. Close all doors.

2. Turn the ignition on or to ACC/ACCESSORY.

3. Partially open the window to beprogrammed. Then close it andcontinue to pull the switchbriefly after the window has fullyclosed.



4. Open the window and continueto press the switch briefly afterthe window has fully opened.

Remote Window Operation

If equipped, this feature allows thewindows to be opened remotely.If enabled in vehicle personalization,press and hold " on the RKEtransmitter. See Vehicle Personalization0 155.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to block glare.Detach the sun visor from the centermount to pivot to the side windowand, if equipped, extend along the rod.

Roof

Sunroof

1. SLIDE Switch2. TILT Switch

If equipped, the sunroof only operateswhen the ignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 207.

Slide Switch

Express-Open/Express-Close : Toexpress-open the sunroof, fully pressand release I (1). Press the switch

again to stop the movement. Toexpress-close the sunroof, fully pressand releaseK (1). Press the switchagain to stop the movement.

Open/Close (Manual Mode) : Toopen the sunroof, press andhold I (1). Release the switchto stop the movement. Press andholdK (1) to close the sunroof.Release the switch to stop themovement.

Tilt Switch

Vent : From the closed position,pressJ (2) to vent the sunroof. PressK (2) to close the sunroof vent.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise. Theair deflector will retract when thesunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshadewhich can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually when thesunroof is in the vent or fully closedposition.



Automatic Reversal System

The sunroof has an automatic reversalsystem that is only active when thesunroof is operated inexpress-close mode.

If an object is in the path whileexpress closing, the reversal systemwill detect an object, stop, and openthe sunroof again.

If frost or other conditions preventclosing, override the feature by closingthe sunroof in manual mode. To stopmovement, release the switch.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.

Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loose debris.Wipe the sunroof seal and roof sealingarea using a clean cloth, mild soap,and water. Do not remove grease fromthe sunroof.

If water is seen dripping into thewater drainage system, this is normal.


60 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS

Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Front SeatsPower Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 62Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Heated and Cooled Front Seats . . . 69

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Seat BeltsSeat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Seat Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Seat Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Replacing Seat Belt System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . 89When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . 92How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . 92What Will You See after an AirbagInflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . 93Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . 98

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Replacing Airbag System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Infants and Young Children . . . . . 101Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . 103Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . 105Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) . . . . . . 106

Replacing LATCH System PartsAfter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in theRear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in theFront Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116


SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 61

Head RestraintsFront Seats

The vehicle’s front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinalinjury in a crash. Do not drive untilthe head restraints for all occupantsare installed and adjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraint upto raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it is lockedin place.

To lower the head restraint, press thebutton, located on the top of theseatback, and push the head restraintdown. Try to move the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.



Second Row Seats

The vehicle's second row seats havehead restraints in the outboardseating positions that cannot beadjusted.

The second row seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.

Third Row Seats

The third row seat head restraint canbe lowered to allow for better visibilitywhen the rear seat is unoccupied.

To lower the head restraint, press thebutton located on the top of theseatback and push the headrestraint down.

Return the lowered head restraint tothe upright position until it locks intoplace. Push and pull on the headrestraint to make sure it is locked.

If you are installing a child restraintin the third row seat, see “Securing aChild Restraint Designed for theLATCH System” under Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 106.

Front Seats

Power Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of the vehicleif you try to adjust a driver seatwhile the vehicle is moving. Adjustthe driver seat only when thevehicle is not moving.

{ Warning

The power seats will work with theignition off. Children could operatethe power seats and be injured.Never leave children alone in thevehicle.




If equipped, the ignition must be onto use all uplevel seat features.

1. Feature Select2. Up3. Rearward4. Down5. Forward

. Move Feature Select (1) to displayseat adjustments on theinfotainment display. Press andrelease or hold to scroll throughfeatures.

. Press Up (2) to make upwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.

. Press Rearward (3) to makerearward adjustments of theselected feature.

. Press Down (4) to make downwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.

. Press Forward (5) to make forwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.

Base Seat Adjustment

To adjust the seat:

. Move the seat forward or rearwardby sliding the control forward orrearward.

. Raise or lower the front part of theseat cushion by moving the frontof the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat by movingthe rear of the control up or down.

Lumbar Adjustment

Lumbar and Bolster Support



To adjust lumbar support:

. Press and hold the control forwardto increase or rearward to decreaseupper and lower lumbar supportat the same time.

. Press and hold the control up toincrease upper lumbar supportand decrease lower lumbarsupport.

Press and hold the control downto increase lower lumbar supportand decrease upper lumbarsupport.


To adjust lumbar support, if equipped:

. Press and release or hold FeatureSelect (1) to scroll to lumbarsupport on the infotainmentdisplay.

. Press Forward (5) or Rearward (3)to adjust lumbar forward orrearward.

. Press Up (2) or Down (4) to adjustlumbar up or down.

To adjust bolster support, if equipped:


. Press and release or hold FeatureSelect (1) to scroll to bolstersupport on the infotainmentdisplay.

. Press Forward (5) or Rearward (3)to adjust bolster support inward oroutward.

Upper Shoulder Support

To adjust upper shoulder support,if equipped:

. Press and release or hold FeatureSelect (1) to scroll to uppershoulder support on theinfotainment display.


SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 65. Press Forward (5) or Rearward (3)

to adjust shoulder support forwardor rearward.

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckled up,the seat belts cannot do their job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it will bein front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would bethere, not at your pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit well backin the seat and wear the seat beltproperly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if thevehicle is moving.

Memory Seats



If equipped, memory seats allow twodrivers to save and recall their uniqueseat positions for driving the vehicle,and a shared exit position for gettingout of the vehicle. Other featurepositions may also be saved, such aspower mirrors and power steeringwheel, if equipped. Memory positionsare linked to RKE transmitter 1 or 2for automatic memory recalls.

Before saving, adjust all availablememory feature positions. Turn theignition on and then press and releaseSET; a beep will sound. Thenimmediately press and hold 1, 2,orB (Exit) until two beeps sound.To manually recall these positions,press and hold 1, 2, orB until thesaved position is reached. Follow theinstructions under “Saving MemoryPositions.”

The vehicle identifies the currentdriver’s RKE transmitter number(1–8). See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 28. Only RKEtransmitters 1 and 2 can be used forautomatic memory recalls. A DriverInformation Center (DIC) welcomemessage indicating the transmitter

number may display for the first fewignition cycles following a transmitterchange. For Auto Memory Recall towork properly, save the positions tothe memory button (1 or 2) matchingthe RKE transmitter number displayedin the DIC welcome message. Carrythe linked RKE transmitter whenentering the vehicle.

Memory adjustments may not beavailable upon delivery or after serviceuntil steps in “Saving MemoryPositions” section are performed.

Vehicle Personalization Settings

. To have the Auto Memory Recallmovement begin when the vehicleis started, select the Settingsmenu, then Vehicle, then Comfortand Convenience, and then AutoMemory Recall. Select On or Off.See “Auto Memory Recall” later inthis section.

. To begin Easy Exit Recallmovement when the ignition isturned off and the driver door isopened, or when the ignition isturned off with the driver dooralready opened, select the Settings

menu, then Vehicle, then Comfortand Convenience, and then EasyExit Options. Select On or Off. See“Easy Exit Recall” later in thissection.

. See Vehicle Personalization 0 155for additional setting information.

Identifying Driver Number

To identify the driver number:

1. Start the vehicle with a differentkey or RKE transmitter. The DICshould display the drivernumber; 1 or 2. Turn the ignitionoff and remove the key or RKEtransmitter from the vehicle.

2. Start the vehicle with the initialkey or RKE transmitter. The DICshould display the other drivernumber not shown in Step 1.

Saving Memory Positions

Read these instructions completelybefore saving memory positions.

To save preferred driving positions1 and 2:




A DIC welcome message mayindicate driver number 1 or 2.

2. Adjust all available memoryfeatures to the desired drivingposition.

3. Press and release SET; a beepwill sound.

4. Immediately press and hold the1 or 2 memory button matchingthe above DIC welcome messageuntil two beeps sound.

If too much time passes betweenreleasing SET and pressing 1, thememory position will not besaved and two beeps will notsound. Repeat Steps 3 and 4.

1 or 2 corresponds to the drivernumber. See “Identifying DriverNumber” previously in thissection.

5. Repeat Steps 1–4 for a seconddriver using 1 or 2.

To save the position forB and easyexit features, repeat Steps 1–4 usingB. This saves the position for gettingout of the vehicle.

Save preferred memory featurepositions to both 1 and 2 if you arethe only driver.

Manually Recalling MemoryPositions

Press and hold 1, 2, orB to recallthe previously saved memorypositions.

To stop Manual Memory Recallmovement, release 1, 2, orB or pressany of the following controls:

. Power seat

. Memory SET

. Power mirror, with the driver orpassenger side mirror selected

. Power steering wheel, if equipped

Auto Memory Recall

The vehicle identifies the number ofthe current driver’s RKE transmitter(1–8). See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 28. If the RKEtransmitter is 1 or 2, and AutoMemory Recall is programmed on invehicle personalization, the positionssaved to the same memory button

number 1 or 2 are automaticallyrecalled when the ignition is turnedon, or turned from off to ACC/ACCESSORY. RKE transmitters 3–8will not provide automatic memoryrecalls.

To turn Auto Memory Recall on or off,see "Vehicle Personalization Settings"previously in this section and VehiclePersonalization 0 155.

The shift lever must be in P (Park) tostart Auto Memory Recall. AutoMemory Recall will complete if thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park) priorto reaching the saved memoryposition.

To stop Auto Memory Recallmovement, turn the ignition off orpress any of the following controls:

. Power seat

. Memory SET, 1, 2, orB





If the saved memory seat positiondoes not automatically recall or recallsto the wrong positions, the driver’sRKE transmitter number (1 or 2) maynot match the memory buttonnumber that positions were saved to.Try saving the position to the othermemory button or try the other RKEtransmitter.

Easy Exit Recall

Easy Exit Recall is not linked to anRKE transmitter. The position saved toB is used for all drivers. To turnEasy Exit Recall on or off, see "VehiclePersonalization Settings" previously inthis section and Vehicle Personalization0 155.

If turned on, the position saved toBis automatically recalled when one ofthe following occurs:

. The vehicle is turned off and thedriver door is opened within ashort time.

. The vehicle is turned off with thedriver door open.

To stop Easy Exit Recall movement,press any of the following memorycontrols:

. Power seat

. Memory SET, 1, 2, orB



Obstructions

If something has blocked the driverseat and/or power steering wheelwhile recalling a memory position, therecall may stop. Remove theobstruction and try the recall again.If the memory position still does notrecall, see your dealer for service.

Massage

If equipped, the ignition must be onto use the massage feature.

To activate and adjust massage:

1. Turn the selection control (1) toview massage options on theinfotainment display.

2. Select massage feature.

3. Press up or down to select themassage type.

4. Press forward or rearward tochange the intensity.



5. To activate massage at lastmassage type and intensitysettings or to turn massage off,press the massage On/Offcontrol (2).

Heated and Cooled FrontSeats

{ Warning

If temperature change or pain tothe skin cannot be felt, the seatheater may cause burns. To reducethe risk of burns, use care whenusing the seat heater, especially forlong periods of time. Do not placeanything on the seat that insulatesagainst heat, such as a blanket,cushion, cover, or similar item. Thismay cause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seat heatermay cause a burn or may damagethe seat.

To operate, the engine must berunning.

PressI or+ to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.

Press J or z to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion and seatback.

PressC or { to cool the driver orpassenger seat.

When this feature is off, the heatedand cooled seat symbols on thebuttons are white. When a heated seatis turned on, the symbol turns red.When a cooled seat is turned on, thesymbol turns blue.

Press the button once for the highestsetting. With each press of the button,the seat will change to the next lowersetting, and then to the off setting.The indicator lights next to thebuttons indicate three for the highestsetting and one for the lowest. If theheated seats are on high for anextended time, their level mayautomatically be lowered.

The passenger seat may take longer toheat up.



Remote Start Auto Heated andCooled Seats

During a remote start, the heated orcooled seats will turn on if enabled invehicle personalization. When it iscold outside, the heated seats turn on;when it is hot outside, the cooledseats turn on. The seats will continueto operate depending on the vehicle'sinternal temperature. If auto heated orcooled seats are not equipped orenabled, seat operation is canceledwhen the ignition is turned on. Pressthe heated or cooled seat button touse the heated or cooled seats afterthe vehicle is started. See RemoteVehicle Start 0 35 and VehiclePersonalization 0 155.

The heated or cooled seat indicatorlights do not turn on during a remotestart.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced. Thisis normal.

Auto Heated and Cooled Seats

When the engine is running, the autoheated or cooled seats willautomatically activate at the leveldetermined by the vehicle's interiortemperature, if enabled in vehiclepersonalization. See VehiclePersonalization 0 155. The indicatorlights next to the buttons indicate thelevel of operation. Use the heated orcooled seat buttons to turn off autoheated or cooled seats. If thepassenger seat is unoccupied, thisfeature will not activate that seat.

Rear SeatsRear Seat Reminder

If equipped, the message REAR SEATREMINDER LOOK IN REAR SEATdisplays under certain conditionsindicating there may be an item orpassenger in the rear seat. Checkbefore exiting the vehicle.

This feature will activate when asecond row door is opened while thevehicle is on or up to 10 minutesbefore the vehicle is turned on. Therewill be an alert when the vehicle isturned off. The alert does not directlydetect objects in the rear seat; instead,under certain conditions, it detectswhen a rear door is opened andclosed, indicating that there may besomething in the rear seat.



The feature is active only once eachtime the vehicle is turned on and off,and will require reactivation byopening and closing the second rowdoors. There may be an alert evenwhen there is nothing in the rear seat;for example, if a child entered thevehicle through the rear door and leftthe vehicle without the vehicle beingshut off.

The feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalization 0 155.

Heated Rear Seats

{ Warning

If temperature change or pain tothe skin cannot be felt, the seatheater may cause burns. See theWarning under Heated and CooledFront Seats 0 69.

The buttons are on the rear of thecenter console.

With the engine running, press M orL to heat the left or right outboardseat cushion. An indicator on the rearclimate control display appears whenthis feature is on.

Press the button once for the highestsetting. With each press of the button,the seat will change to the next lowersetting, and then to the off setting.The indicator lights next to thebuttons indicate three for the highestsetting and one for the lowest.

If the heated seats are on high for anextended time, their level mayautomatically be lowered.

Second Row SeatsThe second row seats can be foldedfor additional cargo space or foldedand tumbled for easy entry and exit tothe third row seat.

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the outboardside of the seat.



2. Move the seatback to the desiredposition, and then release thelever to lock the seatback inplace.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

1. Lift the lever fully while applyingpressure to the seatback, and theseatback will return to theupright position. If the lever islifted without applying pressure,the seat will release to a foldedposition.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

Manual Fold and Tumble Feature

{ Warning

Do not leave the second row seat ina tumbled position while thevehicle is in motion. A tumbled seatis not locked. It can move when thevehicle is in motion. People in thevehicle could be injured in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to return theseat to the passenger seatingposition before driving the vehicle.Push and pull on the seat to makesure it is locked into place.

Caution

Folding a rear seat with the seatbelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the seatbelts. Always unbuckle the seatbelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

Folding and Tumbling the Seat

To fold and tumble the seat:

1. Make sure that there is nothingunder, in front of, or on the seat.

2. Lift the lever on the outboardside of the seat to release theseatback.



The seatback will fold forward tocreate a flat load floor.

If the seatback cannot fold flat,try moving the front seat forwardand/or put the front seatback inthe upright position.

3. Lift the lever again to release therear of the seat from the floor.The seat will tumble forward.

Folding and Tumbling the Seat fromthe Third Row Seat

{ Warning

Using the third row seating positionwhile the second row is folded,or folded and tumbled, could causeinjury in a sudden stop or crash. Besure to return the seat to thepassenger seating position. Pushand pull on the seat to make sure itis locked into place.

To fold and tumble the seat from thethird row seat:


2. Pull the strap on the bottom rearof the second row seat to releasethe seatback. The seatback willfold forward.



3. Pull the strap again to releasethe rear of the seat from thefloor. The seat will tumbleforward.

Automatic Fold and TumbleFeature

{ Warning

Do not leave the second row seat ina tumbled position while thevehicle is in motion. A tumbled seatis not locked. It can move when the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle is in motion. People in thevehicle could be injured in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to return theseat to the passenger seatingposition before driving the vehicle.Push and pull on the seat to makesure it is locked into place.

{ Warning

Automatically folding and tumblingthe seat when someone is sitting inthe seat, could cause injury to theperson sitting there. Always makesure there is no one sitting in theseat before pressing the automaticseat release switch.

Caution

Folding a rear seat with the seatbelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the seatbelts. Always unbuckle the seatbelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

The transmission must be in P (Park)for this feature to work.

Folding and Tumbling the Seat

To fold and tumble the seat:




Driver Side Rear Panel Switch

2. Press the automatic seat releaseswitch on the panel behind therear doors. The seatbackautomatically folds flat.

3. Press the switch again to releasethe rear of the seat from thefloor. The seat will tumbleforward.

Folding and Tumbling the SecondRow Seat from the Cargo Area

1. Second Row Power Seat Foldand Tumble Switches

2. Third Row Power Seat Foldand Raise Switches

To fold and tumble the seat from thecargo area:


2. Press the switch (1) on the sidetrim of the cargo area to fold thesecond row seatback.

The left switch folds the leftseatback, and the right switchfolds the right seatback.

3. Press the switch again to releasethe rear of the seat from thefloor. The seat will tumbleforward.

The switches (2) can be used to foldthe third row seatbacks from thecargo area. See Third Row Seats 0 76.

Returning the Seat to the SittingPosition

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.



To return the seat to the sittingposition from the tumbled position:

1. Pull the seat down until itlatches to the floor. The seatbackcannot be raised if the seat is notlatched to the floor.

2. Lift the seatback and push itrearward. Push and pull on theseatback to make sure it islocked.

3. For the 60/40 split-bench seat,make sure the seat belt in thecenter seating position is notcaught between the two seatsand is not twisted.

Third Row Seats

Folding the Seatback

Caution

Folding a rear seat with the seatbelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the seatbelts. Always unbuckle the seat

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

belts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

The transmission must be in P (Park)for this feature to work.

The third row seatbacks can be foldedto increase cargo space.



To fold the seatback:

1. Open the liftgate to access thecontrols for the third row seat.


3. Fully lower the head restraints.See Head Restraints 0 61. Put thesecond row seatback in theupright position. See Second RowSeats 0 71.

4. Disconnect the rear seat beltmini-latch, using a key in theslot on the mini-buckle, and letthe belt retract into theheadliner.



5. Stow the mini-latch in the holderin the headliner.

6. Press and hold the switch (2) onthe side trim of the cargo area tofold the third row seatback.

The left switch folds the leftseatback, and the right switchfolds the right seatback.

7. Repeat the steps for the otherseatback, if desired.

The switches (1) can be used to fold orfold and tumble the second row seatsfrom the cargo area. See Second RowSeats 0 71.

Returning the Third RowSeatback to the Upright Position



To return the third row seatback tothe upright position:

1. Open the liftgate to access thecontrols for the seat.

2. Press and hold the switch (2) onthe side trim of the cargo area toraise the third row seatback.

The left switch raises the leftseatback, and the right switchraises the right seatback.

{ Warning

A seat belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the seat belts are properlyrouted and attached, and are nottwisted.

3. Reconnect the center seat beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle. Donot let it twist.

4. Pull on the seat belt to be surethe mini-latch is secure.

5. Repeat the steps for the otherseatback, if desired.



Seat BeltsThis section describes how to use seatbelts properly, and some things notto do.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where a seatbelt cannot be worn properly. In acrash, if you or your passenger(s)are not wearing seat belts, injuriescan be much worse than if you arewearing seat belts. You can beseriously injured or killed by hittingthings inside the vehicle harder orby being ejected from the vehicle.In addition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ride ina cargo area, inside or outside of avehicle. In a collision, passengersriding in these areas are more likelyto be seriously injured or killed. Do

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

not allow passengers to ride in anyarea of the vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seat belts.

Always wear a seat belt, and checkthat all passenger(s) are restrainedproperly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the seat belts. SeeSeat Belt Reminders 0 138.

Why Seat Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travel asfast as the vehicle does. If the vehiclestops suddenly, you keep going untilsomething stops you. It could be thewindshield, the instrument panel,or the seat belts!

When you wear a seat belt, you andthe vehicle slow down together. Thereis more time to stop because you stopover a longer distance and, when wornproperly, your strongest bones takethe forces from the seat belts. That iswhy wearing seat belts makes suchgood sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSeat Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing aseat belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a seat belt or not. Yourchance of being conscious duringand after a crash, so you canunbuckle and get out, is muchgreater if you are belted.



Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear seat belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systemsonly. They work with seat belts—not instead of them. Whether ornot an airbag is provided, alloccupants still have to buckle upto get the most protection.

Also, in nearly all states and in allCanadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing seat belts.

How to Wear Seat BeltsProperlyFollow these rules for everyone'sprotection.

There are additional things to knowabout seat belts and children,including smaller children and infants.If a child will be riding in the vehicle,see Older Children 0 99 or Infants andYoung Children 0 101. Review andfollow the rules for children inaddition to the following rules.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who are wearingseat belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a seat belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in front ofyou (if possible).

. Always use the correct buckle foryour seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,

this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could cause seriousor even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.The shoulder belt locks if there isa sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearing yourseat belt properly.



Never allow the lap or shoulder belt tobecome loose or twisted.

Never wear the shoulder belt underboth arms or behind your back.

Always use the correct buckle for yourseating position.

Never route the lap or shoulder beltover an armrest.



Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

If you are using a rear seating positionwith a detachable seat belt, and theseat belt is not attached, see ThirdRow Seats 0 76 for instructions onreconnecting the seat belt to themini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the frontoutboard seating position mayaffect the passenger sensingsystem. See Passenger SensingSystem 0 93.

For front seating positions, if thewebbing locks in the latch platebefore it reaches the buckle, tiltthe latch plate flat to unlock.



3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks. If the latchplate will not go fully into thebuckle, check if the correctbuckle is being used.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see Seat BeltExtender 0 86.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See

“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”in this section for instructions onuse and important safetyinformation.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

For third row seats, it may benecessary to pull stitching on theseat belt through the latch plateto fully tighten the lap belt onsmaller occupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt should returnto its stowed position.

For third row seats, slide the latchplate up the safety webbing when theseat belt is not in use. The latch plateshould rest on the stitching on theseat belt.

Always stow the seat belt slowly. If theseat belt webbing returns quickly tothe stowed position, the retractor maylock and cannot be pulled out. If thishappens, pull the seat belt straight outfirmly to unlock the webbing, andthen release it. If the webbing is stilllocked in the retractor, see yourdealer.



Before a door is closed, be sure theseat belt is out of the way. If a door isslammed against a seat belt, damagecan occur to both the seat belt andthe vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder belt heightadjuster for the driver and frontoutboard passenger seating positions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but not contacting,the neck. Improper shoulder beltheight adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the seat belt in acrash. See How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly 0 79.

Push down on the release button tomove the height adjuster to thedesired position.

Move the adjuster up by pushing upon the shoulder belt guide.

After the adjuster is set to the desiredposition, try to move it down withoutpushing the release button to makesure it has locked into position.

Automatic Seat Belt TighteningSystem

The vehicle may have the AutomaticSeat Belt Tightening System.

The system activates duringemergency braking and/or suddendriving maneuvers and releases whendriving conditions return to normal.

The system will not activate if theTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl system is not functioningproperly. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 222.If there is a problem with theAutomatic Seat Belt TighteningSystem, a message displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC). If asystem unavailable message displaysrepeatedly or a service messagedisplays, see your dealer. Other seatbelt functions are not affected by theAutomatic Seat Belt TighteningSystem.

Seat Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has seat beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the seat beltpretensioners cannot be seen, they arepart of the seat belt assembly. Theycan help tighten the seat belts duringthe early stages of a moderate tosevere frontal, near frontal, or rear



crash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met. Seatbelt pretensioners can also helptighten the seat belts in a side crashor a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash, thepretensioners and probably otherparts of the vehicle's seat belt systemwill need to be replaced. See ReplacingSeat Belt System Parts after a Crash0 87.

Do not sit on the outboard seat beltwhile entering or exiting the vehicle orat any time while sitting in the seat.Sitting on the seat belt can damagethe webbing and hardware.

Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides

{ Warning

A seat belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulder belt

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take beltrestraining forces.

Rear seat belt comfort guides mayprovide added seat belt comfort forolder children who have outgrownbooster seats and for some adults.When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the shoulderbelt away from the neck and head.

Second Row Outboard SeatingPositions

The vehicle has comfort guides for thesecond row outboard seatingpositions. The comfort guides arestored on a clip on the interior trimnext to the outboard seatback.

To install:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage clip on the interior trimnext to the outboard seatback.



2. Place the guide over the belt, andinsert the two edges of the beltinto the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be behind thebelt with the plastic guide on thefront.

4. Buckle, position, and release theseat belt as described previouslyin this section. Make sure theshoulder portion of the belt is onthe shoulder and not falling offof it. The belt should be close to,but not contacting, the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edges togetherso that the seat belt can be removedfrom the guide. Slide the guide ontoits storage clip.

Third Row Seating Positions

Comfort guides are available throughyour dealer for third row seatingpositions. Instructions are includedwith the guides.

Seat Belt Use DuringPregnancySeat belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they do not wearseat belts.



A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lap portionshould be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is toprotect the mother. When a seat beltis worn properly, it is more likely thatthe fetus will not be hurt in a crash.For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making seat belts effectiveis wearing them properly.

Seat Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's seat belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a seat belt is not long enough,your dealer will order you an extender.When you go in to order it, take theheaviest coat you will wear, so theextender will be long enough for you.To help avoid personal injury, do notlet someone else use it, and use itonly for the seat it is made to fit. Theextender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing childrestraints. For more information onthe proper use and fit of seat beltextenders see the instruction sheetthat comes with the extender.

Safety System CheckPeriodically check the seat beltreminder, seat belts, buckles, latchplates, retractors, shoulder belt heightadjusters (if equipped), and seat beltanchorages to make sure they are allin working order. Look for any otherloose or damaged seat belt systemparts that might keep a seat beltsystem from performing properly. Seeyour dealer to have it repaired. Torn,frayed, or twisted seat belts may notprotect you in a crash. Torn or frayedseat belts can rip apart under impact

forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, haveit replaced immediately. If a belt istwisted, it may be possible to untwistby reversing the latch plate on thewebbing. If the twist cannot becorrected, ask your dealer to fix it.

Make sure the seat belt reminder lightis working. See Seat Belt Reminders0 138.

Keep seat belts clean and dry. See SeatBelt Care 0 86.

Seat Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

Seat belts should be properly cared forand maintained.

Seat belt hardware should be kept dryand free of dust or debris. Asnecessary, exterior hard surfaces andseat belt webbing may be lightlycleaned with mild soap and water.Ensure there is not excessive dust ordebris in the mechanism. If dust ordebris exists in the system please seethe dealer. Parts may need to bereplaced to ensure properfunctionality of the system.



{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, they mightnot be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean and rinse seat beltwebbing only with mild soap andlukewarm water. Allow the webbingto dry.

Replacing Seat BeltSystem Parts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the seat beltsystem in the vehicle. A damagedseat belt system may not properlyprotect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help make surethe seat belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofseat belts may not be necessary. Butthe seat belt assemblies that wereused during any crash may have beenstressed or damaged. See your dealerto have the seat belt assembliesinspected or replaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the seat belt systemwas not being used at the time of thecrash.

Have the seat belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicle orwhile you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 139.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the following airbags:

. A frontal airbag for the driver

. A frontal airbag for the frontoutboard passenger

. A front center airbag for the driverand front outboard passenger

. A seat-mounted side impact airbagfor the driver

. A seat-mounted side impact airbagfor the front outboard passenger

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand for the second and third rowpassengers seated directly behindthe driver

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thesecond and third row passengersseated directly behind the frontoutboard passenger

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a label nearthe deployment opening.



For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the center of the steering wheelfor the driver and on the instrumentpanel for the front outboardpassenger.

For the front center airbag, the wordAIRBAG is on the inboard side of thedriver seatback.

For seat-mounted side impact airbags,the word AIRBAG is on the side of theseat closest to the door.

For roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by seat belts.Even though today's airbags are alsodesigned to help reduce the risk ofinjury from the force of an inflatingbag, all airbags must inflate veryquickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things toknow about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your seat belt, even withairbags. Airbags are designed towork with seat belts, not replacethem. Also, airbags are not designedto inflate in every crash. In somecrashes seat belts are the onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? 0 90.

Wearing your seat belt during acrash helps reduce your chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to theseat belts. Everyone in the vehicleshould wear a seat belt properly,whether or not there is an airbagfor that person.

{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink of aneye, anyone who is up against,or very close to any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to any airbag, as you would beif sitting on the edge of the seat orleaning forward. Seat belts helpkeep you in position before andduring a crash. Always wear a seatbelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle. The seat belts and thefront outboard passenger airbagsare most effective when you aresitting well back and upright in theseat with both feet on the floor.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the front centerarmrest or console in vehicles witha front center airbag.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children 0 99 orInfants and Young Children 0 101.

There is an airbag readiness light onthe instrument cluster, which showsthe airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 139.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passenger frontalairbag is in the passenger sideinstrument panel.



The front center airbag is in theinboard side of the driver seatback.

Driver Side Shown, Passenger SideSimilar

The driver and front outboardpassenger seat-mounted side impactairbags are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side Shown, Passenger SideSimilar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, and secondand third row outboard passengers arein the ceiling above the side windows.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, the airbagmight not inflate properly or itmight force the object into thatperson causing severe injury oreven death. The path of an inflating

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

airbag must be kept clear. Do notput anything between an occupantand an airbag, and do not attach orput anything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any other airbagcovering.

Do not use seat or consoleaccessories that block the inflationpath of a seat-mounted side impactairbag or the front center airbag.

Never secure anything to the roof ofa vehicle with roof-rail airbags byrouting a rope or tie-down throughany door or window opening. If youdo, the path of an inflating roof-railairbag will be blocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped with airbags.See Airbag System 0 87. Airbags aredesigned to inflate if the impactexceeds the specific airbag system'sdeployment threshold. Deployment



thresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in timefor the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants. The vehiclehas electronic sensors that help theairbag system determine the severityof the impact. Deployment thresholdscan vary with specific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed to inflatein moderate to severe frontal or nearfrontal crashes to help reduce thepotential for severe injuries, mainly tothe driver's or front outboardpassenger's head and chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed or moving,rigid or deformable, narrow or wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle has advancedtechnology frontal airbags. Advancedtechnology frontal airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.

The vehicle also has a seat positionsensor that enables the sensingsystem to monitor the position of thedriver seat. The seat position sensorprovides information that is used toadjust the deployment of the driverfrontal airbag.

The front center airbag is designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending upon the locationof the impact, when either side of thevehicle is struck. In addition, the frontcenter airbag is designed to inflatewhen the sensing system predicts thatthe vehicle is about to roll over on itsside. The front center airbag is notdesigned to inflate in frontal impacts,near frontal impacts, or rear impacts.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate tosevere side crashes depending on the

location of the impact. Seat-mountedside impact airbags are not designedto inflate in frontal impacts, nearfrontal impacts, rollovers, or rearimpacts. A seat-mounted side impactairbag is designed to inflate on theside of the vehicle that is struck.

Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the location ofthe impact. In addition, these roof-railairbags are designed to inflate duringa rollover or in a severe frontalimpact. Roof-rail airbags are notdesigned to inflate in rear impacts.Both roof-rail airbags will inflate wheneither side of the vehicle is struck,if the sensing system predicts that thevehicle is about to roll over on itsside, or in a severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of the vehicledamage or the repair costs.



What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break out ofthe cover. The inflator, the airbag, andrelated hardware are all part of theairbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 89.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal or nearfrontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contact theinside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by seat belts by distributingthe force of the impact more evenlyover the occupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help contain the head andchest of occupants in the outboardseating positions in the first, second,and third rows. The rollover capableroof-rail airbags are designed to helpreduce the risk of full or partialejection in rollover events, althoughno system can prevent all suchejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarily becausethe occupant's motion is not towardthose airbags. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? 0 90.

Airbags should never be regarded asanything more than a supplement toseat belts.

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates?After frontal and seat-mounted sideimpact airbags inflate, they quicklydeflate, so quickly that some peoplemay not even realize the airbagsinflated. The front center airbag androof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time after

they inflate. Some components of theairbag module may be hot for severalminutes. For location of the airbags,see Where Are the Airbags? 0 89.

The parts of the airbag that come intocontact with you may be warm, butnot too hot to touch. There may besome smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated airbags.Airbag inflation does not prevent thedriver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer thevehicle, nor does it prevent peoplefrom leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, there maybe dust in the air. This dust couldcause breathing problems forpeople with a history of asthma orother breathing trouble. To avoidthis, everyone in the vehicle shouldget out as soon as it is safe to doso. If you have breathing problemsbut cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

fresh air by opening a window or adoor. If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off the fuelsystem after the airbags inflate. Thefeature may also activate, withoutairbag inflation, after an event thatexceeds a predetermined threshold.After turning the ignition off and thenon again, the fuel system will returnto normal operation; the doors can belocked, the interior lamps can beturned off, and the hazard warningflashers can be turned off using thecontrols for those features. If any ofthese systems are damaged in thecrash they may not operate as normal.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflate theairbags may have also damagedimportant functions in the vehicle,such as the fuel system, brake andsteering systems, etc. Even if thevehicle appears to be drivable aftera moderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that could makeit difficult to safely operate thevehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.

. Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbag inflates,you will need some new parts forthe airbag system. If you do notget them, the airbag system will

not be there to help protect you inanother crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules andpossibly other parts. The servicemanual for the vehicle covers theneed to replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after a crash.See Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy 0 390 and Event DataRecorders 0 390.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger Sensing SystemThe vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem for the front outboardpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will light onthe overhead console when the vehicleis started.



United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbols for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. When thesystem check is complete, either theword ON or OFF, or the symbol for onor off, will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator 0 139.

The passenger sensing system turnsoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. No other airbag is affectedby the passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system workswith sensors that are part of the frontoutboard passenger seat and seat belt.The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagshould be allowed to inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured in arear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag inflates.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the passenger frontal airbaginflates. This is because the back of

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the rear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflating airbag.A child in a forward-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat is ina forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the passengerfrontal airbag, no system is fail-safe.No one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under someunusual circumstance, even thoughthe airbag is turned off.

Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If securing aforward-facing child restraint in thefront outboard passenger seat,always move the seat as far back asit will go. It is better to secure childrestraints in the rear seat. Considerusing another vehicle to transportthe child when a rear seat is notavailable.



The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag if:

. The front outboard passenger seatis unoccupied.

. The system determines an infantis present in a child restraint.

. A front outboard passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat for aperiod of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or the passengersensing system.

When the passenger sensing systemhas turned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag, the OFFindicator will light and stay lit as areminder that the airbag is off. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator0 139.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sitting properlyin the front outboard passenger seat.

When the passenger sensing systemhas allowed the airbag to be enabled,the ON indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbag is active.

For some children, including childrenin child restraints, and for very smalladults, the passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,depending upon the person's seatingposture and body build. Everyone inthe vehicle who has outgrown childrestraints should wear a seat beltproperly— whether or not there is anairbag for that person.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 139 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag ifthe system determines that an infantis present in a child restraint. If achild restraint has been installed andthe ON indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 114or Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Front Seat)0 116.



Make sure the seat belt retractoris locked by pulling the shoulderbelt all the way out of theretractor when installing thechild restraint, even if the childrestraint is equipped with a seatbelt lock off. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the ON indicator is stilllit, turn the vehicle off. Thenslightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatback isnot pushing the child restraintinto the seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraints0 61.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system may ormay not turn off the airbag for a childin a child restraint depending uponthe child’s size. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat. Neverput a rear-facing child restraint in thefront seat, even if the ON indicator isnot lit.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat, butthe OFF indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat or that the childrestraint locking feature is engaged.

Use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag:


2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. If the shoulder portion of thebelt is pulled out all the way, thechild restraint locking featurewill be engaged. This mayunintentionally cause thepassenger sensing system to turnthe airbag off for someadult-sized occupants. If thishappens, unbuckle the belt, letthe belt go back all the way, andthen buckle the belt againwithout pulling the belt out allthe way.



6. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this positionfor two to three minutes after theON indicator is lit.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbag willnot be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboard passengerseat, if the passenger airbag OFFindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Seat belts help keep the passenger inposition on the seat during vehiclemaneuvers and braking, which helpsthe passenger sensing systemmaintain the passenger airbag status.See “Seat Belts” and “Child Restraints”

in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing system operates.We recommend that you not use seatcovers or other aftermarket equipmentexcept when approved by GM for yourspecific vehicle. See Adding Equipmentto the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 98 formore information about modificationsthat can affect how the systemoperates.

The ON indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or other electronicdevice, is put on an unoccupied seat.If this is not desired, remove theobject from the seat.

{ Warning

Stowing articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicle shouldbe serviced. There are parts of theairbag system in several places aroundthe vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout servicing the vehicle and theairbag system. To purchase a servicemanual, see Publication OrderingInformation 0 387.



{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and the batteryis disconnected, an airbag can stillinflate during improper service. Youcan be injured if you are close to anairbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They areprobably part of the airbag system.Be sure to follow proper serviceprocedures, and make sure theperson performing work for you isqualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheet metalmay keep the airbag system fromworking properly.

The operation of the airbag systemcan also be affected by changing,including improperly repairing orreplacing, any parts of the following:

. Airbag system, including airbagmodules, front or side impactsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule, airbag wiring, or frontcenter console

. Front seats, including stitching,seams or zippers

. Seat belts

. Steering wheel, instrument panel,overhead console, ceiling trim,or pillar garnish trim

. Inner door seals, includingspeakers

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the location ofthe airbag modules and sensors,sensing and diagnostic module, andairbag wiring along with the properreplacement procedures.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position, whichincludes sensors that are part of the

passenger's seat. The passengersensing system may not operateproperly if the original seat trim isreplaced with non-GM covers,upholstery, or trim, or with GMcovers, upholstery, or trim designedfor a different vehicle. Any object,such as an aftermarket seat heater ora comfort enhancing pad or device,installed under or on top of the seatfabric, could also interfere with theoperation of the passenger sensingsystem. This could either preventproper deployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properly turningoff the passenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System 0 93.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tires andWheels 0 331 for additional importantinformation.

If the vehicle must be modifiedbecause you have a disability and youhave questions about whether themodifications will affect the vehicle'sairbag system, or if you havequestions about whether the airbagsystem will be affected if the vehicle is



modified for any other reason, callCustomer Assistance. See CustomerAssistance Offices 0 380.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 139.

Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbag maynot work properly. Do not open orbreak the airbag coverings. If thereare any opened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbag coveringand/or airbag module replaced. Forthe location of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? 0 89. Seeyour dealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle. A damagedairbag system may not properlyprotect you and your passenger(s)in a crash, resulting in seriousinjury or even death. To help makesure the airbag systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. See yourdealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 139.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear the vehicle’sseat belts.

The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:


100 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Doesthe shoulder belt rest on theshoulder? If yes, continue. If no,try using the rear seat beltcomfort guide, if available. See“Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 81. If acomfort guide is not available, or ifthe shoulder belt still does not reston the shoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low and snugon the hips, touching the thighs?If yes, continue. If no, return tothe booster seat.

. Can proper seat belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way to wearseat belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulder belt

can provide. The shoulder beltshould not cross the face or neck.The lap belt should fit snuglybelow the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. This applies beltforce to the child's pelvic bones ina crash. It should never be wornover the abdomen, which couldcause severe or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Seat Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 81.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children needto use seat belts properly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one child towear the same seat belt. The seatbelt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, they can

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A seat belt must be used byonly one person at a time.

{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear the seatbelt with the shoulder belt behindtheir back. A child can be seriouslyinjured by not wearing thelap-shoulder belt properly. In a

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt. Thechild could move too far forwardincreasing the chance of head andneck injury. The child might alsoslide under the lap belt. The beltforce would then be applied righton the abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, foreveryone, to use safety restraints. Infact, the law in every state in theUnited States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor, butit cannot do this if it is wrappedaround a child’s neck. If theshoulder belt is locked and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

tightened around a child’s neck, theonly way to loosen the belt is tocut it.

Never leave children unattended ina vehicle and never allow childrento play with the seat belts.

Every time infants and young childrenride in vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints. Neither the vehicle'sseat belt system nor its airbag systemis designed for them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant or child should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front outboard seat.Secure a rear-facing child restraintin a rear seat. It is also better tosecure a forward-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. If you mustsecure a forward-facing childrestraint in the front outboard seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go.

Child restraints are devices used torestrain, seat, or position children inthe vehicle and are sometimes calledchild seats or car seats.

There are three basic types of childrestraints:

. Forward-facing child restraints

. Rear-facing child restraints

. Belt-positioning booster seats

The proper child restraint for yourchild depends on their size, weight,and age, and also on whether thechild restraint is compatible with thevehicle in which it will be used.



For each type of child restraint, thereare many different models available.When purchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used in amotor vehicle. If it is, the restraint willhave a label saying that it meetsfederal motor vehicle safety standards.The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are manykinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck and headinjury in a crash, infants andtoddlers should be secured in arear-facing child restraint until agetwo, or until they reach themaximum height and weight limitsof their child restraint.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularseat belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should. Instead,it may settle up around the child'sabdomen. In a crash, the belt wouldapply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure.This alone could cause serious orfatal injuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children should alwaysbe secured in appropriate childrestraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Restraint

A rear-facing child restraint providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keepthe infant positioned in the restraint.



Forward-Facing Child Restraint

A forward-facing child restraintprovides restraint for the child's bodywith the harness.

Booster Seats

A belt-positioning booster seat is usedfor children who have outgrown theirforward-facing child restraint.Boosters are designed to improve thefit of the vehicle's seat belt systemuntil the child is large enough for thevehicle seat belts to fit properlywithout a booster seat. See the seatbelt fit test in Older Children 0 99.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s seat belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. Child restraints must besecured in vehicle seats by lap belts orthe lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system. SeeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 106 for moreinformation. Children can beendangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in thevehicle.



When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructions thatcome with the restraint which may beon the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The childrestraint instructions are important,so if they are not available, obtain areplacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified Child PassengerSafety Technicians (CPSTs) areavailable to inspect and demonstratehow to correctly use and install childrestraints. In the U.S., refer to theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the child properlyfollowing the instructions thatcame with that child restraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in an appropriatechild restraint secured in a rearseating position.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured in arear seating position.

The vehicle is equipped with a frontcenter airbag in the inboard side ofthe driver seat. Even with a frontcenter airbag, a child restraint can beinstalled in any second row seatingposition.

Never put a rear-facing child restraintin the front. This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great ifthe airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the front passenger airbaginflates. This is because the back ofthe rear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflating airbag.A child in a forward-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the front passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat is ina forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, no systemis fail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deploy undersome unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbag isoff. If you secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the front seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System 0 93for additional information.

When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seats varyconsiderably in size, and some may fitin certain seating positions betterthan others.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be able toaccess adjacent seat belts or LATCHanchors for additional passengers or

child restraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of theseat belt.

Wherever a child restraint is installed,be sure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andsecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in the vehicle.The LATCH system is designed tomake installation of a child restrainteasier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installed usingeither the LATCH anchors or thevehicle’s seat belts. Do not use boththe seat belts and the LATCHanchorage system to secure arear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’s seatbelts to secure the child and thebooster seat. If the manufacturerrecommends that the booster seat besecured with the LATCH system, thiscan be done as long as the boosterseat can be positioned properly andthere is no interference with theproper positioning of the lap-shoulderbelt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also use eitherthe lower anchors or the seat belts toproperly secure the child restraint.



A child restraint must never beinstalled using only the top tether andanchor.

The LATCH anchorage system can beused until the combined weight of thechild plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the seat belt aloneinstead of the LATCH anchoragesystem once the combined weight ismore than 29.5 kg (65 lbs).

See Securing Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 114 orSecuring Child Restraints (With the SeatBelt in the Front Seat) 0 116.

Child restraints built after March 2014will be labeled with the specific childweight up to which the LATCH systemcan be used to install the restraint.

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions havelower anchors. In this case, the seatbelt must be used (with top tetherwhere available) to secure the childrestraint. See Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat)0 114 or Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in the Front Seat)0 116.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal bars builtinto the vehicle. There are two loweranchors for each LATCH seatingposition that will accommodate achild restraint with lowerattachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3,4) is used to secure thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment hook (2) on the childrestraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order toreduce the forward movement androtation of the child restraint duringdriving or in a crash.

The child restraint may have a singletether (3) or a dual tether (4). Eitherwill have a single attachment hook (2)to secure the top tether to the anchor.



Some child restraints with top tethersare designed for use with or withoutthe top tether being attached. Othersrequire the top tether always to beattached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraintshave a top tether, and that the tetherbe attached. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Second Row — 60/40

H : Seating positions with two loweranchors.

I : Seating positions with top tetheranchors.

Second Row — Bucket

H : Seating positions with two loweranchors.


Third Row Seat


To assist in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, near thecrease between the seatback and theseat cushion.



To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchor symbolis near the top tether anchors forsecond row seats. For third row seats,the top tether anchor symbol is on theflipper panel.

Second Row Seat — Bucket

For models with bucket second rowseating, the top tether anchors are atthe bottom rear of the seat cushionfor each seating position in the second

row. Be sure to use an anchor on thesame side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.

Second Row Seat — 60/40

For models with 60/40 second rowseating, the top tether anchors are atthe bottom rear of the seat cushionfor each seating position in the secondrow. Be sure to use an anchor on thesame side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.

Third Row Seat

For the third row seat, the top tetheranchors are on the back of theseatback. Move the flipper panelrearward to access the anchors. Besure to use an anchor on the sameside of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top tether mustbe attached.



According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child restraintsystem or infant restraint systemsecured in a rear seating position. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 105 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCH System

{ Warning

A child could be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly attached tothe vehicle using either the LATCHanchors or the vehicle seat belt.Follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint and theinstructions in this manual.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of serious orfatal injuries during a crash, do notattach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break during acrash. A child or others could beinjured.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor, but

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

it cannot do this if it is wrappedaround a child’s neck. If theshoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck, theonly way to loosen the belt is tocut it.

Buckle any unused seat beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock, andtighten the belt behind the childrestraint after the child restrainthas been installed.

Caution

Do not let the LATCH attachmentsrub against the vehicle’s seat belts.This may damage these parts.If necessary, move buckled seatbelts to avoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

Do not fold the rear seatback whenthe seat is occupied. Do not fold theempty rear seat with a seat beltbuckled. This could damage theseat belt or the seat. Unbuckle andreturn the seat belt to its stowedposition, before folding the seat.

The vehicle is equipped with a frontcenter airbag in the inboard side ofthe driver seat. Even with a frontcenter airbag, a child restraint can beinstalled in any second row seatingposition.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 105.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lower attachmentsor the desired seating positiondoes not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint withthe seat belts and top tetherwhen recommended by the child

restraint manufacturer. Refer toyour child restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual. For the third rowoutboard seating positions, if thehead restraint interferes with theproper installation of the childrestraint, then the head restraintmay be removed. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 106.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten thelower attachments on thechild restraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraintmanufacturer recommends thatthe top tether be attached, attachand tighten the top tether to the

top tether anchor. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

For the third row seat,move the flipper panelrearward to access the toptether anchors.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using a singletether, route the tetherover the seatback.



If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetherover the seatback.

If the position you areusing has an adjustableheadrest or head restraintand you are using a singletether, raise the headrest

or head restraint and routethe tether under theheadrest or head restraintand in between theheadrest or head restraintposts.

If the position you areusing has a fixed headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether around theinboard or outboard side ofthe headrest or headrestraint.

If the position you areusing has a fixed or anadjustable head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.



Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation

1. Partially fold the seatbackforward. See Third Row Seats0 76 for additional information.

2. Press the buttons on the headrestraint posts and pull up onthe head restraint.

3. Route the top tether of the childrestraint under the headrestraint.

4. With the head restraint facingrearward, insert the headrestraint posts into the holes inthe top of the seatback.

5. Push the head restraint down.

6. Try to move the head restraint tomake sure that it is locked inplace.

7. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the headrestraint before the seatingposition is used.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinalinjury in a crash. Do not drive untilthe head restraints for all occupantsare installed and adjusted properly.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint, resultingin serious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure theLATCH system is working properlyafter a crash, see your dealer tohave the system inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.



If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during a crash,new LATCH system parts may beneeded.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of thecrash.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theRear Seat)When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System) 0 106 forhow and where to install the childrestraint using LATCH. If a childrestraint is secured in the vehicleusing a seat belt and it uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System) 0 106 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if theinstructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top tether mustbe anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints have atop tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint or vehicle seatposition does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the seat beltto secure the child restraint. Be sureto follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint.

If more than one child restraint needsto be installed in the rear seat, be sureto read Where to Put the Restraint0 105.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

For the third row outboardseating positions, if the headrestraint interferes with theproper installation of the childrestraint, the head restraint may

be removed. See “Head RestraintRemoval and Reinstallation”under Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System)0 106.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's seat belt through oraround the child restraint. Thechild restraint instructions willshow you how.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

If the latch plate will not go fullyinto the buckle, check to see ifthe correct buckle is being used.



Position the release button onthe buckle, away from the childrestraint, so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful to useyour knee to push down on thechild restraint as you tightenthe belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. Refer to the instructionsthat came with the childrestraint and see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 106.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theseat belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt and letit return to the stowed position. If thetop tether is attached to a top tetheranchor, disconnect it.



If the head restraint was removed fora third row outboard seating position,reinstall it before the seating positionis used. See “Head Restraint Removaland Reinstallation” under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 106 for additionalinformation on reinstalling the headrestraint properly.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theFront Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat isa safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 105.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions.See Passenger Sensing System 0 93 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 139for more information, includingimportant safety information.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would bevery close to the inflating airbag.A child in a forward-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,no system is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will not

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbag isoff. If you secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the front outboardpassenger seat, always move theseat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System 0 93for additional information.

If the child restraint uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 106 for toptether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if theinstructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top tether mustbe anchored.



In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints have atop tether, and that the tether beattached.

When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.Move the seat upward or theseatback to an upright position,if needed, to get a tightinstallation of the child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, the OFF indicator on thepassenger airbag status indicatorshould light and stay lit whenyou start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator0 139.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's seat belt through oraround the child restraint. Thechild restraint instructions willshow you how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust thebelt, if needed.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Position the release button onthe buckle, away from the childrestraint, so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.



5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful to useyour knee to push down on thechild restraint as you tightenthe belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theseat belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbag is off, the OFF indicatorin the passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the ON indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem 0 93.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt and letit return to the stowed position.


STORAGE 119

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . 119Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . . . . 119Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . 121

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Storage Compartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharp objectsin storage compartments. In acrash, these objects may cause thecover to open and could result ininjury.

Instrument Panel Storage

Touch the bottom of the climatecontrol system panel until the doorautomatically starts to open. Thestorage area may contain a USB port.See the infotainment manual.

Keep the storage area door closedwhile driving.

Touch the bottom of the climatecontrol system again until the doorautomatically starts to close.

Glove Box

To open, press the button. Close theglove box manually.


120 STORAGE

Cupholders

To access the cupholders, press thecover and release.

There is storage in front of thecupholders. Push forward on thehandle to open.

Sunglasses Storage

If equipped, sunglasses storage is onthe overhead console. Press the fixedbutton on the cover and release toaccess.

Armrest StorageFor vehicles with a rear seat armrest,pull the loop at the top of the armrestdown to access the cupholders.

Rear Storage

There is storage in the floor of therear cargo area. Lift the handle toaccess. There is a removable divider tohelp organize.


STORAGE 121

Center Console Storage

Pull the handle and lift to access.There are auxiliary jacks, USB ports,an accessory power outlet, a totecompartment, and a device holderinside.

On the rear of the console there areauxiliary jacks, a power outlet, and astorage area.

See Power Outlets 0 128 and theinfotainment manual.

If equipped, press to turn on thecooled compartment inside the centerconsole storage.

The cooled compartment will helpkeep cold liquids cold, but is notintended to chill warm liquids. Do notuse for items that need to berefrigerated.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Tie-Downs

There are four cargo tie-downs in therear cargo area. These can be used tostrap cargo down and keep it frommoving inside the vehicle.

Convenience NetUse the convenience net, located inthe rear, to store small loads as farforward as possible. The net shouldnot be used to store heavy loads.


122 STORAGE

Roof Rack System

{ Warning

If something is carried on top of thevehicle that is longer or wider thanthe roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— the windcan catch it while the vehicle isbeing driven. The item being carriedcould be violently torn off, and thiscould cause a collision and damagethe vehicle. Never carry somethinglonger or wider than the roof rackon top of the vehicle unless using aGM certified accessory carrier.

If equipped, the roof rack can be usedto load items. For roof racks that donot have crossrails included,GM Certified crossrails can bepurchased as an accessory. See yourdealer for additional information.

Caution

Loading cargo on the roof rack thatweighs more than 100 kg (220 lb) orhangs over the rear or sides of thevehicle may damage the vehicle.Load cargo so that it rests evenlybetween the crossrails, making sureto fasten cargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle’s center ofgravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking, or abrupt maneuvers,otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle to makesure the cargo remains in its place.

Do not exceed the maximum vehiclecapacity when loading the vehicle. Formore information on vehicle capacityand loading, see Vehicle Load Limits0 197.

A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) is located above the rearwindow glass. Make sure items loadedon the roof of the vehicle do not blockor damage the CHMSL.


INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 123

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . 124Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . 124Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . 124Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . 124Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . 126Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . 139Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . 140Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Brake System Warning Light . . . . 142Electric Parking Brake Light . . . . . 143Service Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Sport Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Winter Driving Mode Light . . . . . . 144Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Light . . . 144Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . . 144Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145StabiliTrak OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . 146Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 147Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . . . . . 151

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Engine Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . 155Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . 155

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . . . . . 155

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . . . . . . 164Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166


124 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Controls

Steering Wheel Adjustment

To adjust the power tilt andtelescoping steering wheel:

Press the control to move the steeringwheel up and down or forward andrearward.

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steering wheelcontrols. See “Steering WheelControls” in the infotainment manual.

Heated Steering Wheel

( : If equipped, press to turn theheated steering wheel on or off. Anindicator next to the button is litwhen the feature is turned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.

Horn

To sound the horn, pressa on thesteering wheel.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper control is on theturn signal lever.

The windshield wipers are controlledby turning the band withz FRONTon it.

1 : Fast wipes.

w : Slow wipes.

3 INT : If Rainsense is turned off,turn thez FRONT band up formore frequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes. If Rainsense is turnedon, see “Rainsense” later in thissection.

OFF : Turns the windshield wipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, turn the banddown, then release. For several wipes,hold the band down.



Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozen tothe windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 299.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. An internal circuitbreaker to the motor will stop themotor until it cools down.

Wiper Parking

If the ignition is turned off while thewipers are onw,1, or3 INT,they will immediately stop.

Ifz FRONT is then moved to OFFbefore the driver door is opened orwithin 10 minutes, the wipers willrestart and move to the base of thewindshield.

If the ignition is turned off while thewipers are performing wipes due towindshield washing or Rainsense, thewipers continue to run until theyreach the base of the windshield.

Rainsense

With Rainsense, a sensor near the topcenter of the windshield detects theamount of water on the windshieldand controls the frequency of thewindshield wiper.

Keep this area of the windshield clearof debris to allow for best systemperformance.

3 INT : Turn thez FRONT bandon the wiper lever to adjust thesensitivity when Rainsense isturned on.

. Turn the band up for moresensitivity to moisture.

. Turn the band down to lower INTsetting for less sensitivity tomoisture.

Move the band out of the3 INTposition to deactivate Rainsense.

z AUTO : Press to turn Rainsenseon or off. When turned onandz FRONT is in one of theRainsense wipe sensitivity positionsthe wipers can be adjusted for more orless sensitivity to moisture. Whenturned off, the wipers operate astimed intermittent wipers and can beadjusted for more or less frequentwipes.

Ifz AUTO is turned on when theignition is turned on, or if the ignitionis on and thez FRONT band is inone of the sensitivity settings whenz AUTO is turned on or off, amessage may display indicating ifRainsense was turned on or off.

If the ignition is on andz FRONTis not in one of the sensitivity settingswhenz AUTO is turned on, a



message may display indicating thatthe wiper band must be in one of thesensitivity settings for Rainsense tooperate.

Wiper Arm Assembly Protection

When using an automatic car wash,move the windshield wiper lever toOFF. This disables the automaticRainsense windshield wipers.

With Rainsense, if the transmission isin N (Neutral) and the vehicle speed isvery slow, the wipers willautomatically stop at the base of thewindshield.

The wiper operations return to normalwhen the transmission is no longer inN (Neutral) or the vehicle speed hasincreased.

Windshield Washer

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not use thewasher until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washer fluidcan form ice on the windshield,blocking your vision.

L m : Push the paddle marked withthe windshield washer symbol at thetop of the turn signal lever to spraywasher fluid and activate the wipers.The wipers will continue until thepaddle is released or the maximumwash time is reached. When thepaddle is released, additional wipesmay occur depending on how long thewindshield washer had been activated.See Washer Fluid 0 292 forinformation on filling the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper control is on the turnsignal lever.

To turn the rear wiper on, slide thelever to a wiper position.

OFF : Turns the wiper off.

INT : Turns on the rear wiper with adelay between wipes.

ON : Turns on the rear wiper.

= REAR : Press this button on theend of the lever to spray washer fluidon the rear window. The wipers willclear the rear window and either stopor return to your preset speed. Formore washer cycles, press and holdthe button.

The rear window wiper/washer willnot operate if the liftgate or liftglass isopen or ajar. If the liftgate or liftglassis opened while the rear wiper is on,the wiper returns to the parkedposition and stops.

Rear Camera Mirror Washer :If equipped, press= REAR on the endof the lever to spray washer fluid onthe rear mirror camera lens. See RearCamera Mirror 0 54.



Rear Wiper Arm AssemblyProtection

When using an automatic car wash,move the rear wiper control to OFF todisable the rear wiper. In somevehicles, if the transmission is inN (Neutral) and the vehicle speed isvery slow, the rear wiper willautomatically park under the rearspoiler.

The wiper operations return to normalwhen the transmission is no longer inN (Neutral) or the vehicle speed hasincreased.

Reverse Gear Wipes

If the rear wiper control is off, the rearwiper will automatically operatecontinuously when the shift lever is inR (Reverse), and the front windshieldwiper is performing low or high speedwipes. If the rear wiper control is off,the shift lever is in R (Reverse), andthe front windshield wiper isperforming interval wipes, then therear wiper automatically performsinterval wipes.

This feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalization 0 155.

The windshield washer reservoir isused for the windshield and the rearwindow. Check the fluid level in thereservoir if either washer is notworking. See Washer Fluid 0 292.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receives itsheading and other information fromthe Global Positioning System (GPS)antenna, StabiliTrak/ElectronicStability Control (ESC), and vehiclespeed information.

The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number of milesor degrees of turn before needing asignal from the GPS satellites. Whenthe compass display shows CAL, drivethe vehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive a GPSsignal. The compass system willautomatically determine when a GPSsignal is restored and provide aheading again.

ClockThe infotainment system controls areused to access the time and datesettings through the menu system.See “Home Page” in the infotainmentmanual for information about how touse the menu system.

Setting the Clock

Time

To set the time:

1. From the Home Page, touchSETTINGS, then touch Timeand Date.

2. Touch Set Time, then touch + or− to increase or decrease hoursor minutes, and change AMor PM.

3. Touch 12-24 Hr for a 12 or24 hour clock.

4. Touch [ Back to go back to theprevious menu.



Date

To set the date:


2. Touch Set Date, then touch + or− to increase or decrease month,day, or year.


Auto Set

When on, the time and date willautomatically update.

To set auto set:


2. Touch Set Time or Set Date.

3. Touch Auto Set, then selectOn-Cell Network or Off-Manualto manually set the timeand date.


If auto set is on, the time displayed onthe clock may not update immediatelywhen driving into a new time zone.

In some regions, auto set may requirean active OnStar or connected serviceplan, if available.

Clock Display

When on, the digital clock will displayon the infotainment screen.

To set the clock display:


2. Touch Clock Display, then selectOff or On.


Power OutletsPower Outlets 12-Volt Direct Current

Accessory power outlets can be usedto plug in electrical equipment, suchas a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has five accessory poweroutlets:

. One near the cupholders on thecenter console

. One inside the center console

. One on the rear of the centerconsole

. One in the third row seat on thedriver side

. One in the rear cargo area on thepassenger side

Lift the cover to access and replacewhen not in use.



The accessory power outlets arepowered as follows:

. The power outlet near thecupholders on the center consoleis powered in Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) mode. This outlet canbe configured to operate usingRAP or battery power. If the poweroutlet is used while in the batterypower mode, this could causeinterference between the RKEtransmitter and the vehicle, andthe vehicle may not start. SeeIgnition Positions 0 203.

. The power outlets inside thecenter console and on the rear ofthe center console are poweredwhen the vehicle is started or theignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY,or until the driver door is openedwithin 10 minutes of turning offthe vehicle. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 207.

. The power outlets in the third rowseat and in the rear cargo area arepowered at all times.

{ Warning

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the vehicle is off willdrain the battery. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum 15 amprating.

Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible with the accessorypower outlet and could overloadvehicle or adapter fuses. If a problemis experienced, see your dealer.

When adding electrical equipment, besure to follow the proper installationinstructions included with theequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 276.

Caution

Hanging heavy equipment from thepower outlet can cause damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.The power outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, such ascell phone charge cords.



Power Outlet 110/120 VoltAlternating Current

This power outlet can be used to plugin electrical equipment that uses amaximum limit of 150 watts.

The 110/120 volt power outlet is onthe rear of the center console.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the vehicle is started,equipment requiring less than 150watts is plugged into the outlet, andno system fault is detected.

The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition is off or if theequipment is not fully seated into theoutlet.

If equipment is connected using morethan 150 watts or a system fault isdetected, a protection circuit shuts offthe power supply and the indicatorlight turns off. To reset the circuit,unplug the item and plug it back in orturn the ignition off and then back toon. The power restarts whenequipment using 150 watts or less isplugged into the outlet and a systemfault is not detected.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following, and may not workproperly if they are plugged in:

. Equipment with high initial peakwattage, such ascompressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools

. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supply,such as microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets and touch sensorlamps

. Medical equipment.

Wireless ChargingThe system operates at 145 kHz andwirelessly charges one Qi compatiblesmartphone. The power output of thesystem is capable of charging at a rateup to 1 amp (5W), as requested by thecompatible smartphone. See RadioFrequency Statement 0 388.

{ Warning

Wireless charging can affect theoperation of an implantedpacemaker or other medical devices.If you have one, it is recommendedto consult with your doctor beforeusing the wireless charging system.

The vehicle must be on, in ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) must be active. Thewireless charging feature may notcorrectly indicate charging when thevehicle is in RAP. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 207.

The operating temperature is −20 °C(−4 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F) for thecharging system and 0 °C (32 °F) to35 °C (95 °F) for the phone.



{ Warning

Remove all objects from thecharging pad before charging yourcompatible smartphone. Objects,such as coins, keys, rings, paperclips, or cards, between thesmartphone and charging pad willbecome very hot. On the rareoccasion that the charging systemdoes not detect an object, and theobject gets wedged between thesmartphone and charger, removethe smartphone and allow theobject to cool before removing itfrom the charging pad, to preventburns.

To charge a compatible smartphone:

1. Remove all objects from thecharging pad. The system maynot charge if there are anyobjects between the smartphoneand charging pad.

2. Place the smartphone face upagainst the rear of thecharge pad.

To maximize the charge rate,ensure the smartphone is fullyseated and centered in the holderwith nothing under it. A thicksmartphone case may preventthe wireless charger from

working, or may reduce thecharging performance. See yourdealer for additional information.

3. The} will display on the V onthe infotainment screen. Thisindicates that the smartphone isproperly positioned and charging.If a smartphone is placed onthe charging pad and} doesnot display, remove thesmartphone from the pad, turn it180 degrees, and waitthree seconds before placing/aligning the smartphone on thepad again.

Software Acknowledgements

Certain Wireless Charging Moduleproduct from LG Electronics, Inc.("LGE") contains the open sourcesoftware detailed below. Refer to theindicated open source licenses (as areincluded following this notice) for theterms and conditions of their use.



OSS Notice Information

To obtain the source code that iscontained in this product, please visithttp://opensource.lge.com. In additionto the source code, all referred licenseterms, warranty disclaimers andcopyright notices are available fordownload. LG Electronics will alsoprovide open source code to you onCD-ROM for a charge covering thecost of performing such distribution(such as the cost of media, shipping,and handling) upon email request [email protected]. This offer isvalid for three (3) years from the dateon which you purchased the product.

Freescale-WCT library

Copyright (c) 2012-2014 FreescaleSemiconductor, Inc.. All rightsreserved.

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, this list of conditions andthe following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary formmust reproduce the abovecopyright notice, this list ofconditions and the followingdisclaimer in the documentationand/or other materials providedwith the distribution.

3. Neither the name of thecopyright holder nor the namesof its contributors may be usedto endorse or promote productsderived from this softwarewithout specific prior writtenpermission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BYTHE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS ANDCONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AREDISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL

THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ORCONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANYDIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTEGOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSEDAND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICTLIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THEUSE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IFADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OFSUCH DAMAGE.



Cigarette LighterIf equipped with a cigarette lighter, itis in the center console near thecupholders. Press on the access doorto open it and use the lighter.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it in,and let go. When it is ready, it willpop back out by itself.

Caution

Holding a cigarette lighter in whileit is heating does not let the lighterback away from the heatingelement when it is hot. Damagefrom overheating can occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fusecould be blown. Do not hold acigarette lighter in while it isheating.

AshtraysIf equipped, the ashtray is in thecenter console cupholder.

Caution

If papers, pins, or other flammableitems are put in the ashtray, hotcigarettes or other smokingmaterials could ignite them andpossibly damage the vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.

To remove the ashtray, pull it fromthe cupholder. Push it back down tobe sure it is secure.

Warning Lights, Gauges,and IndicatorsWarning lights and gauges can signalthat something is wrong before itbecomes serious enough to cause anexpensive repair or replacement.Paying attention to the warning lightsand gauges could prevent injury.

Some warning lights come on brieflywhen the engine is started to indicatethey are working. When one of thewarning lights comes on and stays onwhile driving, or when one of thegauges shows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Waiting to do repairs can becostly and even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Balanced Cluster Shown, Metric Similar



Reconfigurable InstrumentCluster

The cluster display layout can bechanged.

Balanced Configuration

The Balanced configuration has threeinteractive display zones: one in thecenter of each of the gauges.

Enhanced Configuration

The Enhanced configuration has threeinteractive display zones.

Use the five-way control on the rightside of the steering wheel to movebetween the different display zonesand scroll through the differentdisplays.

To change the cluster configuration:

1. Find the Options page in one ofthe interactive display zones onthe cluster.

2. Press SEL to enter theOptions menu.

3. Scroll down to highlight DisplayLayout. Then press SEL toselect it.

4. Each layout in the menu isrepresented by a small previewimage of the display layout.Scroll up or down and highlightthe selection. Press SEL to selectthe desired cluster configuration.

5. Exit the Display Layout menu bypressing S.

Cluster Application Displays

The cluster can display informationregarding Navigation, Audio, andPhone.

Navigation

If there is no active route, a compasswill be displayed. If there is an activeroute, press SEL to end route guidanceor turn the voice prompts on or off.

Audio

While the Audio application page isdisplayed, press SEL to enter theAudio menu. In the Audio menu,search for music, select from favorites,or change the audio source.

Phone

While the Phone application page isdisplayed, press SEL to enter thePhone menu. In the Phone menu,if there is no active phone call, viewrecent calls, select from favorites,or scroll through contacts. If there isan active call, mute the phone orswitch to handset operation.



Cluster Options Menu

To enter the cluster Options menu:

1. Use the five-way control on theright side of the steering wheelto find the Options page in oneof the interactive display zoneson the cluster.

2. Press SEL on the center of thefive-way control to enter theOptions menu.

Units : Press SEL while Units ishighlighted to enter the Unit menu.Choose US or metric units by pressingSEL while the desired item ishighlighted. A checkmark will bedisplayed next to the selected item.

Info Pages : Press SEL while InfoPages is highlighted to select theitems to be displayed in the DIC infodisplays. See Driver Information Center(DIC) 0 149.

Fav Button Options : Press SEL whileFav Button Options is highlighted toselect between FAV Primary and SEEKPrimary. This selection allows forconfiguration of the C andBsteering wheel controls. When FAV

Primary is selected, pressing C andB will go to the next or previousfavorite and pressing and holding CandB will seek. When SEEK Primary

is selected, pressing C andB will

seek and pressing and holding C andB will go to the next or previousfavorite.

Display Layout : Press SEL whileDisplay Layout is highlighted tochange the configuration of thecluster. See “ReconfigurableInstrument Cluster” earlier in thissection.

Head-up Display (HUD) Rotation :This feature allows for adjusting theangle of the HUD image. Press SEL onthe steering wheel controls whileHead-up Display Rotation ishighlighted to enter Adjust Mode.Pressy orz to adjust the angle of

the HUD display. Press S or T tohighlight OK, then press SEL to savethe setting. Cancel can also beselected to cancel the setting. Thevehicle must be in P (Park).

Open Source Software : Press SELwhile Open Source Software ishighlighted to display open sourcesoftware information.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehicle'sspeed in either kilometers per hour(km/h) or miles per hour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven since the tripodometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 149.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions per minute (rpm).



Fuel Gauge

Balanced Configuration

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how much fuelis left in the tank.

There is an arrow near the fuel gaugepointing to the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light comes on. There still isa little fuel left, but the vehicle shouldbe refueled soon.

Here are four things that some ownersask about. None of these show aproblem with the fuel gauge:

. At the service station, the fuelpump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuel tofill up than the gauge indicated.For example, the gauge may haveindicated the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more orless than half the tank's capacityto fill the tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few seconds tostabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric Balanced Configuration



English Balanced Configuration

This gauge measures the temperatureof the vehicle's engine.

While driving under normal operatingconditions, if the needle moves intothe red area, the engine is too hot.Pull off the road, stop the vehicle, andturn off the engine as soon aspossible.

Seat Belt Reminders

Driver Seat Belt Reminder Light

There is a driver seat belt reminderlight on the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle is started, this lightflashes and a chime may come on toremind the driver to fasten their seatbelt. Then the light stays on soliduntil the belt is buckled. This cyclemay continue several times if thedriver remains or becomes unbuckledwhile the vehicle is moving.

If the driver seat belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Seat Belt ReminderLight

There is a passenger seat beltreminder light near the passengerairbag status indicator. See PassengerSensing System 0 93.

When the vehicle is started, this lightflashes and a chime may come on toremind passengers to fasten their seatbelt. Then the light stays on soliduntil the belt is buckled. This cyclecontinues several times if thepassenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle is moving.

If the passenger seat belt is buckled,neither the chime nor the lightcomes on.

The front passenger seat belt reminderlight and chime may turn on if anobject is put on the seat such as abriefcase, handbag, grocery bag,laptop, or other electronic device. Toturn off the reminder light and/orchime, remove the object from theseat or buckle the seat belt.



Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), the passengersensing system, the pretensioners, theairbag modules, the wiring, and thecrash sensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System 0 87.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when the vehicle isstarted. If the light does not come onthen, have it fixed immediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it means

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags in thevehicle might not inflate in a crash,or they could even inflate without acrash. To help avoid injury, havethe vehicle serviced right away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. See Passenger Sensing System0 93 for important safety information.The passenger airbag status indicatoris in the overhead console.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicator willlight ON and OFF, or the symbols foron and off, for several seconds as asystem check. Then, after several moreseconds, the status indicator will lighteither ON or OFF, or the on or offsymbol, to let you know the status ofthe front outboard passenger frontalairbag.



If the word ON or the on symbol is liton the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag isallowed to inflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is liton the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. See yourdealer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 139 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turned on,but the engine is not running, as acheck to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be a problemwith the electrical charging system.Have it checked by your dealer.Driving while this light is on coulddrain the battery.

When this light comes on, or isflashing, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) also displays a message.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radio andair conditioner.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light)This light is part of the vehicle’semission control on-board diagnosticsystem. If this light is on while theengine is running, a malfunction hasbeen detected and the vehicle mayrequire service. The light should comeon to show that it is working whenthe ignition is in Service Mode. SeeIgnition Positions 0 203.

Malfunctions are often indicated bythe system before any problem isnoticeable. Being aware of the lightand seeking service promptly when itcomes on may prevent damage.



Caution

If the vehicle is driven continuallywith this light on, the emissioncontrol system may not work aswell, the fuel economy may belower, and the vehicle may not runsmoothly. This could lead to costlyrepairs that might not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Modifications to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system, or the use ofreplacement tires that do not meetthe original tire specifications, cancause this light to come on. Thiscould lead to costly repairs notcovered by the vehicle warranty.This could also affect the vehicle’sability to pass an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications 0 279.

If the light is flashing : Amalfunction has been detected thatcould damage the emission controlsystem and increase vehicleemissions. Diagnosis and service maybe required.

To help prevent damage, reducevehicle speed and avoid hardaccelerations and uphill grades.If towing a trailer, reduce the amountof cargo being hauled as soon aspossible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to park. Turn the vehicle offand wait at least 10 seconds beforerestarting the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previousguidelines and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

If the light is on steady : Amalfunction has been detected.Diagnosis and service may berequired.

Check the following:

. If fuel has been added to thevehicle using the capless fuelfunnel adapter, make sure that ithas been removed. See “Filling the

Tank with a Portable Gas Can”under Filling the Tank 0 254. Thediagnostic system can detect if theadapter has been left installed inthe vehicle, allowing fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with theadapter removed may turn off thelight.

. Poor fuel quality can causeinefficient engine operation andpoor driveability, which may goaway once the engine is warmedup. If this occurs, change the fuelbrand. It may require at least onefull tank of the proper fuel to turnthe light off. See RecommendedFuel 0 253.

If the light remains on, see yourdealer.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

If the vehicle requires an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test, the testequipment will likely connect to thevehicle's Data Link Connector (DLC).



The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steering wheel.Connecting devices that are not usedto perform an Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test or to service thevehicle may affect vehicle operation.See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 276.See your dealer if assistance is needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:

. The light is on when the engine isrunning.

. The light does not come on whenthe ignition is in Service Mode.

. Critical emission control systemshave not been completelydiagnosed. If this happens, thevehicle would not be ready forinspection and might requireseveral days of routine drivingbefore the system is ready forinspection. This can happen if the

12-volt battery has recently beenreplaced or run down, or if thevehicle has been recently serviced.

See your dealer if the vehicle will notpass or cannot be made ready forthe test.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consists oftwo hydraulic circuits. If one circuit isnot working, the remaining circuit canstill work to stop the vehicle. Fornormal braking performance, bothcircuits need to be working.

If the warning light comes on, there isa brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the engine is started. If it doesnot come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn you if there is aproblem.

If the light comes on and stays on,there is a brake problem.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on. Drivingwith the brake system warning lighton can lead to a crash. If the light isstill on after the vehicle has beenpulled off the road and carefullystopped, have the vehicle towed forservice.



Electric Parking BrakeLight

Metric English

This light comes on when the parkingbrake is applied. If the light continuesflashing after the parking brake isreleased, or while driving, there is aproblem with the Electric ParkingBrake system. A message may alsodisplay in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see your dealer.

Service Electric ParkingBrake Light

If this light comes on and stays on,there is a problem with a system onthe vehicle that is causing the parkingbrake system to work at a reducedlevel. The vehicle can still be driven,but should be taken to a dealer assoon as possible. See Electric ParkingBrake 0 220. A message may alsodisplay in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the light comes on while driving,stop as soon as it is safely possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then startthe engine again to reset the system.If the ABS light stays on, or comes onagain while driving, the vehicle needsservice. A chime may also sound whenthe light comes on steady.

If the ABS light is the only light on,the vehicle has regular brakes, but theantilock brakes are not functioning.



If both the ABS and the brake systemwarning light are on, the vehicle'santilock brakes are not functioningand there is a problem with theregular brakes. See your dealer forservice.

See Brake System Warning Light 0 142.

Sport Mode Light

This light comes on when Sport modeis selected. See Magnetic Ride Control0 225.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Tow/Haul Modefeature, this light comes on when theTow/Haul Mode has been activated.

See Tow/Haul Mode 0 214.

Winter Driving Mode Light

This light comes on when Snow/Icemode is selected. See Magnetic RideControl 0 225.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)Light

This light is green if LKA is availableto assist.

LKA may assist by gently turning thesteering wheel if the vehicleapproaches a detected lane markingwithout using the turn signal in thatdirection. The LKA light will turnamber.

This light is amber and flashes as aLane Departure Warning (LDW) alert,to indicate that the lane marking hasbeen crossed.

See Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 251.

Vehicle Ahead Indicator

If equipped, this indicator will displaygreen when a vehicle is detectedahead and amber when you arefollowing a vehicle ahead much tooclosely.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 244.



Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS) hasbeen turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrak/ESCbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak/ESC OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.


StabiliTrak OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control(ESC) system is turned off.If StabiliTrak/ESC is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If StabiliTrak/ESC and TCS are off, thesystem does not assist in controllingthe vehicle. Turn on the TCS and theStabiliTrak/ESC systems, and thewarning light turns off.


Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS and potentially the StabiliTrak/ESC system have been disabled.A Driver Information Center (DIC)message may display. Check the DICmessages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioning andwhether the vehicle requires service.

If the light is on and flashing, the TCSand/or the StabiliTrak/ESC system isactively working.




Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If the systemis working normally the indicator lightgoes off.

Caution

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light indicates that thevehicle has overheated. Driving withthis light on can damage the engineand it may not be covered by thevehicle warranty. See EngineOverheating 0 290.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens, pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. SeeEngine Overheating 0 290.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides information abouttire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more of thetires are significantly underinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC) tirepressure message may also display.Stop as soon as possible, and inflate

the tires to the pressure value shownon the Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Tire Pressure 0 320.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the light willcome on at every ignition cycle. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 323.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Check theoil level as soon as possible. Add oilif required, but if the oil level iswithin the operating range and theoil pressure is still low, have the

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

vehicle serviced. Always follow themaintenance schedule for changingengine oil.

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehicle couldbe low on oil and might have someother system problem. See your dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light is near the fuel gauge andcomes on briefly when the ignition isturned on as a check to show it isworking.

It also comes on when the fuel tank islow on fuel. The light turns off whenfuel is added. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicle

serviced by your dealer. If the systemis working normally, the indicatorlight turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operation0 50.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use. SeeHeadlamp High/Low-Beam Changer0 169.



IntelliBeam Light

This light comes on when theIntelliBeam system, if equipped, isenabled. See Exterior Lamp Controls0 167.

Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when the exteriorlamps are in use, except when onlythe Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)are active. See Exterior Lamp Controls0 167.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is white whenthe cruise control is on and ready, andturns green when the cruise control isset and active.

See Cruise Control 0 226.

Adaptive Cruise Control Light

This light is white when the AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC, if equipped) is onand ready, and turns green when theACC is set and active. See AdaptiveCruise Control 0 229.

Door Ajar Light

For vehicles equipped with this light,it comes on when a door is open ornot securely latched. Before driving,check that all doors are properlyclosed.



Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC is displayed in theinstrument cluster. It shows the statusof many vehicle systems.

y orz : Move SEL up or down togo to the previous or next selection.

S or T : Press to move between theinteractive display zones in thecluster. Press S to go back to theprevious menu.

SEL : Press to open a menu or select amenu item. Press and hold to resetvalues on certain screens.

DIC Information Display Options

The info displays on the DIC can beturned on or off through theSettings menu.

1. Press SEL while viewing theSettings page in one of theinteractive display zones on thecluster.

2. Scroll to Info Pages andpress SEL.

3. Pressy orz to move throughthe list of possible info displays.

4. Press SEL while an item ishighlighted to select or deselectthat item. When an item isselected, a checkmark will appearnext to it.

DIC Information Displays

The following is the list of all possibleDIC information displays. Some of theinformation displays may not beavailable for your particular vehicle.

Trip 1 or Trip 2 and Average FuelEconomy : The Trip display shows thecurrent distance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe trip odometer was last reset. Thetrip odometer can be reset by pressingand holding SEL while this display isactive.

The Average Fuel Economy displayshows the approximate average litersper 100 kilometers (L/100 km) ormiles per gallon (mpg). This numberis calculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.This number reflects only theapproximate average fuel economythat the vehicle has right now, andwill change as driving conditionschange. The Average Fuel Economycan be reset along with the tripodometer by pressing and holding SELwhile this display is active.

Also shows if the Active FuelManagement is active and inV4 mode, or inactive and in V8 mode.See Active Fuel Management 0 209.



Fuel Range : Shows the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. LOW will bedisplayed when the vehicle is low onfuel. The fuel range estimate is basedon an average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank.

Instantaneous Fuel Economy : Showsthe current fuel economy in eitherliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) ormiles per gallon (mpg). This numberreflects only the approximate fueleconomy that the vehicle has rightnow and changes frequently as drivingconditions change.

Average Speed : Shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in kilometers perhour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).This average is calculated based onthe various vehicle speeds recordedsince the last reset of this value. Theaverage speed can be reset by pressingand holding SEL while this display isactive.

Timer : This display can be used as atimer. To start the timer, press SELwhile this display is active. The

display will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset. To stop the timer, press SELbriefly while this display is active andthe timer is running. To reset thetimer to zero, press and hold SELwhile this display is active.

Turn Arrow : Shows the nextmaneuver when using route guidance.

Estimated Time to Arrival : Showsthe estimated time until arrival atyour destination.

Distance to Destination : Shows thedistance to the destination whenusing route guidance.

Speed Limit : Shows the currentspeed limit. The information for thispage comes from a roadway database.

Speed Warning : Allows the driver toset a speed that they do not want toexceed. To set the Speed Warning,press SEL when Speed Warning isdisplayed. Pressy orz to adjust thevalue. This feature can be turned offby pressing and holding SEL whileviewing this page. If the selected

speed limit is exceeded, a pop-upwarning is displayed and a chime maysound.

Cruise Set Speed : Shows the speedthe cruise control or Adaptive CruiseControl is set to.

Follow Distance Indicator : WhenAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is notengaged, the current follow time tothe vehicle ahead is displayed as atime value on this page. When ACChas been engaged, the displayswitches to the gap setting page. Thispage shows the current gap settingalong with the vehicle ahead indicator.

Battery Voltage : Shows the currentbattery voltage.

Oil Life : Shows an estimate of theoil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low, theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagewill appear on the display. The oilshould be changed as soon aspossible. See Engine Oil 0 282. Inaddition to the engine oil life system



monitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 363.

The Oil Life display must be resetafter each oil change. It will not resetitself. Do not reset the Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately until thenext oil change. To reset the engineoil life system, press and hold SEL forseveral seconds while the Oil Lifedisplay is active. See Engine Oil LifeSystem 0 284.

Oil Pressure : Shows the engine oilpressure in kPa (kilopascals)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Engine Hours : Shows the totalnumber of hours the engine has run.

Transmission Fluid Temperature :Shows the temperature of theautomatic transmission fluid in eitherdegrees Celsius (°C) or degreesFahrenheit (°F).

Tire Pressure : Shows theapproximate pressures of all four tires.Tire pressure is displayed in eitherkilopascal (kPa) or in pounds persquare inch (psi). If the pressure islow, the value for that tire is shown inamber. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem 0 322 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation 0 323.

Blank Page : Allows for noinformation to be displayed in thecluster info display areas.

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{ Warning

If the HUD image is too bright ortoo high in your field of view, itmay take you more time to seethings you need to see when it isdark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low inyour field of view.

If equipped with HUD, someinformation concerning the operationof the vehicle is projected onto the

windshield. The image is projectedthrough the HUD lens on top of theinstrument panel. The informationappears as an image focused outtoward the front of the vehicle.

Caution

If you try to use the HUD image asa parking aid, you may misjudgethe distance and damage yourvehicle. Do not use the HUD imageas a parking aid.

The HUD information can bedisplayed in various languages. Thespeedometer reading and othernumerical values can be displayed ineither English or metric units.

The language selection is changedthrough the radio and the units ofmeasurement is changed through theinstrument cluster. See VehiclePersonalization 0 155 and “Options”under Instrument Cluster 0 134.



HUD Display on the Windshield

The HUD may display some of thefollowing vehicle information andvehicle messages or alerts:

. Speed

. Tachometer

. Audio

. Phone

. Navigation

. Collision Alert

. Adaptive Cruise Control and setspeed

. Lane Departure

. Low Fuel

Some vehicle messages or alertsdisplayed in the HUD may be clearedby using the steering wheel controls.See Vehicle Messages 0 154.

Some information shown may not beavailable on your vehicle if it is notequipped with these features.

The HUD control is to the left of thesteering wheel.

To adjust the HUD image:

1. Adjust the driver seat.

2. Start the engine.

3. Use the following settings toadjust the HUD.

$ : Press or lift to center the HUDimage. The HUD image can only beadjusted up and down, not sideto side.

! : Press to select the display view.Each press will change thedisplay view.

D : Lift and hold to brighten thedisplay. Press and hold to dim thedisplay. Continue to hold to turn thedisplay off.

The HUD image will automaticallydim and brighten to compensate foroutside lighting. The HUD brightnesscontrol can also be adjusted asneeded.

The HUD image can temporarily lightup depending on the angle andposition of sunlight on the HUDdisplay. This is normal.

Polarized sunglasses could make theHUD image harder to see.

Head-Up Display (HUD) RotationOption

This feature allows for adjusting theangle of the HUD image.

Press SEL on the steering wheelcontrols while Head-up DisplayRotation is highlighted to enter AdjustMode. Pressy orz to adjust the



angle of the HUD display. Press S orT to highlight OK, then press SEL tosave the setting. CANCEL can also beselected to cancel the setting. Thevehicle must be in P (Park). SeeInstrument Cluster 0 134.

HUD Views

There are four views in the HUD.Some vehicle information and vehiclemessages or alerts may be displayedin any view.

Metric

English

Speed View : This displays digitalspeed in English or metric units,speed limit, vehicle ahead indicator,Lane Departure Warning/Lane KeepAssist, and Adaptive Cruise Controland set speed. Some information onlyappears on vehicles that have thesefeatures, and when they are active.

Metric

English

Audio/Phone View : This displaysdigital speed, indicators from speedview along with audio/phoneinformation. The current radio station,media type, and incoming calls will bedisplayed.

All HUD views may briefly displayaudio information when the driveruses the steering wheel controls toadjust the audio settings appearing inthe instrument cluster.

Incoming phone calls appearing in theinstrument cluster may also display inany HUD view.

Metric

English

Navigation View : This displaysdigital speed, indicators from speedview along with Turn-by-TurnNavigation information in some



vehicles. The compass heading isdisplayed when navigation routing isnot active.

Navigation Turn-by-Turn Alertsshown in the instrument cluster mayalso be displayed in any HUD view.

Metric

English

Performance View : This displaysdigital speed, indicators from speedview along with rpm reading,transmission positions, and gear shiftindicator (if equipped).

Care of the HUD

Clean the inside of the windshield toremove any dirt or film that couldreduce the sharpness or clarity of theHUD image.

Clean the HUD lens with a soft clothsprayed with glass cleaner. Wipe thelens gently, then dry it.

HUD Troubleshooting

If you cannot see the HUD imagewhen the ignition is on, check that:

. Nothing is covering the HUD lens.

. The HUD brightness setting is nottoo dim or too bright.

. The HUD is adjusted to the properheight.

. Polarized sunglasses are not worn.

. The windshield and HUD lens areclean.

If the HUD image is not correct,contact your dealer.

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. See Windshield Replacement0 300.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiple messagesmay appear one after another.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared by pressingSEL. The messages that requireimmediate action cannot be cleareduntil that action is performed.

All messages should be takenseriously; clearing the message doesnot correct the problem.

If a SERVICE message appears, seeyour dealer.

Follow the instructions given in themessages. The system displaysmessages regarding the followingtopics:

. Service Messages

. Fluid Levels

. Vehicle Security

. Brakes


INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 155. Ride Control Systems

. Driver Assistance Systems

. Cruise Control

. Lighting and Bulb Replacement

. Wiper/Washer Systems

. Doors and Windows

. Seat Belts

. Airbag Systems

. Engine and Transmission

. Tire Pressure

. Battery

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's propulsion power is reduced.Reduced propulsion power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noobserved reduction in performance,

proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced the nexttime the vehicle is driven. The vehiclemay be driven while this message ison, but maximum acceleration andspeed may be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, or displaysrepeatedly, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Vehicle Speed Messages

SPEED LIMITED TOXXX KM/H (MPH)

This message shows that the vehiclespeed has been limited to the speeddisplayed. The limited speed is aprotection for various propulsion andvehicle systems, such as lubrication,thermal, suspension, Teen Driver ifequipped, or tires.

Vehicle PersonalizationUse the audio system controls toaccess the personalization menus forcustomizing vehicle features.

The following are all possiblepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

Audio System Controls

1. Touch the desired feature todisplay a list of available options.

2. Touch to select the desiredfeature setting.

3. Touch S Back to return to theprevious menu or exit.

Touch SETTINGS from the Home Pageon the infotainment display.

Personalization Menus

The following list of menu items maybe available:

. Time and Date

. Rear Seat Reminder

. Language


156 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS. Video Voice-Over

. Valet Mode

. Teen Driver

. Radio

. Vehicle

. Bluetooth

. Apple CarPlay

. Android Auto

. Voice

. Display

. Rear Camera

. Return to Factory Settings

. Software Information

. Wi-Fi

Detailed information for each menufollows.

Time and Date

Manually set the time and date. SeeClock 0 127.

Rear Seat Reminder

This allows for a chime and a messagewhen the rear door has been openedbefore or during operation of thevehicle.

Select Off or On.

Language

Select Language, then select from theavailable language(s).

The selected language will display onthe system, and voice recognition willreflect the selected language.

Video Voice-Over

When activated, the Rear SeatInfotainment (RSI) system will readaloud menu titles, menu listings,pop-ups, alerts, and file titles fromaudio and video media.

Select Off or On.

Valet Mode

This will lock the infotainment systemand steering wheel controls. It mayalso limit access to vehicle storagelocations, if equipped.

To enable valet mode:

1. Enter a four-digit code on thekeypad.

2. Select Enter to go to theconfirmation screen.

3. Re-enter the four-digit code.

Touch Lock or Unlock to lock orunlock the system. Touch Back to goback to the previous menu.

Teen Driver

See “Teen Driver” under “Settings” inthe infotainment manual.

Radio

Select to display the Radio menu andthe following may display:

. Manage Favorites

. Number of Favorites Shown

. Audible Touch Feedback

. Bose AudioPilot

. Auto Volume

. Maximum Startup Volume



Manage Favorites

This allows favorites to be edited. See“Manage Favorites” in “Settings” under“Radio” in the infotainment manual.

Number of Favorites Shown

Touch to set the number of favoritesto display.

Select the desired number or selectAuto and the infotainment system willautomatically adjust the number offavorites shown.

Audible Touch Feedback

This allows Audible Touch Feedbackto be turned on or off.

Select Off or On.

Bose AudioPilot

This allows Bose AudioPilot to beturned on or off.

Select Off or On.

Auto Volume

This feature adjusts the volume basedon vehicle speed and ambient noise.

Select Off, Low, Medium-Low,Medium, Medium-High, or High.

Maximum Startup Volume

This feature sets the maximumstartup volume. If the vehicle isstarted and the volume is greater thanthis level, the volume is adjusted tothis level. To set the maximumstartup volume, touch + or − toincrease or decrease.

Vehicle

Select and the following may display:

. Climate and Air Quality

. Collision/Detection Systems

. Comfort and Convenience

. Lighting

. Power Door Locks

. Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Climate and Air Quality


. Auto Fan Speed

. Auto Cooled Seats

. Auto Heated Seats

. Auto Defog

. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Speed

This feature will set the auto fanspeed.

Select Low, Medium, or High.

Auto Cooled Seats

When enabled, this feature willautomatically activate the cooled seatsat the level required by the interiortemperature. See Heated and CooledFront Seats 0 69.

Select Off or On.

Auto Heated Seats

When the vehicle is on, this featurewill automatically activate the heatedseats at the level required by thevehicle's interior temperature. SeeHeated and Cooled Front Seats 0 69.

Select Off or On.

Auto Defog

When set to On, the auto defog comeson when the climate control sensordetects high interior humidity. Air willbe directed to the windshield.

Select Off or On.



Auto Rear Defog

If equipped, this feature willautomatically turn on the rear windowdefogger when the vehicle is firststarted in cold weather and turn offwhen the vehicle is warmed.

Select Off or On.

Collision/Detection Systems

Select the Collision/Detection Systemsmenu and the following may display:

. Alert Type

. Forward Collision System

. Rear Cross Traffic Alert

. Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier

. Park Assist

. Lane Change Alert

Alert Type

This feature will set crash alerts tobeeps or seat vibrations. See DriverAssistance Systems 0 237.

Select Beeps or Safety Alert Seat.

Forward Collision System

This feature will turn on or offForward Collision Alert (FCA) andForward Automatic Braking (FAB).The Off setting disables all FCA andFAB functions. With the Alert andBrake setting, both FCA and FAB areavailable. The Alert setting disablesFAB. See Forward Automatic Braking(FAB) 0 247.

Select Off, Alert and Brake, or Alert.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

This allows the Rear Cross TrafficAlert feature to be turned on or off.See Assistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 238.

Select Off or On.

Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier

This feature will give a reminder thatAdaptive Cruise Control provideswhen it has brought the vehicle to acomplete stop behind anotherstopping vehicle, and then that vehicledrives on.

Select Off or On.

Park Assist

If equipped, this allows the feature tobe turned on or off. See AssistanceSystems for Parking or Backing 0 238.

Select Off, On, or On with TowbarAttached.

Lane Change Alert

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Lane Change Alert (LCA)0 248.

Select Off or On.

Comfort and Convenience


. Auto Running Boards

. Auto Memory Recall

. Easy Exit Options

. Chime Volume

. Hands Free Liftgate Control

. Reverse Tilt Mirror

. Auto Mirror Folding

. Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear



Auto Running Boards

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Power Assist Steps 0 48.

Select Off, On, or Extended.

Auto Memory Recall

This feature automatically recalls thecurrent driver’s previously stored 1 or2 button positions when the ignitionis changed from off to on or ACC/ACCESSORY. See Memory Seats 0 65.

Select On or Off.

Easy Exit Options

This feature automatically recalls thepreviously stored exit button positionwhen exiting the vehicle. See MemorySeats 0 65.

Select Off or On.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of the chimevolume level.

Touch + or − to adjust the volume.

Hands Free Liftgate Control

The liftgate may be operated with akicking motion under the rear bumper.See Liftgate 0 40.

Select Off, On-Open and Close,or On-Open Only.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

When on, the driver and/or passengermirrors will tilt downward when thevehicle is shifted to R (Reverse) toimprove visibility of the ground nearthe rear wheels. See Reverse TiltMirrors 0 53.

Select Off, On - Driver and Passenger,On - Driver, or On - Passenger.

Auto Mirror Folding

When on, the outside mirrors willautomatically fold or unfold when theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter Q or K button is pressedand held. See Folding Mirrors 0 52.

Select Off or On.

Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

When on and the front wiper is on,the rear wiper will automaticallyactivate when the vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse).

Select Off or On.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing may display:

. Vehicle Locator Lights

. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This feature will flash the exteriorlamps and allows some of the exteriorlamps and most of the interior lampsto turn on briefly when K on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is pressed to locate thevehicle.

Select On or Off.



Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of how longthe exterior lamps stay on whenleaving the vehicle when it is darkoutside.

Select Off, 30 Seconds, 60 Seconds,or 120 Seconds.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing may display:

. Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

. Auto Door Unlock

. Delayed Door Lock

Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thevehicle is off, the driver door is open,and locking is requested. All the doorswill lock and only the driver door willunlock. See Lockout Protection 0 39.

If Off is selected, the Delayed DoorLock menu will be available.

Select Off or On.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors. To override thedelay, press the power door lockswitch on the door.

Select Off or On.

Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Select Remote Lock, Unlock, Start andthe following may display:

. Remote Unlock Light Feedback

. Remote Lock Feedback

. Remote Door Unlock

. Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

. Remote Window Operation

. Passive Door Unlock

. Passive Door Lock

. Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps will flashwhen unlocking the vehicle with theRKE transmitter.

Select Off or Flash Lights.

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Select Off, Lights and Horn, LightsOnly, or Horn Only.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter.

Select All Doors or Driver Door.

Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the cooled seats onwhen using remote start onwarm days.

Select Off or On.



Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the heated seats onwhen using remote start on cold days.

Select Off or On.

Remote Window Operation

This allows the windows to be openedwhen pressing K on the RKEtransmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 28.

Select Off or On.

Passive Door Unlock

This allows the selection of whatdoors will unlock when using thebutton on the driver door to unlockthe vehicle.

Select All Doors or Driver Door.

Passive Door Lock

This allows passive locking to beturned on or off and selects feedback.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 28.

Select Off, On with Horn Chirp, or On.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

This feature sounds an alert when theRKE transmitter is left in the vehicle.This menu also enables Remote NoLonger in Vehicle Alert.

Select Off or On.

Bluetooth


. Pair New Device

. Device Management

. Ringtones

. Voice Mail Numbers

. Text Message Alerts

Pair New Device

Select to pair a new device. See“Pairing” under “Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls)” in theinfotainment manual.

Device Management

Select to connect to a different phonesource, disconnect a phone, or deletea phone.

Ringtones

Select to change the ring tone for thespecific phone. The phone does notneed to be connected to change thering tone.

Voice Mail Numbers

This feature displays the voice mailnumber for all connected phones. Tochange the voice mail number, selectEDIT. Type a new number, thenselect SAVE.

Text Message Alerts

This feature allows text messages tobe received. See “Text Messaging”under “Phone” in the infotainmentmanual.

Select Off or On.

Apple CarPlay


. Apple CarPlay

. Manage Apple CarPlay Devices



Apple CarPlay

This feature allows Apple devices tobe connected to the infotainmentsystem through a USB port.

Select Off or On.

Manage Apple CarPlay Devices

Select to manage Apple devices. AppleCarPlay must be on for this feature tobe accessed.

Android Auto


. Android Auto

. Manage Android Auto Devices

Android Auto

This feature allows Android devices tobe connected to the infotainmentsystem through a USB port.

Select Off or On.

Manage Android Auto Devices

Select to manage Android devices.Android Auto must be on for thisfeature to be accessed.

Voice


. Confidence Threshold

. Prompt Length

. Audio Feedback Speed

. Display “What Can I Say?” Tips

Confidence Threshold

This feature allows the adjustment ofthe sensitivity of the speechrecognition system.

Select Confirm More or Confirm Less.

Prompt Length

This feature adjusts the voice promptlength.

Select Short or Long.

Audio Feedback Speed

This feature adjusts the audiofeedback speed.

Select Slow, Medium, or Fast.

Display “What Can I Say?” Tips

This feature gives voicecommand tips.

Select Off or On.

Display


. Mode

. Proximity Sensing

. Calibrate Touchscreen

. Turn Display Off

Mode

Select to change the display of theinfotainment system.

Select Auto, Day, or Night.

Proximity Sensing

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off.

Select Off, On, or On-Map Only.

Calibrate Touchscreen

Select to calibrate the touchscreen,then follow the prompts.



Turn Display Off

Select to turn the display off. Touchanywhere on the infotainment displayor press any infotainment controls onthe center stack to turn thedisplay on.

Rear Camera


. Guidance Lines

. Rear Park Assist Symbols

Guidance Lines

Select to turn Off or On. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 238.

Rear Park Assist Symbols

Select to turn Off or On. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 238.

Return to Factory Settings


. Restore Vehicle Settings

. Clear All Private Data

. Restore Radio Settings

Restore Vehicle Settings

This allows selection of restoringvehicle settings.

Select Restore or Cancel.

Clear All Private Data

This allows selection to clear allprivate information from the vehicle.

Select Delete or Cancel.

Restore Radio Settings

This allows selection to restore radiosettings.

Select Restore or Cancel.

Software Information

Select to view or update theinfotainment system current softwareinformation.

Wi-Fi


. Wi-Fi

. Manage Wi-Fi Networks

Wi-Fi

This feature allows Wi-Fi networks tobe turned off or on.

Select Off or On.

Manage Wi-Fi Networks

Select to manage Wi-Fi networks.Wi-Fi must be on for this feature to beaccessed.



Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement 0 388.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If equipped, these buttons are in theoverhead console.

This system can replace up to threeremote control transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, and homeautomation devices. These

instructions refer to a garage dooropener, but can be used for otherdevices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read these instructions completelybefore programming the UniversalRemote system. It may help to haveanother person assist with theprogramming process.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future programming.Erase the programming when vehicleownership is terminated. See “ErasingUniversal Remote System Buttons”later in this section.

To program a garage door opener,park outside directly in line with andfacing the garage door opener receiver.Clear all people and objects near thegarage door.

Make sure the hand-held transmitterhas a new battery for quicker andmore accurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or programming help,see www.homelink.com/gm or call1-800-355-3515. For calls placedoutside the U.S.A, Canada, or PuertoRico, international rates will apply andmay differ based on landline or mobilephone.

Programming involves time-sensitiveactions, and may time out causing theprocedure to be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to3 in) away from the UniversalRemote system buttons with theindicator light in view. Thehand-held transmitter wassupplied by the manufacturer ofthe garage door opener receiver.



2. At the same time, press and holdboth the hand-held transmitterbutton and one of the threeUniversal Remote systembuttons to be used to operate thegarage door. Do not release eitherbutton until the indicator lightchanges from a slow to a rapidflash. Then release both buttons.

Some garage door openers mayrequire substitution of Step 2with the procedure under “RadioSignals for Some Gate Operators”later in this section.

3. Press and hold the newlyprogrammed Universal Remotesystem button for five secondswhile watching the indicatorlight and garage door activation.

. If the indicator light stays oncontinuously or the garagedoor moves when the buttonis pressed, then programmingis complete. There is no needto complete Steps 4–6.

. If the indicator light does notcome on or the garage doordoes not move, a second

button press may berequired. For a second time,press and hold the newlyprogrammed button forfive seconds. If the light stayson or the garage door moves,programming is complete.

. If the indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds, thenchanges to a solid light andthe garage door does notmove, continue withprogramming Steps 4–6.

Learn or Smart Button

4. After completing Steps 1–3,locate the Learn or Smart buttoninside the garage on the garagedoor opener receiver. The nameand color of the button may varyby manufacturer.

5. Press and release the Learn orSmart button. Step 6 must becompleted within 30 seconds ofpressing this button.

6. Inside the vehicle, press and holdthe newly programmed UniversalRemote system button fortwo seconds, then release it.If the garage door does not moveor the lamp on the garage dooropener receiver does not flash,press and hold the same buttona second time for two seconds,then release it. Again, if the doordoes not move or the garagedoor lamp does not flash, pressand hold the same button a thirdtime for two seconds, thenrelease it.

The Universal Remote system shouldnow activate the garage door.

Repeat the process for programmingthe two remaining buttons.



Radio Signals for Some GateOperators

For questions or programming help,see www.homelink.com/gm or call1-800-355-3515. For calls placedoutside the U.S.A, Canada, or PuertoRico, international rates will apply andmay differ based on landline or mobilephone.

Some radio-frequency laws and gateoperators require transmitter signalsto time out or quit after severalseconds of transmission. This may notbe long enough for the UniversalRemote system to pick up the signalduring programming.

If the programming did not work,replace Step 2 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System” withthe following:

Press and hold the Universal Remotesystem button while pressing andreleasing the hand-held transmitterbutton every two seconds until thesignal has been successfully acceptedby the Universal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then

rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button for atleast one-half second. The indicatorlight will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

Erase all programmed buttons whenvehicle ownership is terminated.

To erase:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons until the indicator lightbegins to flash. This should takeabout 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote System Button

To reprogram any of the systembuttons:

1. Press and hold any one of thebuttons. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System.”


LIGHTING 167

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . . 167Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 169Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Automatic Headlamp System . . . 170Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . 171Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Cornering Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Battery Load Management . . . . . . 174Battery Power Protection . . . . . . . . 175Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

Turn the control to the followingpositions:

P : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL). Turningthe headlamp control toP again willturn the automatic headlamps andDRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada, theoff position only works when thevehicle is shifted into the P (Park)position.

AUTO : Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off, dependingon outside lighting.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

2 : Turns on the headlamps togetherwith the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

When the headlamps are turned onwhile the vehicle is on, the headlampswill turn off automatically 10 minutesafter the ignition is turned off. Whenthe headlamps are turned on whilethe vehicle is off, the headlamps willstay on for 10 minutes beforeautomatically turning off to preventthe battery from being drained. Turnthe headlamp control to off and thenback to the headlamp on position tomake the headlamps stay on for anadditional 10 minutes.


168 LIGHTING

IntelliBeam® System

If equipped, this system turns thevehicle's high-beam headlamps on andoff according to surrounding trafficconditions.

The system turns the high-beamheadlamps on when it is dark enoughand there is no other traffic present.

Thisb light comes on in theinstrument cluster when theIntelliBeam system is enabled.

Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam

To enable the IntelliBeam system,with the turn signal lever in theneutral position, turn the exteriorlamp control to AUTO. The bluehigh-beam on light appears on theinstrument cluster when the highbeams are on.

Driving with IntelliBeam

The system only activates the highbeams when driving over 40 km/h(25 mph).

There is a sensor near the top centerof the windshield, which automaticallycontrols the system. Keep this area ofthe windshield clear of debris to allowfor best system performance.

The high-beam headlamps remain on,under the automatic control, until oneof the following situations occurs:

. The system detects anapproaching vehicle's headlamps.

. The system detects a precedingvehicle's taillamps.

. The outside light is bright enoughthat high-beam headlamps are notrequired.

. The vehicle's speed drops below20 km/h (12 mph).

. The IntelliBeam system can bedisabled by the high/low-beamchanger or the flash-to-passfeature. If this happens, the high/low-beam changer must beactivated on then off withintwo seconds to reactivate theIntelliBeam system. Theinstrument cluster light will comeon to indicate the IntelliBeam isreactivated. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer 0 169 andFlash-to-Pass 0 169.

The high beams may not turn offautomatically if the system cannotdetect other vehicle's lamps becauseof any of the following:

. The other vehicle's lamps aremissing, damaged, obstructed fromview, or otherwise undetected.

. The other vehicle's lamps arecovered with dirt, snow, and/orroad spray.

. The other vehicle's lamps cannotbe detected due to dense exhaust,smoke, fog, snow, road spray, mist,or other airborne obstructions.


LIGHTING 169. The vehicle's windshield is dirty,

cracked, or obstructed bysomething that blocks the view ofthe light sensor.

. The vehicle is loaded such that thefront end points upward, causingthe light sensor to aim high andnot detect headlamps andtaillamps.

. The vehicle is being driven onwinding or hilly roads.

The automatic high-beam headlampsmay need to be disabled if any of theabove conditions exist.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderIf a door is open, a reminder chimesounds when the headlamps orparking lamps are manually turned onand the ignition is off. To turn off thechime, turn the exterior lamp controlto off or AUTO and then back on,or close and re-open the door. In theAUTO mode, the headlamps turn offonce the ignition is off or remain onuntil the headlamp delay ends (if

enabled in the DIC). See “ExitLighting” under Vehicle Personalization0 155.

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChangerPush the turn signal lever toward theinstrument panel to change theheadlamps from low to high beam.

Pull the turn signal lever toward youand release it to return to low-beamheadlamps.

When the high-beam headlamps areon, this indicator light on theinstrument cluster will also be on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use thehigh-beam headlamps to signal adriver in front of you that you want topass. It works even if the headlampsare in the automatic position.

To use it, pull the turn signal levertoward you, then release it.

If the headlamps are in the automaticposition or on low beam, thehigh-beam headlamps will turn on.They will stay on as long as you holdthe lever toward you. The high-beamindicator on the instrument clusterwill come on. Release the lever toreturn to normal operation.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of the vehicle during theday. Fully functional DRL are requiredon all vehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system comes on when thefollowing conditions are met:

. The ignition is on.


170 LIGHTING. The exterior lamp control is

in AUTO.

. The transmission is not inP (Park).

. The light sensor determines it isdaytime.

When the DRL system is on, only theDRL are on. The taillamps, sidemarkerlamps, instrument panel lights, andother lamps will not be on.

When it begins to get dark, theautomatic headlamp system switchesfrom DRL to the headlamps.

To turn off the DRL, turn the exteriorlamp control to O and then release.For vehicles first sold in Canada, offwill only work when the vehicle isparked.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theautomatic headlamp system turns onthe headlamps at the normalbrightness, along with the taillamps,

sidemarker, parking lamps, and theinstrument panel lights. The radiolights will also be dim.

To turn off the automatic headlampsystem, turn the exterior lamp controltoP and then release it.

The vehicle has a light sensor on thetop of the instrument panel thatcontrols the automatic headlampsystem. Do not cover the sensor,otherwise the headlamps may comeon when they are not needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage, heavy overcastweather, or a tunnel. This is normal.

There is a delay in the transitionbetween the daytime and nighttimeoperation of the automatic headlampsystem so that driving under bridgesor bright overhead street lights doesnot affect the system. The automaticheadlamp system is only affectedwhen the light sensor detects achange in lighting lasting longer thanthe delay.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem will come on immediately.Once the vehicle leaves the garage, ittakes approximately one minute forthe automatic headlamp system tochange if it is bright enough outside.During that delay, the instrumentcluster may not be as bright as usual.Make sure the instrument panelbrightness control is in the full brightposition. See Instrument PanelIllumination Control 0 172.


LIGHTING 171

To idle the vehicle with the automaticheadlamp system off, turn the controlto the off position.

The headlamps will also stay on afteryou exit the vehicle.

The regular headlamp system can beturned on when needed.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers are activatedin daylight with the engine on, andthe exterior lamp control is in AUTO,the headlamps, parking lamps, andother exterior lamps come on. Thetransition time for the lamps comingon varies based on wiper speed. Whenthe wipers are not operating, theselamps turn off. Move the exteriorlamp control toP or; to disablethis feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| : Press to make the front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off.Press again to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers areon, the vehicle's turn signals willnot work.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Move the turn signal lever all the wayup or down to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever for less thanone second until the arrow starts toflash to signal a lane change. Thiscauses the turn signals toautomatically flash three times. It willflash six times if Tow/Haul Mode isactive. Holding the turn signal leverfor more than one second will causethe turn signals to flash until thelever is released.


172 LIGHTING

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly or donot come on, a signal bulb could beburned out.

Replace any burned out bulbs. If abulb is not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers 0 304.

Turn Signal On Chime

If the turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chime soundsat each flash of the turn signal. Themessage TURN SIGNAL ON will alsoappear in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). To turn the chime andmessage off, move the turn signallever to the off position.

Cornering LampsIf equipped with cornering lamps, theyautomatically come on when all of thefollowing occur:

. The low-beam headlamps are on.

. The turn signals are activated orthe steering wheel is at acalibrated angle.

. The vehicle speed is below thecalibrated speed.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightness ofthe instrument panel lights and isnext to the exterior lamp control.

D : Move the thumbwheel up ordown to brighten or dim the lights.

The brightness of the displaysautomatically adjusts based onoutdoor lighting. The instrumentpanel illumination control will set thelowest level to which the displays willbe automatically adjusted.


LIGHTING 173

Dome Lamps

There are dome lamps in the overheadconsole and the headliner, if equipped.

To change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

OFF : Turns the lamps off, even whena door is open.

DOOR : The lamps come onautomatically when a door is opened.

ON : Turns all dome lamps on.

Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped. To operate, the ignitionmust be on or in ACC/ACCESSORY,or using Retained AccessoryPower (RAP).

Pressm orn next to each readinglamp to turn it on or off.


174 LIGHTING

Lighting Features

Entry LightingSome exterior lamps and the interiorlamps turn on briefly at night, or inareas with limited lighting, when K ispressed on the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter. When a door isopened, the interior lamps come on ifthe dome lamp control is in the DOORposition. After about 30 seconds theexterior lamps turn off. Entry lightingcan be disabled manually by changingthe ignition out of the OFF position,or by pressing the RKE transmitter Qbutton.

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” under VehiclePersonalization 0 155.

Exit LightingSome exterior lamps and interiorlamps come on at night, or in areaswith limited lighting, when the driverdoor is opened after the ignition isturned off. The exterior lamps and

interior lamps remain on for a setamount of time, then automaticallyturn off.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamp control off.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 155.

Battery Load ManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM), which estimatesthe battery's temperature and state ofcharge. It then adjusts the voltage forbest performance and extended life ofthe battery.

When the battery's state of charge islow, the voltage is raised slightly toquickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to preventovercharging. The voltmeter gauge orthe voltage display on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), if equipped,may show the voltage moving up ordown. This is normal. If there is aproblem, an alert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged at idleif the electrical loads are very high.This is true for all vehicles. This isbecause the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough atidle to produce all the power that isneeded for very high electrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps,rear window defogger, climate controlfan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loadsplugged into accessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reduce thepower demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in stepsor levels, without being noticeable. Inrare cases at the highest levels ofcorrective action, this action may benoticeable to the driver. If so, a DICmessage might be displayed and it is


LIGHTING 175

recommended that the driver reducethe electrical loads as much aspossible.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome andreading lamps if they are left on formore than 10 minutes when theignition is off. This will keep thebattery from running down.

Exterior Lighting BatterySaverThe exterior lamps turn off about10 minutes after the ignition is turnedoff, if the parking lamps or headlampshave been manually left on. Thisprotects against draining the battery.To restart the 10-minute timer, turnthe exterior lamp control to the Oposition and then back to the;or2 position.

To keep the lamps on for more than10 minutes, the ignition must be on orin ACC/ACCESSORY.


176 INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM

Infotainment System

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Introduction

InfotainmentSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE), andvoice or speech recognition,if equipped. It also includesinformation on settings.

Active Noise Cancellation (ANC)

If equipped, ANC reduces engine noisein the vehicle’s interior. ANC requiresthe factory-installed audio system,radio, speakers, amplifier (ifequipped), induction system, andexhaust system to work properly.Deactivation is required by your dealerif related aftermarket equipment isinstalled.


CLIMATE CONTROLS 177

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Rear Climate Control System . . . . 182

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic ClimateControl SystemThe climate control buttons on thecenter stack and on the climatecontrol display are used to adjust theheating, cooling, and ventilation.

Center Stack Climate Controls


2. Fan Control

3. OFF (Fan)

4. Driver and Passenger Heated andCooled Seats (If Equipped)

5. Recirculation

6. Rear Window Defogger

7. Defrost





3. Fan Control

4. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)


178 CLIMATE CONTROLS

5. A/C Mode (Air Conditioning)

6. Climate Control Selection(Application Tray Button)

7. Rear (Rear Climate ControlTouch Screen)



The fan, air delivery mode, airconditioning, driver and passengertemperatures, and SYNC settings canbe controlled by pressing CLIMATE onthe infotainment home screen or theclimate button on the infotainmentdisplay application tray. A selectioncan then be made on the front climatecontrol page displayed. See theinfotainment manual.

Climate Control Status Display

The climate control status displayappears briefly when the climatecontrol buttons on the center stackare adjusted. The air delivery modecan be adjusted on the climate controldisplay.

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controls thefan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle to thedesired temperature.

When AUTO is lit, all four functionsoperate automatically. Each functioncan also be manually set and thesetting is displayed. Functions notmanually set will continue to beautomatically controlled, even if theAUTO indicator is not lit.

For automatic operation:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature as neededfor best comfort.

To improve fuel efficiency and to coolthe vehicle faster, recirculation may beautomatically selected in warmweather. The recirculation light willnot come on. Press@ to selectrecirculation; press it again to selectoutside air.

English units can be changed tometric units through the instrumentcluster. See “Cluster Settings Menu”under Instrument Cluster 0 134.

OFF : Press OFF to turn the fan on oroff. When off is selected, the systemwill stop air from flowing into the



cabin. If on is selected, any otherbuttons are pressed, or any knobs areturned, the climate control system willturn on and operate at the currentsetting.

w /x : The temperature can beadjusted separately for the driver andthe passenger. Press to increase ordecrease the temperature. Press andhold to rapidly increase or decreasethe temperature.

The driver and passengertemperatures can also be adjusted bytouching the controls on the climatecontrol display.

SYNC : Touch SYNC on the climatecontrol display to link all climate zonesettings to the driver settings. Adjustthe driver side temperature control tochange the linked temperature. Whenthe passenger settings are adjusted,the SYNC button is displayed whenthe temperatures are unlinked.

Rear : If equipped, touch Rear on thefront climate control display to openthe rear climate control screen. The

rear climate control settings can nowbe adjusted from the frontpassenger area.

Manual Operation

z9y : Touch the fan controls onthe climate control display or pressthe fan control buttons, to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Touch or pressand hold the fan controls to adjustspeed more quickly. The fan speedsetting displays. Any adjustment ofthe fan speed cancels automatic fancontrol and the fan can be controlledmanually. Press AUTO to return toautomatic operation.

To turn off the fan and climatecontrol system, press OFF on thecenter stack climate controls. Theairflow will be blocked from enteringin all air delivery modes, exceptdefrost.

The maximum automatic fan speedcan be set to low, medium, or high. Toadjust Auto Fan Speed, see “Climateand Air Quality” under VehiclePersonalization 0 155.

Air Delivery Mode Control : Whenthe climate information is displayed,press the desired air delivery mode onthe climate control display to changethe direction of the airflow. Theselected air delivery mode button islit. Pressing any of the air deliverybuttons cancels automatic air deliverycontrol and the direction of theairflow can be controlled manually.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

Y : Air is directed to the instrumentpanel outlets.

\ : Air is divided between theinstrument panel outlets and the flooroutlets.

[ : Air is directed to the flooroutlets.

- : Clears the windows of fog ormoisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.



0 : Clears the windshield of fog orfrost more quickly. Air is directed tothe windshield. Press0 to turn on oroff. Changing the air delivery modealso turns the defrost off.

A/C Mode : Touch AC Mode on theclimate control display to turn theautomatic air conditioning on or off.If the fan is turned off or the outsidetemperature falls below freezing, theair conditioner will not run.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditioner runsas needed.

Automatic Air Recirculation : Whenthe AUTO indicator light is on, the airis automatically recirculated asneeded to help quickly cool the insideof the vehicle.

@ : Press to alternate betweenrecirculating air inside the vehicle orpulling in outside air. The indicatorlight on the button is lit whenrecirculation mode is active. Thishelps to quickly cool the air inside thevehicle and reduce the entry ofoutside air and odors.

Pressing this button cancels automaticrecirculation. Press AUTO to return toautomatic operation; recirculationruns automatically as needed.

Manual recirculation mode is notavailable when in Defrost or Defogmodes.

Auto Defog : The climate controlsystem uses a sensor to automaticallydetect high humidity inside thevehicle. When high humidity isdetected, the climate control systemmay adjust to outside air supply, turnon the air conditioner, and directmore air to the windshield. If theclimate control system does notdetect possible window fogging, itreturns to normal operation. To turnAuto Defog off or on, see “Climate andAir Quality” under VehiclePersonalization 0 155.

Rear Window Defogger

K : Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window defogger is on.

The rear window defogger only workswhen the ignition is on. The defoggerturns off if the ignition is turned offor to ACC/ACCESSORY.

The rear window defogger can be setto automatic operation. When AutoRear Defog is selected, the rearwindow defogger turns onautomatically when the vehicle is firststarted in cold weather and turns offwhen the vehicle is warmed. To turnAuto Rear Defog on or off, see“Climate and Air Quality” underVehicle Personalization 0 155.

The heated outside mirrors turn onwhen the rear window defoggerbutton is on and help to clear fog orfrost from the surface of the mirrors.

Caution

Do not try to clear frost or othermaterial from the inside of thefront windshield and rear windowwith a razor blade or anything elsethat is sharp. This may damage therear window defogger grid and

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

affect the radio's ability to pick upstations clearly. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Driver and Passenger Heated andCooled Seats : If equipped, pressIor+ to heat the driver or passengerseatback only.

If equipped, press J or z to heat thedriver or passenger seat cushion andseatback.

If equipped, press C or { to cool thedriver or passenger seat. See Heatedand Cooled Front Seats 0 69.

The vehicle also has auto heated andcooled seats that turn on when thevehicle is on. The seats will activate atthe level required by the vehicle’sinterior temperature. The auto heatedand cooled seats can be turned on oroff. See Vehicle Personalization 0 155and Heated and Cooled Front Seats0 69.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation : If equipped with theremote start feature, the climatecontrol system may run when thevehicle is started remotely. The systemuses the driver’s previous settings toheat or cool the inside of the vehicle.The rear defog may come on duringremote start based on cold ambientconditions. The rear defog indicatorlight does not come on during aremote start. If equipped with heatedor cooled seats, they may come onduring a remote start. See RemoteVehicle Start 0 35 and Heated andCooled Front Seats 0 69.

Sensor

The solar sensor, on top of theinstrument panel near the windshield,monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed, recirculation,and air delivery mode for bestcomfort.

If the sensor is covered, the automaticclimate control system may not workproperly.



Rear Climate ControlSystemIf equipped, the rear climate controlsystem is on the rear of the centerconsole. The settings can be adjustedwith the rear climate controls and therear climate display.

Rear Climate Controls

1. Heated Rear Seats


3. Temperature Control

4. Fan Control

5. O (On/Off)


Rear Climate Display


2. Rear Climate TemperatureControl

3. Fan Control

4. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperatures)

5. REAR O (On/Off)

6. Rear AUTO (AutomaticOperation)

7. Front (Front Climate ControlTouch Screen)

8. Rear Control Lockout


Rear : Touch Rear on the frontclimate control display to open therear climate control screen. The rearclimate control settings can now beadjusted from the frontpassenger area.

O : Press O or REAR O to turn therear climate control system on or off.If the rear climate control system isturned off using REAR O on the rear

climate display, the O button and thetemperature or air delivery modebuttons on the rear climate controlsmust be pressed within five secondsto turn it back on.

SYNC : Touch SYNC on the rearclimate display to match the rearclimate control temperature to thefront climate control drivertemperature. The SYNC button will belit. Press the temperature, MODE,or AUTO button twice to unlink theset driver and rear temperatures. TheSYNC button turns off.



Rear Control Lockout : Touch RearControl Lockout on the rear climatedisplay to lock or unlock control ofthe rear climate control system fromthe front climate control display.When locked the rear climate controlsystem cannot be adjusted from therear climate controls on the rear ofthe center console.

Automatic Operation

Rear AUTO : Touch to turn on or off.The air delivery and fan speed arecontrolled automatically. The AUTOindicator appears on the display onthe rear of the center console. If theMode or fan control buttons aremanually adjusted, this cancels theautomatic operation.

Manual Operation

A«/ªAª : Touch or press thefan controls on the rear climatedisplay or on the rear of the centerconsole to increase or decrease the

airflow. PressingA« when thesystem is off will turn the system on.The air delivery mode remains in itsprevious setting.

w /x : Touch or press and hold therear temperature controls on the rearclimate display or on the rear of thecenter console to adjust the rearpassenger temperature. Pressw for

warmer air and pressx for cooler air.

Y/\/Y : Touch the desired modeon the rear climate display or theMODE button on the rear of thecenter console to change the directionof the airflow in the rear seating area.

M or L : Press M or L to heat theleft or right outboard seat cushion.See Heated Rear Seats 0 71.

Air VentsAdjustable air vents are in the centerand on the side of the instrumentpanel.

1. Slider Knob

2. Thumbwheel

Move the slider knobs (1) to changethe direction of the airflow.

Use the thumbwheels (2) near the airvents to open or close off the airflow.



Operation Tips

. Clear away any ice, snow, or leavesfrom the air inlets at the base ofthe windshield that could blockthe flow of air into the vehicle.

. Clear snow off the hood toimprove visibility and helpdecrease moisture drawn into thevehicle.

. When you enter a vehicle in coldweather, press the fan up buttonto the maximum fan level beforedriving. This helps clear the intakeducts of snow and moisture, andreduces the chance of fogging theinside of the window.

. Keep the air path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affect theperformance of the system. Checkwith your dealer before addingequipment to the outside of thevehicle.

Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter reduces the dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 363. To findout what type of filter to use, seeMaintenance Replacement Parts 0 373.

1. Before opening the glove box,remove the two lower screws(out of view).

2. Open the glove box completelyand remove the two upperscrews.

3. Disconnect the electrical plugand remove the entire glove box.



4. Release the two tabs holding theservice door. Open the servicedoor and remove the old filter.

5. Install the new air filter.

6. Close the service door and securethe tabs.

7. Reverse the steps to reinstall theglove box.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.

ServiceAll vehicles have a label underhoodthat identifies the refrigerant used inthe vehicle. The refrigerant systemshould only be serviced by trained andcertified technicians. The airconditioning evaporator should neverbe repaired or replaced by one from asalvage vehicle. It should only bereplaced by a new evaporator toensure proper and safe operation.

During service, all refrigerants shouldbe reclaimed with proper equipment.Venting refrigerants directly to theatmosphere is harmful to theenvironment and may also createunsafe conditions based on inhalation,combustion, frostbite, or otherhealth-based concerns.

The air conditioning system requiresperiodic maintenance. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 363.


186 DRIVING AND OPERATING

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . 194Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 195Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . 197Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Active Fuel Management . . . . . . . . 209Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . 210Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Drive SystemsFour-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

BrakesAntilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . 219Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Automatic Level Control . . . . . . . . . 226

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . 229

Driver Assistance SystemsDriver Assistance Systems . . . . . . . 237Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . 248Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . . 248Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . . . 251

FuelTop Tier Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . 254Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254


DRIVING AND OPERATING 187

Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Trailer TowingGeneral Towing Information . . . . 256Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . 274

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On Electrical Equipment . . . 276

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many forms andcan take your focus from the task ofdriving. Exercise good judgment anddo not let other activities divert yourattention away from the road. Manylocal governments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, keep youreyes on the road, keep your hands onthe steering wheel, and focus yourattention on driving.

. Do not use a phone in demandingdriving situations. Use ahands-free method to place orreceive necessary phone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read, takenotes, or look up information onphones or other electronic devices.

. Designate a front seat passengerto handle potential distractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings. Programall trip information into anynavigation device prior to driving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parked toretrieve items that have fallen tothe floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tend tochildren.

. Keep pets in an appropriate carrieror restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.



Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem and the navigation system,if equipped, including pairing andusing a cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The first stepin driving defensively is to wear theseat belt. See Seat Belts 0 78.

. Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by even asmall amount of alcohol. You canhave a serious — or even fatal —collision if you drive after drinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and accelerating areimportant factors in helping to controla vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time is aboutthree-quarters of a second. In thattime, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft), whichcould be a lot of distance in anemergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:

. Keep enough distance betweenyou and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brake normallybut do not pump the brakes. Doing socould make the pedal harder to pushdown. If the engine stops, there willbe some power brake assist but it willbe used when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and the brakepedal will be harder to push.



Steering

Electric Power Steering

This vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenance isnot required.

If power steering assist is lost due to asystem malfunction, the vehicle canbe steered, but may require increasedeffort.

See your dealer if there is a problem.

If the steering assist is used for anextended period of time while thevehicle is not moving, power assistmay be reduced.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel, and isheld in that position for an extendedperiod of time, power steering assistmay be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when the systemcools down.

See your dealer if there is a problem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable speed.

. Reduce speed before entering acurve.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out of thecurve before accelerating gentlyinto the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem may bemore effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of the steeringwheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can drop offthe edge of a road onto the shoulderwhile driving. Follow these tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator and then,if there is nothing in the way,steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.



Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:

. Braking Skid — wheels are notrolling.

. Steering or Cornering Skid — toomuch speed or steering in a curvecauses tires to slip and losecornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the driving wheelsto spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skids bytaking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:

. Ease your foot off the acceleratorpedal and steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. The vehicle maystraighten out. Be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

. Slow down and adjust your drivingaccording to weather conditions.Stopping distance can be longerand vehicle control can be affectedwhen traction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or other materialon the road. Learn to recognizewarning clues — such as enoughwater, ice, or packed snow on theroad to make a mirrored surface— and slow down when you haveany doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking, includingreducing vehicle speed by shiftingto a lower gear. Any suddenchanges could cause the tires toslide.

Remember: Antilock brakes help avoidonly the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingFour-wheel-drive vehicles can be usedfor off-road driving. Vehicles withoutfour-wheel drive and vehicles notequipped with All Terrain (AT) orOn-Off Road (OOR) tires must not bedriven off-road except on a level, solid

surface. For contact information aboutthe original equipment tires, see thewarranty manual.

One of the best ways for successfuloff-road driving is to control thespeed.

{ Warning

When driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in direction caneasily throw you out of position.This could cause you to lose controland crash. You and your passengersshould always wear seat belts.

Before Driving Off-Road. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work completed.

. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels,and check inflation pressure in alltires, including the spare,if equipped.

. Read all the information aboutfour-wheel-drive vehicles in thismanual.


DRIVING AND OPERATING 191. Know the local laws that apply to

off-road driving.

To gain more ground clearance ifneeded, it may be necessary to removethe front fascia lower air dam,if equipped. However, driving withoutthe air dam reduces fuel economy.

Caution

Operating the vehicle for extendedperiods without the front fascialower air dam installed can causeimproper airflow to the engine.Reattach the front fascia air damafter off-road driving.

Loading the Vehicle for Off-RoadDriving

{ Warning

. Unsecured cargo on the loadfloor can be tossed aboutwhen driving over roughterrain. You or your

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passengers can be struck byflying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

. Keep cargo in the cargo areaas far forward and as low aspossible. The heaviest thingsshould be on the floor,forward of the rear axle.

. Heavy loads on the roof raisethe vehicle's center of gravity,making it more likely to rollover. You can be seriously orfatally injured if the vehiclerolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not onthe roof.

For more information about loadingthe vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limits0 197 and Tires 0 314.

Environmental Concerns. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenset aside for public off-roadrecreational driving and obey allposted regulations.

. Do not damage shrubs, flowers,trees, or grasses or disturb wildlife.

. Do not park over things that burn.See Parking over Things That Burn0 209.

Driving on Hills

Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding ofwhat the vehicle can and cannot do.

{ Warning

Many hills are simply too steep forany vehicle. Driving up hills cancause the vehicle to stall. Drivingdown hills can cause loss of control.Driving across hills can cause arollover. You could be injured orkilled. Do not drive on steep hills.



Before driving on a hill, assess thesteepness, traction, and obstructions.If the terrain ahead cannot be seen,get out of the vehicle and walk the hillbefore driving further.

When driving on hills:

. Use a low gear and keep a firmgrip on the steering wheel.

. Maintain a slow speed.

. When possible, drive straight upor down the hill.

. Slow down when approaching thetop of the hill.

. Use headlamps even during theday to make the vehicle morevisible.

{ Warning

Driving to the top of a hill at highspeed can cause a crash. Therecould be a drop-off, embankment,cliff, or even another vehicle. Youcould be seriously injured or killed.As you near the top of a hill, slowdown and stay alert.

. Never go downhill forward orbackward with either thetransmission or transfer case inN (Neutral). The brakes couldoverheat and you could losecontrol.

{ Warning

If the vehicle has the two-speedautomatic or electronic transfercase, shifting the transfer case toN (Neutral) can cause your vehicleto roll even if the transmission is inP (Park). This is because theN (Neutral) position on the transfercase overrides the transmission.You or someone else could beinjured. If leaving the vehicle, setthe parking brake and shift thetransmission to P (Park). Shift thetransfer case to any position butN (Neutral).

. When driving down a hill, keepthe vehicle headed straight down.Use a low gear because the engine

will work with the brakes to slowthe vehicle and help keep thevehicle under control.

{ Warning

Heavy braking when going down ahill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This could causeloss of control and you or otherscould be injured or killed. Apply thebrakes lightly when descending ahill and use a low gear to keepvehicle speed under control.

If the vehicle stalls on a hill:

1. Apply the brakes to stop thevehicle, and then apply theparking brake.

2. Shift into P (Park) and thenrestart the engine.

. If driving uphill when thevehicle stalls, shift toR (Reverse), release theparking brake, and backstraight down.


DRIVING AND OPERATING 193. Never try to turn the vehicle

around. If the hill is steepenough to stall the vehicle, itis steep enough to cause it toroll over.

. If you cannot make it up thehill, back straight downthe hill.

. Never back down a hill inN (Neutral) using only thebrake. The vehicle can rollbackward quickly and youcould lose control.

. If driving downhill when thevehicle stalls, shift to a lowergear, release the parkingbrake, and drive straightdown the hill.

3. If the vehicle cannot be restartedafter stalling, set the parkingbrake, shift into P (Park), andturn the vehicle off.

3.1. Leave the vehicle andseek help.

3.2. Stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if itrolled downhill.

. Avoid turns that take the vehicleacross the incline of the hill. A hillthat can be driven straight up ordown might be too steep to driveacross. Driving across an inclineputs more weight on the downhillwheels, which could cause adownhill slide or a rollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass can causethe tires to slip sideways, downhill.If the vehicle slips sideways, it canhit something that will trip it — arock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline moresevere. If a rock is driven acrosswith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rut ordepression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

. If an incline must be drivenacross, and the vehicle starts toslide, turn downhill. This shouldhelp straighten out the vehicle andprevent the side slipping.

{ Warning

Getting out of the vehicle on thedownhill side when stopped acrossan incline is dangerous. If thevehicle rolls over, you could becrushed or killed. Always get out onthe uphill side of the vehicle andstay well clear of the rollover path.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

Use a low gear when driving in mud— the deeper the mud, the lower thegear. Keep the vehicle moving to avoidgetting stuck.

Traction changes when driving onsand. On loose sand, such as onbeaches or sand dunes, the tires tendto sink into the sand. This affectssteering, accelerating, and braking.Drive at a reduced speed and avoidsharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

Traction is reduced on hard packedsnow and ice and it is easy to losecontrol. Reduce vehicle speed whendriving on hard packed snow and ice.



{ Warning

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous. Iceconditions vary greatly and thevehicle could fall through the ice;you and your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.

Driving in Water

{ Warning

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstream andyou and your passengers coulddrown. If it is only shallow water, itcan still wash away the groundfrom under your tires. Tractioncould be lost, and the vehicle couldroll over. Do not drive throughrushing water.

Caution

Do not drive through standingwater if it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe. Deep water can damage theaxle and other vehicle parts.

If the standing water is not too deep,drive through it slowly. At fasterspeeds, water can get into the engineand cause it to stall. Stalling canoccur if the exhaust pipe is underwater. Do not turn off the ignitionwhen driving through water. If theexhaust pipe is under water, theengine will not start. When goingthrough water, the brakes get wet andit may take longer to stop. See“Driving on Wet Roads” later in thissection.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris that hascollected on the underbody or chassis,or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand, havethe brake linings cleaned and checked.These substances can cause glazingand uneven braking. Check the bodystructure, driveline, steering,suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaustsystem for damage and check the fuellines and cooling system for anyleakage.

More frequent maintenance service isrequired. See the Maintenance Schedule0 363.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reduce vehicletraction and affect your ability to stopand accelerate. Always drive slower inthese types of driving conditions andavoid driving through large puddlesand deep-standing or flowing water.



{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes. Theymight not work as well in a quickstop and could cause pulling to oneside. You could lose control of thevehicle.

After driving through a large puddleof water or a car/vehicle wash,lightly apply the brake pedal untilthe brakes work normally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and be verycautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water canbuild up under the vehicle's tires sothey actually ride on the water. Thiscan happen if the road is wet enough

and you are going fast enough. Whenthe vehicle is hydroplaning, it haslittle or no contact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

. Allow extra following distance.

. Pass with caution.

. Keep windshield wiping equipmentin good shape.

. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with proper treaddepth. See Tires 0 314.

. Turn off cruise control.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than driving onflat or rolling terrain. Tips include:

. Keep the vehicle serviced and ingood shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow the vehicleon a long downhill slope can causebrake overheating, can reduce brakeperformance, and could result in aloss of braking. Shift thetransmission to a lower gear to letthe engine assist the brakes on asteep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) orwith the ignition off is dangerous.This can cause overheating of thebrakes and loss of steering assist.Always have the engine runningand the vehicle in gear.


196 DRIVING AND OPERATING. Drive at speeds that keep the

vehicle in its own lane. Do notswing wide or cross thecenter line.

. Be alert on top of hills; somethingcould be in your lane (e.g., stalledcar, crash).

. Pay attention to special road signs(e.g., falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Snow or ice between the tires and theroad creates less traction or grip, sodrive carefully. Wet ice can occur atabout 0 °C (32 °F) when freezing rainbegins to fall. Avoid driving on wet iceor in freezing rain until roads can betreated.

For Slippery Road Driving:

. Accelerate gently. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick.

. Turn on Traction Control. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 222.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops, but the brakes shouldbe applied sooner than when ondry pavement. See Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) 0 219.

. Allow greater following distanceand watch for slippery spots. Icypatches can occur on otherwiseclear roads in shaded areas. Thesurface of a curve or an overpasscan remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. Avoidsudden steering maneuvers andbraking while on ice.

. Turn off cruise control.

Blizzard Conditions

Stay with the vehicle unless there ishelp nearby. If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Service 0 382.To get help and keep everyone in thevehicle safe:


. Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This may causeexhaust gases to get inside. Engineexhaust contains carbon monoxide(CO), which cannot be seen orsmelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle is stuck in snow:

. Clear snow from the base ofthe vehicle, especially anyblocking the exhaust pipe.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the vehicle side thatis away from the wind, tobring in fresh air.


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to circulate the airinside the vehicle and set the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

fan speed to the highestsetting. See “Climate ControlSystems.”

For more information about CO, seeEngine Exhaust 0 209.

To save fuel, run the engine for shortperiods to warm the vehicle and thenshut the engine off and partially closethe window. Moving about to keepwarm also helps.

If it takes time for help to arrive,when running the engine, push theaccelerator pedal slightly so theengine runs faster than the idle speed.This keeps the battery charged torestart the vehicle and to signal forhelp with the headlamps. Do this aslittle as possible, to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin the wheelsto free the vehicle when stuck in sand,mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 222.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you orothers could be injured. The vehiclecan overheat, causing an enginecompartment fire or other damage.Spin the wheels as little as possibleand avoid going above 56 km/h(35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Get it Out

Turn the steering wheel left and rightto clear the area around the frontwheels. Turn off any traction system.Shift back and forth betweenR (Reverse) and a low forward gear,spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears. Releasethe accelerator pedal while shifting,and press lightly on the accelerator

pedal when the transmission is ingear. Slowly spinning the wheels inthe forward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out, seeTowing the Vehicle 0 348.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle can carry.This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes theweight of all occupants, cargo, andall nonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle mayshow how much weight it wasdesigned to carry, the Tire andLoading Information label and theCertification/Tire label.



{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front orrear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). This can causesystems to break and changethe way the vehicle handles.This could cause loss of controland a crash. Overloading canalso reduce stopping distance,damage the tires, and shortenthe life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar). The tire and loadinginformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Informationlabel also shows the size of theoriginal equipment tires (3) andthe recommended cold tireinflation pressures (4). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires 0 314 and Tire Pressure0 320.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It mayshow the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for thefront and rear axles. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.

“Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit–

1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.



2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weightof the driver and passengersfrom XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity. Forexample, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs. and therewill be five 150 lb passengersin your vehicle, the amountof available cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing 0 261 for importantinformation on towing a trailer,towing safety rules, and trailering tips.

Example 1

1. Maximum Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 1 =453 kg (1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs)

3. Available Occupant and CargoWeight = 317 kg (700 lbs)

Example 2

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 136 kg(750 lbs)

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)



Example 3

1. Maximum Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 3 =453 kg (1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceed thevehicle's capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

Label Example

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to theB-pillar. The label may show thesize of the vehicle's original tiresand the inflation pressures neededto obtain the gross weightcapacity of the vehicle. This iscalled Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR). The GVWRincludes the weight of the vehicle,all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label mayalso show the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles, calledGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).To find out the actual loads onthe front and rear axles, weigh thevehicle at a weigh station. Yourdealer can help with this. Be sureto spread the load equally on bothsides of the center line.

The warranty does not cover partsor components that fail because ofoverloading.

The label will help determine howmuch cargo and installedequipment the vehicle can carry.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not change theweight ratings. Ask your dealer tohelp load the vehicle properly.



{ Warning

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop or turn,or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavier things,like suitcases, inside thevehicle so that some ofthem are above the tops ofthe seats.

. Do not leave an unsecuredchild restraint in thevehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secure itwhenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

There is also important loadinginformation for off-road driving inthis manual. See “Loading theVehicle for Off-Road Driving”under Off-Road Driving 0 190.

Add-On Equipment

There may be a limit on howmany people can be inside thevehicle when carrying removableitems. Be sure to weigh the vehiclebefore buying and installing thenew equipment.

Caution

Overloading the vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty. Donot overload the vehicle.

Remember not to exceed theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)of the front or rear axle.

Automatic Level Control

See Automatic Level Control 0 226.

If a weight-distributing hitch isbeing used, it is recommended toallow the shocks to inflate,thereby leveling the vehicle priorto adjusting the height. See“Hitches” under Towing Equipment0 266.



Starting and Operating

New Vehicle Break-In

Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

. Keep the vehicle speed at88 km/h (55 mph) or less forthe first 805 km (500 mi).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200 mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlier

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

replacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towing0 261 for the trailer towingcapabilities of the vehicle andmore information.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Adjustable Throttle andBrake PedalIf equipped, the position of thethrottle and brake pedals can bechanged.

The pedals can only be adjusted whenthe vehicle is in P (Park).

Press the top of the switch to movethe pedals closer to your body. Pressthe bottom of the switch to move thepedals away.

Before you start driving, fully pressthe brake pedal to confirm theadjustment is right for you.

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction, which lets pedal settings besaved and recalled. See Memory Seats0 65.



Ignition Positions

The vehicle is equipped with KeylessAccess and has pushbutton start.

The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter must be in the vehicle forthe system to operate. If thepushbutton start is not working, thevehicle may be near a strong radioantenna signal causing interference tothe Keyless Access system. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 28.

To shift out of P (Park), the vehiclemust be on or in service mode, andthe brake pedal must be applied.

Stopping the Engine/LOCK/OFF (NoIndicator Lights) : When the vehicleis stopped, press ENGINE START/STOP once to turn the engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 207.

If the vehicle is not in P (Park), theignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display the messageSHIFT TO PARK in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). When thevehicle is shifted into P (Park), theignition will turn off.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brake andsteering systems and disable theairbags.

The vehicle may have an electricsteering column lock. The lock isactivated when the ignition is turnedoff and either front door is opened.A sound may be heard as the lockactuates or releases. The steeringcolumn lock may not release with the

wheels turned off center. If thishappens, the vehicle may not start.Move the steering wheel from left toright while attempting to start thevehicle. If this does not work, thevehicle needs service.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shift toP (Park), and turn the ignitionoff. On vehicles with anautomatic transmission, the shiftlever must be in P (Park) to turnthe ignition off.

4. Set the parking brake.See Parking Brake 0 219 orElectric Parking Brake 0 220.



{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut the vehicleoff in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,press and hold ENGINE START/STOPfor longer than two seconds, or presstwice in five seconds.

ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber IndicatorLight) : This mode allows someelectrical accessories to be used whenthe engine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition will switch from ACC/ACCESSORY to off after five minutesto prevent battery rundown.

ON/RUN/START (Green IndicatorLight) : This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, and thebrake pedal applied, pressing thebutton once will turn the ignition on.Once engine cranking begins, releasethe button. Engine cranking willcontinue until the engine starts. SeeStarting the Engine 0 204. The ignitionwill then remain on.

Service Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and to verifythe proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as may berequired for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off, and thebrake pedal not applied, pressing andholding the button for more thanfive seconds will place the vehicle inService Mode. The instruments andaudio systems will operate as they dowhen the ignition is on, but thevehicle will not be able to be driven.The engine will not start in ServiceMode. Press the button again to turnthe ignition off.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could change theway the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty. SeeAdd-On Electrical Equipment 0 276.



Starting Procedure

1. With the Keyless Access system,the RKE transmitter must be inthe vehicle. Press ENGINESTART/STOP with the brakepedal applied. When the enginebegins cranking, let go of thebutton.

The idle speed will go down asthe engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it.

If the RKE transmitter is not inthe vehicle, if there isinterference, or if the RKEbattery is low, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) willdisplay a message.

Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

battery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18 °Cor 0 °F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you press ENGINE START/STOP, for up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the button, and theaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, dothe same thing. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine and

transmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Engine Heater

{ Warning

Do not plug in the engine blockheater while the vehicle is parked ina garage or under a carport.Property damage or personal injurymay result. Always park the vehiclein a clear open area away frombuildings or structures.

If equipped, the engine heater canprovide easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up incold weather conditions at or below−18 °C (0 °F). Vehicles with an engineheater should be plugged in at leastfour hours before starting. There maybe an internal thermostat in the plugend of the cord, which will preventengine heater operation attemperatures above −18 °C (0 °F).



To Use the Engine Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord is by theleft front fender, next to theengine compartment fuse block.

Check the heater cord fordamage. If it is damaged, do notuse it. See your dealer for areplacement. Inspect the cord fordamage yearly.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ Warning

Improper use of the heater cord oran extension cord can damage thecord and may result in overheatingand fire.

. Plug the cord into athree-prong electrical utilityreceptacle that is protected bya ground fault detection

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

function. An ungroundedoutlet could cause an electricshock.

. Use a weatherproof,heavy-duty, 15 amp-ratedextension cord if needed.Failure to use therecommended extension cordin good operating condition,or using a damaged heater orextension cord, could make itoverheat and cause a fire,property damage, electricshock, and injury.

. Do not operate the vehiclewith the heater cordpermanently attached to the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle. Possible heater cordand thermostat damage couldoccur.

. While in use, do not let theheater cord touch vehicleparts or sharp edges. Neverclose the hood on theheater cord.

. Before starting the vehicle,unplug the cord, reattach thecover to the plug, andsecurely fasten the cord. Keepthe cord away from anymoving parts.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store the cordas it was before to keep it awayfrom moving engine parts. If youdo not, it could be damaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends on severalfactors. Ask a dealer in the area whereyou will be parking the vehicle for thebest advice on this.



Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)Some vehicle accessories may be usedafter the ignition is turned off.

The power windows and sunroof,if equipped, will continue to work forup to 10 minutes or until any door isopened.

The infotainment system will continueto work for 10 minutes, until thedriver door is opened, or until theignition is turned on or placed inACC/ACCESSORY.

Shifting Into Park

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle will

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

not move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If the vehicle has afour-wheel-drive transfer case withan N (Neutral) position, and thetransfer case is in N (Neutral), thevehicle will be free to roll, even ifthe shift lever is in P (Park). Be surethe transfer case is in a drive gear.If towing a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips0 256.

1. Hold the brake pedal down,then set the parking brake.See Parking Brake 0 219 orElectric Parking Brake 0 220.

2. Move the shift lever into theP (Park) position by pulling theshift lever toward you andmoving it up as far as it will go.

3. Be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear – not in N (Neutral).

4. Turn the ignition off.

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenly ifthe shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set.

If you have four-wheel drive andthe transfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle will be free to roll, evenif the shift lever is in P (Park). So besure the transfer case is in a drivegear – not in N (Neutral).

And, if you leave the vehicle withthe engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do notleave the vehicle with the enginerunning unless you have to.



If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and the parkingbrake is firmly set before you leave it.After you move the shift lever intoP (Park), hold the regular brake pedaldown. Then, see if you can move theshift lever away from P (Park) withoutfirst pulling it toward you. If you can,it means that the shift lever was notfully locked into P (Park).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and you donot shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in the transmission.You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of P (Park). This iscalled torque lock. To prevent torquelock, set the parking brake and thenshift into P (Park) properly before youleave the driver seat.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawl inthe transmission. You will then beable to pull the shift lever out ofP (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release system isdesigned to prevent movement of theshift lever out of P (Park), unless theignition is on and the brake pedal isapplied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 345.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, push the shift lever all theway into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, then have the vehicleserviced soon.



Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under the vehicleand ignite. Do not park over papers,leaves, dry grass, or other thingsthat can burn.

Active Fuel ManagementThis system allows the engine tooperate on either all or half of itscylinders, depending on the drivingconditions.

When less power is required, such ascruising at a constant vehicle speed,the system will operate in the halfcylinder mode, allowing the vehicle toachieve better fuel economy. Whengreater power demands are required,such as accelerating from a stop,passing, or merging onto a freeway,the system will maintain full-cylinderoperation.

Extended ParkingIt is best not to park with the vehiclerunning. If the vehicle is left running,be sure it will not move and there isadequate ventilation.

See Shifting Into Park 0 207 and EngineExhaust 0 209.

If the vehicle is left parked andrunning with the RKE transmitteroutside the vehicle, it will continue torun for up to half an hour.

If the vehicle is left parked andrunning with the RKE transmitterinside the vehicle, it will continue torun for up to an hour.

The vehicle could turn off sooner if itis parked on a hill, due to lack ofavailable fuel.

The timer will reset if the vehicle istaken out of P (Park) while it isrunning.

Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO), which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

. The vehicle idles in areas withpoor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells or soundsstrange or different.

. The exhaust system leaks dueto corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected or ifit is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with thewindows completely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosed areasuch as a garage or a building thathas no fresh air ventilation.

Running the Vehicle WhileParkedIt is better not to park with the enginerunning.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park 0 207 and EngineExhaust 0 209.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 256.

Automatic TransmissionIf equipped, there is an electronic shiftlever position indicator within theinstrument cluster. This display comeson when the ignition is on or inservice mode.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode 0 213.

P : This position locks the drivewheels. Use P (Park) when starting theengine because the vehicle cannotmove easily. When parked on a hill,especially when the vehicle has aheavy load, you might notice anincrease in the effort to shift out ofP (Park). See “Torque Lock” underShifting Into Park 0 207.



{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others couldbe injured. To be sure the vehiclewill not move, even when you areon fairly level ground, always setthe parking brake and move theshift lever to P (Park). See ShiftingInto Park 0 207 and DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips0 256.

{ Warning

If you have four-wheel drive, thevehicle will be free to roll — even ifthe shift lever is in P (Park) — if thetransfer case is in N (Neutral). So,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear, Two-Wheel Drive Highor Four-Wheel Drive High orFour-Wheel Drive Low — not inN (Neutral). See Shifting Into Park0 207.

R : Use this gear to back up.

Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicle isstopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see If theVehicle Is Stuck 0 197.

N : In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. Torestart the engine when the vehicle isalready moving, use N (Neutral) only.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift intoa drive gear while the engine isrunning at high speed.

Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the engine runningat high speed may damage thetransmission. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.Be sure the engine is not running athigh speed when shifting thevehicle.



Caution

A transmission hot message maydisplay if the automatictransmission fluid is too hot.Driving under this condition candamage the vehicle. Stop and idlethe engine to cool the automatictransmission fluid. This messageclears when the transmission fluidhas cooled sufficiently.

D : This position is for normal driving.If more power is needed for passing,press the accelerator pedal down.

Use D (Drive) and Tow/Haul Modewhen towing a trailer, carrying aheavy load, driving on steep hills,or driving off-road. Shift thetransmission to a lower gear selectionif the transmission shifts too often.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” under Lossof Control 0 190.

The vehicle has a shift stabilizationfeature that adjusts the transmissionshifting to the current drivingconditions in order to reduce rapidupshifts and downshifts. This shiftstabilization feature is designed todetermine, before making an upshift,if the engine is able to maintainvehicle speed by analyzing things suchas vehicle speed, throttle position, andvehicle load. If the shift stabilizationfeature determines that a currentvehicle speed cannot be maintained,the transmission does not upshift andinstead holds the current gear.In some cases, this could appear to bea delayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

The transmission uses adaptive shiftcontrols. The adaptive shift controlprocess continually compares key shiftparameters to pre-programmed idealshifts stored in the transmission’scomputer. The transmissionconstantly makes adjustments toimprove vehicle performanceaccording to how the vehicle is beingused, such as with a heavy load orwhen the temperature changes.During this adaptive shift control

process, shifting might feel differentas the transmission determines thebest settings.

When temperatures are very cold, thetransmission's gear shifting could bedelayed providing more stable shiftsuntil the engine warms up. Shiftscould be more noticeable with a coldtransmission. This difference inshifting is normal.

L : This position allows selection of arange of gears appropriate for currentdriving conditions. If equipped, see“Range Selection Mode” under ManualMode 0 213.

Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill usingonly the accelerator pedal maydamage the transmission. Therepair will not be covered by thevehicle warranty. If the vehicle isstuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes tohold the vehicle in place.



Normal Mode Grade Braking

This mode is enabled when thevehicle is started, but is not enabledin Range Selection Mode. It assists inmaintaining desired vehicle speedswhen driving on downhill grades byusing the engine and transmission toslow the vehicle. The first time thesystem engages for each ignitioncycle, a DIC message will be displayed.

To disable or enable Normal ModeGrade Braking within the currentignition cycle, press and hold theTow/Haul button for five seconds.When the button is released, therequested mode change is made.A DIC message displays.

For other forms of grade braking, seeTow/Haul Mode 0 214 and CruiseControl 0 226.

Kickdown Mode

The accelerator pedal provides anadditional downshift after pressingthrough the kickdown feature.

It requires extra pedal pressure nearthe end of its travel to engage.

Manual Mode

Range Selection Mode

If equipped, Range Selection Modehelps control the vehicle'stransmission and vehicle speed whiledriving downhill or towing a trailer byletting you select a desired range ofgears.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toL (Manual Mode).

2. Press the plus/minus buttons onthe shift lever to select thedesired range of gears for currentdriving conditions. Or, hold theplus/minus buttons to select thehighest or lowest range availablefor the current vehicle speed.

When the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to L (Manual Mode), anumber displays next to the L,indicating the current transmissionrange.

This number is the highest gear thatthe transmission will command whileoperating in L (Manual Mode). Allgears below that number are available.As driving conditions change, thetransmission can automatically shiftto lower gears. For example, when5 (Fifth) is selected, 1 (First) through5 (Fifth) gears are automaticallyshifted by the transmission, but6 (Sixth) cannot be used until theplus/minus button on the shift lever isused to change to the range.

When the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to L (Manual Mode), adownshift may occur. The gear thatthe transmission is operating in whenthe shift lever is moved from D (Drive)to L (Manual Mode) determines if adownshift occurs. See the followingchart.



Gear before shifting from D (Drive) toL (Manual Mode)

10th 9th 8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st

Range after shifting from D (Drive) to L (ManualMode) - Tow/Haul not engaged

L7 L7 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L3 L2 L1

Range after shifting from D (Drive) to L (ManualMode) - Tow/Haul engaged

L7 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L3 L3 L2 L1

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active. SeeTow/Haul Mode 0 214.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/Haul Modecan be used.

Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill usingonly the accelerator pedal maydamage the transmission. Therepair will not be covered by thevehicle warranty. If the vehicle isstuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes tohold the vehicle in place.

Tow/Haul Mode

The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts thetransmission shift pattern to reduceshift cycling. This provides increased

performance, vehicle control, andenhanced transmission and enginecooling when driving down steep hillsor mountain grades, towing,or hauling heavy loads.

Turn the Tow/Haul Mode on and offby pressing the button. When theTow/Haul Mode is enabled, a light onthe instrument cluster will come on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light 0 144 andHill and Mountain Roads 0 195.

Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” underDriver Mode Control 0 224.



Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking is onlyenabled while the Tow/Haul Mode isselected and the vehicle is not in theRange Selection Mode. See “Tow/HaulMode” listed previously and ManualMode 0 213. Tow/Haul Mode GradeBraking assists in maintaining desiredvehicle speeds when driving ondownhill grades by using the engineand transmission to slow the vehicle.

To disable or enable Tow/Haul GradeBraking within the current ignitioncycle, press and hold the Tow/Haulbutton for five seconds. When thebutton is released, the requested modechange is made. A DIC message isdisplayed.

See Towing Equipment 0 266.

For other forms of grade braking, seeAutomatic Transmission 0 210 andCruise Control 0 226.

Drive Systems

Four-Wheel DriveIf equipped, four-wheel drive engagesthe front axle for extra traction.

Caution

Do not drive on clean, dry

pavement in 4 m and 4 n (ifequipped) for an extended period oftime. These conditions may causepremature wear on the vehicle’spowertrain.

Driving on clean, dry pavement in 4 mor 4 n may:

. Cause a vibration to be felt in thesteering system.

. Cause tires to wear faster.

. Make the transfer case harder toshift, and cause it to run noisier.

{ Warning

If equipped with four-wheel drive,the vehicle will be free to roll if thetransfer case is in N (Neutral), evenwhen the shift lever is in P (Park).Be sure the transfer case is in a

drive gear — 2 m, 4 m, or 4 n — notin N (Neutral). See Shifting Into Park0 207.

Caution

Extended high-speed operation in

4 n may damage or shorten the lifeof the drivetrain.

Engagement noise and bump whenshifting between 4 n and 4 m or fromN (Neutral), with the engine running,is normal.

Shifting into 4 n will turn TractionControl and StabiliTrak/ESC off. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 222.



Automatic Transfer Case

If equipped, use the transfer case knobnext to the steering wheel to shift intoand out of four-wheel drive.

All of the lights will flash on then offmomentarily when the ignition isturned on. The light that remains onwill indicate the state of thetransfer case.

If the indicator mark on the knobbelow does not match up with thelight, then most likely the knob belowwas moved when the ignition was off.

The indicator mark on the knob belowmust line up with the indicator lightbefore a shift can be commanded. Tocommand a shift, rotate the transfercase knob below to the new desiredposition. The light will flash meaningthat the shift is in progress. When theshift is completed the new positionwill be illuminated. If the transfer casecannot complete a shift command, itwill go back to its last chosen setting.

The settings are:

N (Neutral) : Use only when thevehicle needs to be towed. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing 0 349 orTowing the Vehicle 0 348.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Use fordriving on most streets and highways.The front axle is not engaged. Thissetting provides the best fueleconomy.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive) : Use when road surfacetraction conditions are variable. Whendriving in AUTO, the front axle isengaged, and the vehicle's power issent to the front and rear wheels

automatically based on drivingconditions. This setting providesslightly lower fuel economy than 2 m.Do not use AUTO mode to park on asteep grade with poor traction such asice, snow, mud, or gravel. In AUTOmode only the rear wheels will holdthe vehicle from sliding when parked.If parking on a steep grade, use 4 m tokeep all four wheels engaged.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Usethis position when extra traction isneeded, such as when driving onsnowy or icy roads, when off-roading,or when plowing snow.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low) : Thissetting engages the front axle anddelivers extra torque. Choose 4 n whendriving off-road in deep sand, deepmud, or deep snow, and whileclimbing or descending steep hills.

Shifting into 4 n will turn TractionControl and StabiliTrak/ESC off. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 222.



Shifting Into 4 m or AUTO

Turn the knob to the 4 m or AUTOposition at any speed, except from 4 n.The indicator light will flash whileshifting and will remain on when theshift is completed.

Shifting Into 2 m

Turn the knob to 2 m at any speed,

except when shifting from 4 n. Theindicator light will flash while shiftingand will remain on when the shift iscompleted.

Shifting Into 4 n

When 4 n is engaged, keep vehiclespeed below 72 km/h (45 mph).

To shift:

1. The ignition must be on and thevehicle must be stopped ormoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph)with the transmission inN (Neutral). It is best for thevehicle to be moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).

2. Turn the knob to 4 n. Wait for

the 4 n indicator light to stopflashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

Caution

Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the requested mode indicatorlight has stopped flashing coulddamage the transfer case.

If the transmission is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph), the4 n indicator light will flash for30 seconds and the shift will not becompleted. After 30 seconds thetransfer case will shift to 4 m. Turn the

knob to 4 m to display the indicator.With the vehicle moving less than5 km/h (3 mph), and the transmissionin N (Neutral), attempt the shift again.

Shifting Out of 4 nTo shift:

1. The vehicle must be stopped ormoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph)with the transmission inN (Neutral) and the ignition on.It is best for the vehicle to bemoving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h(1 to 2 mph).

2. Turn the knob to 4 m, AUTO,or 2 m. Wait for the 4 m, AUTO,or 2 m indicator light to stopflashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

Caution

Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the requested mode indicatorlight has stopped flashing coulddamage the transfer case.



If the transmission is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph), the4 m, AUTO, or 2 m indicator light willflash for 30 seconds but the shift willnot be completed. With the vehiclemoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph), andthe transmission in N (Neutral),attempt the shift again.

Shifting Into N (Neutral)

To shift into N (Neutral):

1. Park the vehicle on a levelsurface.

2. Set the parking brake and pressand hold the brake pedal.See Parking Brake 0 219 orElectric Parking Brake 0 220.

3. Start the vehicle or turn theignition on.

4. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

5. Shift the transfer case to 2 m.

6. Turn the transfer case knobclockwise to N (Neutral) until itstops and hold it there until theN (Neutral) light starts to flash.This will take at least 10 seconds.Then slowly release the knob tothe 4 n position. The N (Neutral)light will come on when thetransfer case shift to N (Neutral)is complete.

7. With the engine running, verifythat the transfer case is inN (Neutral) by shifting thetransmission to R (Reverse), thenshift the transmission toD (Drive). There should be nomovement of the vehicle whileshifting the transmission.

8. Turn the engine off, and theignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

9. Place the transmission shift leverin P (Park). See RecreationalVehicle Towing 0 349.


Shifting Out of N (Neutral)

To shift out of N (Neutral):

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Press and hold ENGINE START/STOP for five seconds with yourfoot off the brake to place thevehicle in Service Mode.

3. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

4. Turn the transfer case knob tothe desired setting.

After the transfer case hasshifted out of N (Neutral), theN (Neutral) light will go out.

5. Release the parking brake.

6. Start the engine and shift thetransmission to the desired gear.



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has an Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronicbraking system that helps prevent abraking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself. A momentarymotor or clicking noise may be heardwhile this test is going on, and it mayeven be noticed that the brake pedalmoves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Light0 143.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking to avoida sudden obstacle, a computer sensesthe wheels are slowing down. If one ofthe wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure toeach wheel, as required, faster thanany driver could. This can help yousteer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updates onwheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not change thetime needed to get a foot up to thebrake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get too closeto the vehicle in front of you, therewill not be enough time to apply thebrakes if that vehicle suddenly slowsor stops. Always leave enough roomup ahead to stop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just hold thebrake pedal down firmly and let ABSwork. You may hear the ABS pump ormotor operating and feel the brakepedal pulsate. This is normal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brake atthe same time. In many emergencies,steering can help more than even thevery best braking.

Parking Brake



Set the parking brake by holding theregular brake pedal down, thenpushing down the parking brakepedal.

If the ignition is on, the brake systemwarning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light 0 142.

Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system andcause premature wear or damage tobrake system parts. Make sure thatthe parking brake is fully releasedand the brake warning light is offbefore driving.

To release the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down, then pushdown momentarily on the parkingbrake pedal until you feel the pedalrelease. Slowly pull your foot up offthe parking brake pedal. If the parkingbrake is not released when you beginto drive, a DIC message will appearand a chime will sound warning youthat the parking brake is still on.

Electric Parking Brake

This vehicle may have an ElectricParking Brake (EPB). The EPB canalways be activated, even if theignition is off. To prevent draining thebattery, avoid repeated cycles of theEPB system when the engine is notrunning.

The system has aY or PARKElectric Parking Brake light, anda 8 Service Parking Brake light.See Electric Parking Brake Light 0 143and Service Electric Parking Brake Light0 143.

Before leaving the vehicle, check fortheY or PARK light to ensure thatthe parking brake is applied.

EPB Apply

To apply the EPB:

1. Be sure the vehicle is at acomplete stop.

2. Lift up the EPB switchmomentarily.

TheY or PARK light will flash andthen stay on once the EPB is fullyapplied. If theY or PARK lightflashes continuously, then the EPB isonly partially applied or there is aproblem with the EPB. A DIC messagewill display. Release the EPB and tryto apply it again. If the light does notcome on, or keeps flashing, have thevehicle serviced. Do not drive thevehicle if theY or PARK light isflashing. See your dealer. See ElectricParking Brake Light 0 143.



If the 8 light is on, press the EPBswitch and hold it. Continue to holdthe switch until theY or PARK light

remains on. If the 8 light remains on,see your dealer.

If the EPB is applied while the vehicleis moving, the vehicle will decelerateas long as the switch is pressed. If theswitch is pressed until the vehiclecomes to a stop, the EPB will remainapplied.

The vehicle may automatically applythe EPB in some situations when thevehicle is not moving. This is normal,and is done to periodically check thecorrect operation of the EPB system.

If the EPB fails to apply, block the rearwheels to prevent vehicle movement.

EPB Release

To release the EPB:


2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Press the EPB switchmomentarily.

The EPB is released when theY orPARK light is off.

If the 8 light is on, release the EPB bypressing and holding the EPB switch.Continue to hold the switch untiltheY or PARK light is off. If eitherlight stays on after release isattempted, see your dealer.

Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system andcause premature wear or damage tobrake system parts. Make sure thatthe parking brake is fully releasedand the brake warning light is offbefore driving.

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically release ifthe vehicle is running, placed intogear, and an attempt is made to driveaway. Avoid rapid acceleration whenthe EPB is applied, to preserve parkingbrake lining life.

Brake AssistThe Brake Assist feature is designed toassist the driver in stopping ordecreasing vehicle speed in emergencydriving conditions. This feature usesthe stability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system under conditionswhere the driver has quickly andforcefully applied the brake pedal inan attempt to quickly stop or slowdown the vehicle. The stability systemhydraulic brake control moduleincreases brake pressure at eachcorner of the vehicle until the ABSactivates. Minor brake pedal pulsationor pedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver should continueto apply the brake pedal as the drivingsituation dictates. The Brake Assistfeature will automatically disengagewhen the brake pedal is released orbrake pedal pressure is quicklydecreased.



Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature, which may be usefulwhen the vehicle is stopped on agrade sufficient enough to activateHSA. This feature is designed toprevent the vehicle from rolling, eitherforward or rearward, during vehicledrive off. After the driver completelystops and holds the vehicle in acomplete standstill on a grade, HSAwill be automatically activated. Duringthe transition period between whenthe driver releases the brake pedal andstarts to accelerate to drive off on agrade, HSA holds the braking pressurefor a maximum of two seconds toensure that there is no rolling. Thebrakes will automatically release whenthe accelerator pedal is applied withinthe two-second window. It will notactivate if the vehicle is in a drive gearand facing downhill, or if the vehicleis facing uphill and in R (Reverse).

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, anelectronic stability control system.These systems help limit wheel spinand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses any of thedrive wheels are spinning or beginningto lose traction. When this happens,TCS applies the brakes to the spinningwheels and reduces engine power tolimit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak activates when the vehiclesenses a difference between theintended path and the direction thevehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak selectively applies brakingpressure to any one of the vehiclewheel brakes to assist the driver inkeeping the vehicle on the intendedpath. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is

also on automatically when thevehicle is started. See Trailer SwayControl (TSC) 0 274.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak beginsto limit wheel spin, cruise control willdisengage. Cruise control may beturned back on when road conditionsallow.

Both systems come on automaticallywhen the vehicle is started and beginsto move. The systems may be heard orfelt while they are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. This isnormal and does not mean there is aproblem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessary toturn TCS off if the vehicle gets stuckin sand, mud, ice, or snow. See If theVehicle Is Stuck 0 197 and “Turningthe Systems Off and On” later in thissection.

When the transfer case (if equipped)is in Four-Wheel Drive Low, thestability system is automaticallydisabled, g comes on, and the



appropriate message will appear onthe DIC. Both traction control andStabiliTrak are automatically disabledin this condition.

The indicator light for both systems isin the instrument cluster. Thislight will:

. Flash when TCS is limitingwheel spin

. Flash when StabiliTrak is activated

. Turn on and stay on when eithersystem is not working

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC), andd comes on and stays on to indicatethat the system is inactive and is notassisting the driver in maintainingcontrol. The vehicle is safe to drive,but driving should be adjustedaccordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

Drive the vehicle. If d comes on andstays on, the vehicle may need moretime to diagnose the problem. If thecondition persists, see your dealer.

Turning the Systems Off and On

The button for TCS and StabiliTrak ison the center stack.

Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS is off.The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off only TCS, press andrelease g. The traction off light idisplays in the instrument cluster. Theappropriate message will display inthe DIC. To turn TCS on again, pressand release g. The traction off lighti displayed in the instrument clusterwill turn off.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin when gis pressed, the system will not turn offuntil the wheels stop spinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold g until the traction

off light i and the StabiliTrak OFF

light g come on and stay on in theinstrument cluster, then release. Theappropriate message will display inthe DIC.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak on again,press and release g. The traction

off light i and the StabiliTrak OFF

light g in the instrument clusterturn off.



StabiliTrak will automatically turn onif the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h(35 mph). Traction control willremain off.

The vehicle has a Trailer Sway Control(TSC) feature and a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature. See Trailer Sway Control(TSC) 0 274 or Hill Start Assist (HSA)0 222.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. See Accessoriesand Modifications 0 279.

Driver Mode ControlDriver Mode Control attempts to adda sportier feel, provide a morecomfortable ride, or assist in differentweather conditions or terrain. Thissystem simultaneously changes thesoftware settings of varioussub-systems. Depending on the optionpackage, available features, and modeselected, the suspension, steering, andpowertrain will change settings toachieve the desired modecharacteristics. If the vehicle isequipped with Magnetic Ride Control,selecting the various Driver Modes

adjusts the ride of the vehicle toenhance the ride performance for theroad conditions and theselected mode.

The Driver Mode Control has fourmodes: Tour, Sport, Snow/Ice, andTow/Haul.

Press the Tow/Haul button to activateand deactivate the Tow/Haul Mode.

Press the MODE switch on the centerconsole to select Tour, Sport, or Snow/Ice. Pressing the switch will display agraphic of all available ride modes andchange to the next mode. The Tourand Sport Modes will feel similar on asmooth road. Select a new settingwhenever driving conditions change.

Tour Mode

Use for normal city and highwaydriving to provide a smooth, soft ride.

When selected, there will be noindication in the DIC.

Sport Mode

Use where road conditions or personalpreference demand a more controlledresponse.

The steering will change to providemore precise control. The MagneticRide Control will change to providebetter cornering performance.

When selected, the Sport Modeindicator will display in the DIC.

Snow/Ice Mode

Use when more traction is neededduring slippery conditions.

The vehicle will upshift normallywhen the vehicle is moving. Theacceleration will adjust to help providea smoother launch.

When selected, the Snow/Ice Modeindicator will display in the DIC.

Tow/Haul Mode

Tow/Haul is a feature that assistswhen pulling a heavy trailer or a largeor heavy load. See Tow/Haul Mode0 214.

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle and trailercombined weight is at least 75 percentof the vehicle’s Gross Combined



Weight Rating (GCWR). See “Weightof the Trailer” under Trailer Towing0 261.

Tow/Haul is most useful under thefollowing conditions:

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load through rollingterrain

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in stop-and-gotraffic

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in busyparking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle isdesired

Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with no trailerat all will not cause damage. However,there is no benefit to the selection ofTow/Haul when the vehicle isunloaded. Such a selection whenunloaded may result in unpleasantengine and transmission drivingcharacteristics and reduced fueleconomy. Tow/Haul is recommendedonly when pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load.

When selected, the Tow/Haulindicator will display in theinstrument cluster.

Magnetic Ride ControlThe Magnetic Ride Control monitorsthe suspension system.

Based on road conditions, steeringwheel angle, and vehicle speed, thesystem automatically adjusts toprovide the best handling whileproviding a smooth ride. The Tour andSport Modes will feel similar on asmooth road.

Tour : Use for normal city andhighway driving. This setting providesa smooth, soft ride.

8 Sport : Use where road conditionsor personal preference demand morecontrol. This setting provides more“feel,” or response to road conditions.

6 Snow/Ice : Use when moretraction is needed during slipperyconditions.

The vehicle is normally in Tour Mode.Sport Mode and Snow/Ice Mode areengaged when the Magnetic RideControl MODE button on the centerstack is pressed. Press the button toselect the desired mode.

The Driver Information Center (DIC)briefly displays the appropriatemessage on vehicle startup or when anew mode is selected.



Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a locking rear axle cangive more traction on snow, mud, ice,sand, or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, butwhen traction is low, this feature willallow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.

Automatic Level ControlThe automatic level control rearsuspension comes as a part of theMagnetic Ride Control system.

This type of level control is fullyautomatic and will provide a betterleveled riding position as well asbetter handling under a variety ofpassenger and loading conditions. An

air compressor connected to the rearshocks will raise or lower the rear ofthe vehicle to maintain proper vehicleheight. The system is activated whenthe ignition is on and willautomatically adjust vehicle heightthereafter. The system may exhaust(lower vehicle height) for up to10 minutes after the ignition has beenturned off. You may hear the aircompressor operating when the heightis being adjusted.

If a weight-distributing hitch is beingused, it is recommended to allow theshocks to inflate, leveling the vehicleprior to adjusting the hitch.

Cruise Control

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely at asteady speed. Do not use cruisecontrol on winding roads or inheavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you couldlose control. Do not use cruisecontrol on slippery roads.

If equipped with cruise control, aspeed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) ormore can be maintained withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator.Cruise control does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).



If the Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control system begins tolimit wheel spin while using cruisecontrol, the cruise controlautomatically disengages. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 222. If a collision alert occurs whencruise control is activated, cruisecontrol is disengaged. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System 0 244.When road conditions allow you tosafely use it again, the cruise controlcan be turned back on.

If the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol disengages.

J : Press to turn the system on andoff. A white indicator appears in theinstrument cluster when cruise isturned on.

+RES : If there is a set speed inmemory, press the control up brieflyto resume that speed or press andhold to accelerate. If the cruise controlis already active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET− : Press the control down brieflyto set the speed and activate cruisecontrol. If the cruise control is alreadyactive, use to decrease vehicle speed.

* : Press to disengage cruise controlwithout erasing the set speed frommemory.

Setting Cruise Control

If J is on when not in use, SET− or+RES could get pressed and go intocruise when not desired. Keep J offwhen cruise is not being used.

To set cruise control:

1. Press J.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET−.

4. Remove your foot from theaccelerator.

When the cruise control has been setto the desired speed, a green cruisecontrol indicator appears on theinstrument cluster and a cruise setspeed message appears on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) andHead-Up Display (HUD), if equipped.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at a desiredspeed and then the brakes are appliedor* is pressed, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, press +RESup briefly. The vehicle returns to theprevious set speed.



Increasing Speed While CruiseControl is at a Set Speed

If the cruise control system is alreadyactivated:

. Press and hold +RES up until thevehicle accelerates to the desiredspeed, then release it.

. To increase vehicle speed in smallincrements, press +RES up briefly.For each press, the vehicle goesabout 1 km/h (1 mph) faster.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster 0 134.The increment value used depends onthe units displayed.

Reducing Speed While CruiseControl is at a Set Speed

If the cruise control system is alreadyactivated:

. Press and hold SET− down untilthe desired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmall increments, press SET−down briefly. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1 km/h (1 mph)slower.


Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal to increasethe vehicle speed. When you take yourfoot off the pedal, the vehicle will slowdown to the previous set cruise speed.

While pressing the accelerator pedalor shortly following the release tooverride cruise, briefly applying theSET− control will result in cruise setto the current vehicle speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control works onhills depends on the vehicle speed, theload, and the steepness of the hills.When going up steep hills, pressingthe accelerator pedal may be

necessary to maintain vehicle speed.When going downhill, Cruise GradeBraking helps maintain the driverselected speed.

Cruise Grade Braking is enabled whenthe vehicle is started and cruisecontrol is active. It is not enabled inRange Selection Mode. It assists inmaintaining driver selected speedwhen driving on downhill grades byusing the engine and transmission toslow the vehicle.

To disable and enable Cruise GradeBraking for the current ignition cycle,press and hold the Tow/Haul buttonfor five seconds. A Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message displays.

For other forms of Grade Braking, seeAutomatic Transmission 0 210 andTow/Haul Mode 0 214.

Ending Cruise Control

There are four ways to end cruisecontrol:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.


DRIVING AND OPERATING 229. Shift the transmission to

N (Neutral).

. To turn off cruise control,press J.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed is erasedfrom memory if J is pressed or ifthe ignition is turned off.

Adaptive Cruise ControlIf equipped with Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC), it allows for selectingthe cruise control set speed andfollowing gap. Read this entire sectionbefore using this system. ACC uses acamera and radar sensors to detectother vehicles. See Radio FrequencyStatement 0 388. The following gap isthe following time (or distance)between your vehicle and a vehicledetected directly ahead in your path,moving in the same direction. If novehicle is detected in your path, ACCworks like regular cruise control.

If a vehicle is detected in your path,ACC can speed up the vehicle or applylimited, moderate braking to maintain

the selected following gap. Todisengage ACC, apply the brake. If theTraction Control System (TCS) orelectronic stability control systemactivates while ACC is engaged, ACCmay automatically disengage. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 222. When road conditionsallow ACC to be safely used, the ACCcan be turned back on.

ACC will not engage if the TCS orStabiliTrak electronic stability controlsystem is disabled.

{ Warning

ACC has limited braking ability andmay not have time to slow thevehicle down enough to avoid acollision with another vehicle youare following. This can occur whenvehicles suddenly slow or stopahead, or enter your lane. Also see“Alerting the Driver” in this section.Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving and you

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

should be ready to take action andapply the brakes. See DefensiveDriving 0 188.

{ Warning

ACC will not detect or brake forchildren, pedestrians, animals,or other objects.

Do not use ACC when:

. On winding and hilly roads orwhen the sensors are blockedby snow, ice, or dirt. Thesystem may not detect avehicle ahead. Keep the entirefront of the vehicle clean.

. Visibility is low, such as infog, rain, or snow conditions.ACC performance is limitedunder these conditions.

. On slippery roads where fastchanges in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip.



J : Press to turn the system on oroff. The indicator turns white on theinstrument cluster when ACC isturned on.

+RES : Press the control up briefly toresume the previous set speed or holdupwards to accelerate. If ACC isalready engaged, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET– : Press the control down brieflyto set the speed and activate ACC.If ACC is already engaged, use todecrease vehicle speed.

* : Press to disengage ACC withouterasing the selected set speed.

[ : Press to select a following gaptime (or distance) setting for ACC ofFar, Medium, or Near.


Switching Between ACC andRegular Cruise Control

If equipped, to switch between ACCand regular cruise control, press andhold*. A Driver Information Center(DIC) message displays. See VehicleMessages 0 154.

ACC Indicator Regular CruiseControl Indicator

When ACC is engaged, a green\indicator will be lit on the instrumentcluster and the following gap will bedisplayed. When the regular cruise

control is engaged, a green Jindicator will be lit on the instrumentcluster; the following gap will notdisplay.

When the vehicle is turned on, thecruise control mode will be set to thelast mode used before the vehicle wasturned off.

{ Warning

Always check the cruise controlindicator on the instrument clusterto determine which mode cruisecontrol is in before using thefeature. If ACC is not active, thevehicle will not automatically brakefor other vehicles, which couldcause a crash if the brakes are notapplied manually. You and otherscould be seriously injured or killed.

Setting Adaptive Cruise Control

If J is on when not in use, it couldget pressed and go into ACC when notdesired. Keep J off when cruise isnot being used.



Select the set speed desired for ACC.This is the vehicle speed when novehicle is detected in its path.

While the vehicle is moving, ACC willnot set at a speed less than 25 km/h(15 mph), although it can be resumedwhen driving at lower speeds.

To set ACC while moving:

1. Press J.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET–.

4. Remove your foot from theaccelerator.

After ACC is set, it may immediatelyapply the brakes if a vehicle ahead isdetected closer than the selectedfollowing gap.

ACC can also be set while the vehicleis stopped if ACC is on and the brakepedal is applied.

The ACC indicator displays on theinstrument cluster and Head-UpDisplay (HUD). When ACC is active,the indicator will be lit green.

Be mindful of speed limits,surrounding traffic speeds, andweather conditions when selecting theset speed.

Resuming a Set Speed

If ACC is set at a desired speed andthen the brakes are applied, ACC isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

To begin using ACC again, press RES+up briefly.

. If the vehicle is moving, it returnsto the previous set speed.

. If the vehicle is stopped with thebrake pedal applied, press RES+and release the brake pedal. ACCwill hold the vehicle until RES+ orthe accelerator pedal is pressed.

A green ACC indicator and the setspeed display on the instrumentcluster. The vehicle ahead indicatormay be flashing if a vehicle ahead waspresent and moved. See “Approachingand Following a Vehicle” later in thissection.

Once ACC has resumed, if there is novehicle ahead, if the vehicle ahead isbeyond the selected following gap,or if the vehicle has exited a sharpcurve, then the vehicle speed willincrease to the set speed.

Increasing Speed While ACC is at aSet Speed

Do one of the following:

. Use the accelerator to get to thehigher speed. Press SET– down.Release the control and theaccelerator pedal. The vehicle willnow cruise at the higher speed.



When the accelerator pedal ispressed, ACC will not brakebecause it is overridden. The ACCindicator will turn blue on theinstrument cluster.

. Press and hold +RES up until thedesired set speed appears on thedisplay, then release it.

. To increase speed in smallincrements, briefly press +RES up.For each press, the vehicle speedincreases by 1 km/h (1 mph).

. To increase speed in largerincrements, press and briefly hold+RES up. For each press, thevehicle speed increases by5 km/h (5 mph).

When it is determined there is novehicle ahead or the vehicle ahead isbeyond the selected following gap, thevehicle speed will increase to the setspeed.

The set speed can also be increasedwhile the vehicle is stopped.

. If stopped with the brake applied,press RES+ until the desired setspeed is displayed.

. If ACC is holding the vehicle at astop and there is another vehicledirectly ahead, pressing RES+ willincrease the set speed. PressingRES+ when there is no longer avehicle ahead will cause ACC toresume.

Reducing Speed While ACC is at aSet Speed

Do one of the following:

. Use the brake to get to the desiredlower speed. Release the brake andpress SET– . The vehicle will nowcruise at the lower speed.

. Press and hold SET– down untilthe desired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To decrease speed in smallerincrements, briefly press SET−down. For each press, the vehiclespeed increases by 1 km/h (1 mph).

. To decrease speed in largerincrements, press and briefly holdSET− down. For each press, thevehicle speed decreases by5 km/h (5 mph).

. To decrease speed while thevehicle is stopped, press SET−until the desired set speed isdisplayed.

Selecting the Follow Distance Gap

When a slower moving vehicle isdetected ahead within the selectedfollowing gap, ACC will adjust thevehicle's speed and attempt tomaintain the follow distance gapselected.

Press[ on the steering wheel toadjust the following gap. Each presscycles the gap button through threesettings: Far, Medium, or Near.

When pressed, the current gap settingdisplays briefly on the DIC and HUD.The gap setting will be maintaineduntil it is changed.

Since each gap setting corresponds toa following time (Far, Medium,or Near), the following distance willvary based on vehicle speed. Thefaster the vehicle speed, the furtherback your vehicle will follow a vehicledetected ahead. Consider traffic andweather conditions when selecting the



following gap. The range of selectablegaps may not be appropriate for alldrivers and driving conditions.

Changing the gap settingautomatically changes the alert timingsensitivity (Far, Medium, or Near) forthe Forward Collision Alert (FCA)feature. See Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System 0 244.

Alerting the Driver

If ACC is engaged, driver action maybe required when ACC cannot applysufficient braking when approaching avehicle too rapidly.

When this condition occurs, thecollision alert symbol on the HUD willflash on the windshield. Either eightbeeps will sound from the front,or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat

will pulse five times. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 155.

See Defensive Driving 0 188.

Approaching and Following aVehicle

The vehicle ahead indicator is in theinstrument cluster and HUD display.

This indicator only displays when avehicle is detected in your vehicle’spath moving in the same direction.

If this indicator is not displaying, ACCwill not respond to or brake tovehicles ahead.

ACC automatically slows the vehicledown and adjusts vehicle speed tofollow the vehicle in front at theselected following gap. The vehiclespeed increases or decreases to followthe vehicle in front of you, but will

not exceed the set speed. It may applylimited braking, if necessary. Whenbraking is active, the brake lights willcome on. The automatic braking mayfeel or sound different than if thebrakes were applied manually. This isnormal.

Stationary or Very Slow-MovingObjects

{ Warning

ACC may not detect and react tostopped or slow-moving vehiclesahead of you. For example, thesystem may not brake for a vehicleit has never detected moving. Thiscan occur in stop-and-go traffic orwhen a vehicle suddenly appearsdue to a vehicle ahead changinglanes. Your vehicle may not stopand could cause a crash. Usecaution when using ACC. Yourcomplete attention is alwaysrequired while driving and youshould be ready to take action andapply the brakes.



ACC Automatically Disengages

ACC may automatically disengage andthe driver will need to manually applythe brakes to slow the vehicle if:

. The sensors are blocked.

. The Traction Control System (TCS)or electronic stability controlsystem has activated or beendisabled.

. There is a fault in the system.

. The radar falsely reports blockagewhen driving in a desert or remotearea with no other vehicles orroadside objects. A DIC messagemay display to indicate that ACCis temporarily unavailable.

The ACC active indicator will turnwhite when ACC is no longer active.

In some cases, when ACC will notactivate, regular Cruise Control maybe used. See “Switching Between ACCand Regular Cruise Control” previouslyin this section. Always considerdriving conditions before using eithercruise control system.

Notification to Resume ACC

ACC will maintain a following gapbehind a detected vehicle and slowyour vehicle to a stop behind thedetected vehicle.

If the stopped vehicle ahead hasdriven away and ACC has notresumed, the vehicle ahead indicatorwill flash as a reminder to checktraffic ahead before proceeding. Inaddition, the left and right sides of theSafety Alert Seat will pulse threetimes, or three beeps will sound. See”Alert Type” and “Adaptive Cruise GoNotifier” in “Collision/DetectionSystems” under Vehicle Personalization0 155.

When the vehicle ahead drives away,press +RES or the accelerator pedal toresume cruise control. If stopped formore than two minutes or if the driverdoor is opened and the driver seat beltis unbuckled, the ACC automaticallyapplies the Electric Parking Brake(EPB) to hold the vehicle. The EPBstatus light will turn on. See ElectricParking Brake 0 220. To resume ACCand release the EPB, press theaccelerator pedal.

A DIC warning message may displayindicating to shift to P (Park) beforeexiting the vehicle. See VehicleMessages 0 154.

{ Warning

If ACC has stopped the vehicle, andif ACC is disengaged, turned off,or canceled, the vehicle will nolonger be held at a stop. The vehiclecan move. When ACC is holding thevehicle at a stop, always beprepared to manually apply thebrakes.

{ Warning

Leaving the vehicle without placingit in P (Park) can be dangerous. Donot leave the vehicle while it isbeing held at a stop by ACC. Alwaysplace the vehicle in P (Park) andturn off the ignition before leavingthe vehicle.



ACC Override

If using the accelerator pedal whileACC is active, the ACC indicator turnsblue on the instrument cluster. ACCwill resume operation when theaccelerator pedal is not being pressed.

{ Warning

The ACC will not automaticallyapply the brakes if your foot isresting on the accelerator pedal.You could crash into a vehicleahead of you.

Curves in the Road

{ Warning

On curves, ACC may not detect avehicle ahead in your lane. Youcould be startled if the vehicleaccelerates up to the set speed,especially when following a vehicleexiting or entering exit ramps. Youcould lose control of the vehicle orcrash. Do not use ACC while driving

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

on an entrance or exit ramp. Alwaysbe ready to use the brakes ifnecessary.

{ Warning

On curves, ACC may respond to avehicle in another lane, or may nothave time to react to a vehicle inyour lane. You could crash into avehicle ahead of you, or lose controlof your vehicle. Give extra attentionin curves and be ready to use thebrakes if necessary. Select anappropriate speed while driving incurves.

ACC may operate differently in asharp curve. It may reduce the vehiclespeed if the curve is too sharp.

When following a vehicle and enteringa curve, ACC may not detect thevehicle ahead and accelerate to the setspeed. When this happens, the vehicleahead indicator will not appear.

ACC may detect a vehicle that is notin your lane and apply the brakes.

ACC may occasionally provide an alertand/or braking that is consideredunnecessary. It could respond to



vehicles in different lanes, signs,guardrails, and other stationaryobjects when entering or exiting acurve. This is normal operation. Thevehicle does not need service.

Other Vehicle Lane Changes

ACC will not detect a vehicle aheaduntil it is completely in the lane. Thebrakes may need to be manuallyapplied.

Do Not Use ACC on Hills and WhenTowing a Trailer

Do not use ACC when driving on steephills or when towing a trailer. ACC willnot detect a vehicle in the lane whiledriving on steep hills. The driver willoften need to take over accelerationand braking on steep hills, especiallywhen towing a trailer. If the brakes areapplied, the ACC disengages.

Disengaging ACC

There are three ways todisengage ACC:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Press J.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed is erasedfrom memory if J is pressed or ifthe ignition is turned off.

Cleaning the Sensing System

The camera sensor on the windshieldahead of the rearview mirror and theradar sensors on the front of thevehicle can become blocked by snow,ice, dirt, or mud. These areas need tobe cleaned for ACC to operateproperly.

If ACC will not operate, regular CruiseControl may be available. See“Switching Between ACC and RegularCruise Control” previously in thissection. Always consider drivingconditions before using either cruisecontrol system.

For cleaning instructions, see“Washing the Vehicle” under ExteriorCare 0 353.

System operation may also be limitedunder snow, heavy rain, or road sprayconditions.



Driver AssistanceSystemsThis vehicle may have features thatwork together to help avoid crashes orreduce crash damage while driving,backing, and parking. Read this entiresection before using these systems.

{ Warning

Do not rely on the DriverAssistance Systems. These systemsdo not replace the need for payingattention and driving safely. Youmay not hear or feel alerts orwarnings provided by thesesystems. Failure to use proper carewhen driving may result in injury,death, or vehicle damage. SeeDefensive Driving 0 188.

Under many conditions, thesesystems will not:

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Detect vehicles or objectsoutside the area monitored bythe system.

. Work at all driving speeds.

. Warn you or provide you withenough time to avoid a crash.

. Work under poor visibility orbad weather conditions.

. Work if the detection sensoris not cleaned or is coveredby ice, snow, mud, or dirt.

. Work if the detection sensoris covered up, such as with asticker, magnet, or metalplate.

. Work if the area surroundingthe detection sensor isdamaged or not properlyrepaired.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take action andapply the brakes and/or steer thevehicle to avoid crashes.

Audible or Safety Alert Seat

Some driver assistance features alertthe driver of obstacles by beeping. Tochange the volume of the warningchime, see “Comfort and Convenience”under Vehicle Personalization 0 155.

If equipped with the Safety Alert Seat,the driver seat cushion may provide avibrating pulse alert instead ofbeeping. To change this, see“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 155.

Cleaning

Depending on vehicle options, keepthese areas of the vehicle clean toensure the best driver assistancefeature performance. DriverInformation Center (DIC) messagesmay display when the systems areunavailable or blocked.



. Front and rear bumpers and thearea below the bumpers

. Front grille and headlamps

. Front camera lens in the frontgrille or near the front emblem

. Front side and rear side panels

. Outside of the windshield in frontof the rearview mirrors

. Side camera lens on the bottom ofthe outside mirrors

. Rear side corner bumpers

. Rear Vision Camera above thelicense plate

Assistance Systems forParking or BackingIf equipped, the Rear Vision Camera(RVC), Rear Park Assist (RPA), FrontPark Assist (FPA), Surround Vision,Front Vision Camera, ReverseAutomatic Braking (RAB) and BackingWarning System, Rear Cross TrafficAlert (RCTA), and Automatic ParkingAssist (APA) may help the driver parkor avoid objects. Always check aroundthe vehicle when parking or backing.

Rear Vision Camera (RVC)

When the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse), the RVC displays animage of the area behind the vehiclein the infotainment display. Theprevious screen displays when thevehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse)after a short delay. To return to theprevious screen sooner, press anybutton on the infotainment system,shift into P (Park), or reach a vehiclespeed of approximately 12 km/h(8 mph). The rear vision camera isabove the license plate.

1. View Displayed by the RearVision Camera



1. View Displayed by the RearVision Camera

2. Corners of the Rear Bumper

Displayed images may be farther orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objects thatare close to either corner of thebumper or under the bumper do notdisplay.

A warning triangle may display toshow that Rear Park Assist (RPA) hasdetected an object. This trianglechanges from amber to red andincreases in size the closer the object.

Surround Vision

If equipped, Surround Vision displaysan image of the area surrounding thevehicle, along with the front or rearcamera views in the infotainment

display. The front camera is in thegrille or near the front emblem, theside cameras are on the bottom of theoutside rearview mirrors, and the rearcamera is above the license plate.

{ Warning

The Surround Vision cameras haveblind spots and will not display allobjects near the corners of thevehicle. Folding outside mirrors thatare out of position may not displaysurround view correctly. Alwayscheck around the vehicle whenparking or backing.

1. Views Displayed by theSurround Vision Cameras

2. Area Not Shown

1. Views Displayed by theSurround Vision Cameras

2. Area Not Shown

Front Vision Camera



If equipped, a view of the area in frontof the vehicle shows in theinfotainment display. The viewdisplays after shifting from R (Reverse)to a forward gear, or by touchingCAMERA on the infotainment display,and when the vehicle is movingforward slower than 8 km/h (5 mph).If equipped, the front view cameraalso displays when the Park Assistsystem detects an object within30 cm (12 in).

{ Warning

The camera(s) do not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,crossing traffic, animals, or anyother object outside of the cameras’field of view, below the bumper,or under the vehicle. Showndistances may be different fromactual distances. Do not drive orpark the vehicle using only thesecamera(s). Always check behind andaround the vehicle before driving.Failure to use proper care mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage.

Park Assist

With Front and Rear Park Assist, asthe vehicle moves at speeds of lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph) the sensors onthe bumpers may detect objects up to1.2 m (4 ft) in front and 2.5 m (8 ft)behind the vehicle within a zone25 cm (10 in) high off the ground andbelow bumper level. These detectiondistances may be shorter duringwarmer or humid weather. Blockedsensors will not detect objects andcan also cause false detections. Keepthe sensors clean of mud, dirt, snow,ice, and slush; and clean sensors aftera car wash in freezing temperatures.

{ Warning

The Park Assist system does notdetect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. It is not available at speedsgreater than 8 km/h (5 mph). Toprevent injury, death, or vehicle

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

damage, even with Park Assist,always check the area around thevehicle and check all mirrors beforemoving forward or backing.

The instrument cluster may have aPark Assist display with bars thatshow “distance to object” and objectlocation information for the Front andRear Park Assist system. As the objectgets closer, more bars light up and thebars change color from yellow toamber to red.

When an object is first detected in therear, one beep will be heard from therear, or both sides of the Safety AlertSeat will pulse two times. When anobject is very close (<0.6 m (2 ft) in thevehicle rear, or <0.3 m (1 ft) in thevehicle front), a continuous beep willsound from the front or reardepending on object location, or bothsides of the Safety Alert Seat willpulse five times. Beeps for FPA arehigher pitched than for RPA.



Backing Warning and ReverseAutomatic Braking

Vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) have the Backing Warning andReverse Automatic Braking (RAB). TheBacking Warning part of this systemcan warn of rear objects when backingup at speeds greater than8 km/h (5 mph).

The Backing Warning System willbeep once from the rear when anobject is first detected, or pulse twiceon both sides of the Safety Alert Seat.When the system detects a potentialcrash, beeps will be heard from therear, or five pulses will be felt on bothsides of the Safety Alert Seat. Theremay also be a brief, sharp applicationof the brakes.

{ Warning

The Backing Warning System onlyoperates at speeds greater than8 km/h (5 mph). It does not detectchildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or objects below the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

bumper or that are too close or toofar from the vehicle. In somesituations, such as at higherbacking speeds, there may not beenough time for the short, sharpapplication of the vehicle brakesystem to occur. To prevent injury,death, or vehicle damage, even withthe Backing Warning System,always check the area around thevehicle and check all mirrors beforebacking.

When the vehicle is in R (Reverse),if the system detects the vehicle isbacking too fast to avoid a crash witha detected object behind your vehiclein your path, it may automaticallybrake hard to a stop to help avoid orreduce the harm caused by a backingcrash.

{ Warning

RAB may not avoid many types ofbacking crashes. Do not wait for theautomatic braking to apply. Thissystem is not designed to replacedriver braking and only works inR (Reverse) when an object isdetected directly behind the vehicle.It may not brake or stop in time toavoid a crash. It will not brake forobjects when the vehicle is movingat very low speeds. It does notdetect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objects belowthe bumper or that are too close ortoo far from the vehicle. To preventinjury, death, or vehicle damage,even with RAB, always check thearea around the vehicle before andwhile backing.

Pressing the brake pedal after thevehicle comes to a stop will releaseRAB. If the brake pedal is not pressedsoon after the stop, the Electric



Parking Brake may be set. When it issafe, press the accelerator pedal firmlyat any time to override RAB.

{ Warning

There may be instances whereunexpected or undesired automaticbraking occurs. If this happens,either press the brake pedal orfirmly press the accelerator pedal torelease the brakes from the RABsystem. Before releasing the brakes,check the RVC and check the areaaround the vehicle to make sure itis safe to proceed.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

If equipped, when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse), RCTA shows ared warning triangle with a left orright pointing arrow on theinfotainment display to warn of trafficcoming from the left or right. Thissystem detects objects coming fromup to 20 m (65 ft) from the left orright side of the vehicle. When anobject is detected, either three beepssound from the left or right or three

Safety Alert Seat pulses occur on theleft or right side, depending on thedirection of the detected vehicle.

Use caution while backing up whentowing a trailer, as the RCTAdetection zones that extend out fromthe back of the vehicle do not movefurther back when a trailer is towed.

Turning the Features On or Off

PressX on the center stack to turnon or off the Front and Rear ParkAssist, Rear Cross Traffic Alert,Reverse Automatic Braking, andBacking Warning System at the sametime. The indicator light next to thebutton comes on when the featuresare on and turns off when the featureshave been disabled.

Front and Rear Park Assist can be setto Off, On, or On with Towbar throughvehicle personalization. See “ParkAssist” under Vehicle Personalization0 155. If Park Assist is turned offthrough vehicle personalization, thePark Assist button will be disabled. Toturn Park Assist on again, select On inthe vehicle personalization menu. The

On with Towbar setting allows forPark Assist to work properly with thetrailer hitch.

Turn off Park Assist and ReverseAutomatic Braking when towing atrailer.

To turn the RPA symbols, guidancelines (on some models), or Rear CrossTraffic Alert on or off, see “RearCamera” and “Collision/DetectionSystems” under Vehicle Personalization0 155. On some models, select theguidance lines button on theinfotainment display to turn them onor off.

On some vehicles the RCTA settingcan be turned off through “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 155.

Automatic Parking Assist (APA)

If equipped, APA searches for andsteers the vehicle into parallel andperpendicular parking spots. Whenusing APA, you must still shift gears,and control the brakes andaccelerator. A display and audiblebeeps help to guide parkingmaneuvers.



{ Warning

APA does not apply the brakes. APAmay not detect objects in theparking space, objects that are softor narrow, objects high off theground such as flatbed trucks,or objects below ground level suchas large potholes. Always verify thatthe parking space is appropriate forparking a vehicle. APA does notrespond to changes in the parkingspace, such as movement of anadjacent vehicle, or a person orobject entering the parking space.APA does not detect or avoid trafficthat is behind or alongside of thevehicle. Always be prepared to stopthe vehicle during the parkingmaneuver.

PressO on the center stack toenable the system to search for aparking space that is large enough andwithin 1.5 m (5 ft) of the vehicle. Thevehicle speed must be below30 km/h (18 mph). APA does not workin 4m or 4n.

The system cannot:

. Detect whether it is a legal parkingspace.

. Park exactly lined up with thevehicle next to it if the spot isapproached at an angle or if theparking space is angled.

. Park exactly centered in a spotthat is marked too large.

. Always detect short curbs.

When enabled, APA searches forparallel parking spaces to the right ofthe vehicle. To search for a parkingspace to the left, turn on the left turnsignal or, if available, change the sideselection in the infotainment display.To switch the parking mode betweenparallel and perpendicular, press andholdO during the search process or,if available, change the parking modein the infotainment display.

After completely passing a largeenough space, an audible beep occursand a red stop symbol is displayed.

If the vehicle is in R (Reverse), butdoes not steer into the expectedspace, this may be because the systemis maneuvering the vehicle into apreviously detected space. The APAsystem does not need service.



APA will instruct the vehicle to stoponce a large enough space is found.Follow the displayed instructions.When instructed, shift to R (Reverse)to engage automatic steering. Thesteering wheel will briefly vibrate as areminder to remove hands from thesteering wheel. Check surroundingsand continue braking or acceleratingas needed, and be prepared to stop toavoid vehicles, pedestrians, or objects.

If the vehicle exceeds 10 km/h(6 mph), APA is automaticallydisengaged and automatic steeringwill turn off. A progress arrow displaysthe status of the parking maneuver.Depending on the space size,additional maneuvers may berequired, and there will be additionalinstructions. When changing gears,allow the automatic steering tocomplete before continuing theparking maneuver. Upon successfulcompletion of a maneuver, APA willbeep and display a PARKINGCOMPLETE message. Place the vehiclein P (Park).

APA may automatically disengage if:

. The steering wheel is used by thedriver.

. The maximum allowed speed isexceeded.

. There is a failure with the APAsystem.

. Electronic stability control orantilock brakes are activated.

. A high priority vehicle message isdisplayed in the DIC.

To cancel APA, pressO again.

When the System Does Not Seem toWork Properly

The APA system may require a shortperiod of driving along curves tocalibrate.

Assistance Systems forDrivingIf equipped, when driving the vehiclein a forward gear, Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), Lane Departure Warning(LDW), Lane Keep Assist (LKA), SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA), Lane Change

Alert (LCA), and/or ForwardAutomatic Braking (FAB) can help toavoid a crash or reduce crash damage.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, the FCA system may helpto avoid or reduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes. When approachinga vehicle ahead too quickly, FCAprovides a red flashing alert on thewindshield and rapidly beeps or pulsesthe driver seat. FCA also lights anamber visual alert if following anothervehicle much too closely.

FCA detects vehicles within a distanceof approximately 60 m (197 ft) andoperates at speeds above 8 km/h(5 mph). If the vehicle has AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC), it can detectvehicles to distances of approximately110 m (360 ft) and operates at allspeeds. See Adaptive Cruise Control0 229.



{ Warning

FCA is a warning system and doesnot apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving orstopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide awarning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. It also may notprovide any warning at all. FCAdoes not warn of pedestrians,animals, signs, guardrails, bridges,construction barrels, or otherobjects. Be ready to take action andapply the brakes. See DefensiveDriving 0 188.

FCA can be disabled with either theFCA steering wheel control or,if equipped, through vehiclepersonalization. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 155.

Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

FCA warnings will not occur unlessthe FCA system detects a vehicleahead. When a vehicle is detected, thevehicle ahead indicator will displaygreen. Vehicles may not be detectedon curves, highway exit ramps,or hills, due to poor visibility; or if avehicle ahead is partially blocked bypedestrians or other objects. FCA willnot detect another vehicle ahead untilit is completely in the driving lane.

{ Warning

FCA does not provide a warning tohelp avoid a crash, unless it detectsa vehicle. FCA may not detect avehicle ahead if the FCA sensor isblocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or if

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the windshield is damaged. It mayalso not detect a vehicle on windingor hilly roads, or in conditions thatcan limit visibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned or inproper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.

Collision Alert

When your vehicle approachesanother detected vehicle too rapidly,the red FCA display will flash on thewindshield. Also, eight rapidhigh-pitched beeps will sound from



the front, or both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat will pulse five times. Whenthis Collision Alert occurs, the brakesystem may prepare for driver brakingto occur more rapidly which can causea brief, mild deceleration. Continue toapply the brake pedal as needed.Cruise control may be disengagedwhen the Collision Alert occurs.

Tailgating Alert

The vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay amber when you are followinga vehicle ahead much too closely.

Selecting the Alert Timing

The Collision Alert control is on thesteering wheel. Press[ to set theFCA timing to Far, Medium, Near,or on some vehicles, Off. The firstbutton press shows the current settingon the Driver Information Center(DIC). Additional button presses willchange this setting. The chosensetting will remain until it is changedand will affect the timing of both theCollision Alert and the TailgatingAlert features. The timing of bothalerts will vary based on vehicle speed.The faster the vehicle speed, thefarther away the alert will occur.

Consider traffic and weatherconditions when selecting the alerttiming. The range of selectable alerttiming may not be appropriate for alldrivers and driving conditions.

If your vehicle is equipped withAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC),changing the FCA timing settingautomatically changes the ACCfollowing gap setting (Far, Medium,or Near).

Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may provide unnecessary alertsfor turning vehicles, vehicles in otherlanes, objects that are not vehicles,or shadows. These alerts are normaloperation and the vehicle does notneed service.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, this may correct theissue:

. Clean the outside of thewindshield in front of the rearviewmirror.

. Clean the entire front of thevehicle.


DRIVING AND OPERATING 247. Clean the headlamps.

For cleaning instructions, see“Washing the Vehicle” under ExteriorCare 0 353.

System operation may also be limitedunder snow, heavy rain, or road sprayconditions.

Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB)If the vehicle has Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), it also has FAB, whichincludes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA).When the system detects a vehicleahead in your path that is traveling inthe same direction that you may beabout to crash into, it can provide aboost to braking or automaticallybrake the vehicle. This can help avoidor lessen the severity of crashes whendriving in a forward gear. Dependingon the situation, the vehicle mayautomatically brake moderately orhard. This forward automatic brakingcan only occur if a vehicle is detected.This is shown by the FCA vehicleahead indicator being lit. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System 0 244.

The system works when driving in aforward gear between 8 km/h (5 mph)and 80 km/h (50 mph), or on vehicleswith Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),above 4 km/h (2 mph). It can detectvehicles up to approximately 60 m(197 ft).

{ Warning

FAB is an emergency crashpreparation feature and is notdesigned to avoid crashes. Do notrely on FAB to brake the vehicle.FAB will not brake outside of itsoperating speed range and onlyresponds to detected vehicles.

FAB may not:

. Detect a vehicle ahead onwinding or hilly roads.

. Detect all vehicles, especiallyvehicles with a trailer,tractors, muddy vehicles, etc.

. Detect a vehicle whenweather limits visibility, suchas in fog, rain, or snow.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Detect a vehicle ahead if it ispartially blocked bypedestrians or other objects.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take action andapply the brakes and/or steer thevehicle to avoid crashes.

FAB may slow the vehicle to acomplete stop to try to avoid apotential crash. If this happens, FABmay engage the Electric Parking Brake(EPB) to hold the vehicle at a stop.Release the EPB or firmly press theaccelerator pedal.

{ Warning

FAB may automatically brake thevehicle suddenly in situationswhere it is unexpected andundesired. It could respond to aturning vehicle ahead, guardrails,

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

signs, and other non-movingobjects. To override FAB, firmlypress the accelerator pedal, if it issafe to do so.

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

IBA may activate when the brakepedal is applied quickly by providing aboost to braking based on the speedof approach and distance to a vehicleahead.

Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedalmovement during this time is normaland the brake pedal should continueto be applied as needed. IBA willautomatically disengage only whenthe brake pedal is released.

{ Warning

IBA may increase vehicle braking insituations when it may not benecessary. You could block the flow

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

of traffic. If this occurs, take yourfoot off the brake pedal and thenapply the brakes as needed.

FAB and IBA can be disabled throughvehicle personalization. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 155.

{ Warning

Using FAB or IBA while towing atrailer could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and crash.Turn the system to Alert, or if thevehicle has ACC to Off, whentowing a trailer.

A system unavailable message maydisplay if:

. The front of the vehicle orwindshield is not clean.

. Heavy rain or snow is interferingwith object detection.

. There is a problem with theStabiliTrak/Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system.

The FAB system does not needservice.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, the SBZA system is alane-changing aid that assists driverswith avoiding crashes that occur withmoving vehicles in the side blind zone(or spot) areas. When the vehicle is ina forward gear, the left or right sidemirror display will light up if a movingvehicle is detected in that blind zone.If the turn signal is activated and avehicle is also detected on the sameside, the display will flash as an extrawarning not to change lanes. Sincethis system is part of the Lane ChangeAlert (LCA) system, read the entireLCA section before using this feature.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)If equipped, the LCA system is alane-changing aid that assists driverswith avoiding lane change crashes



that occur with moving vehicles in theside blind zone (or spot) areas or withvehicles rapidly approaching theseareas from behind. The LCA warningdisplay will light up in thecorresponding outside mirror and willflash if the turn signal is on.

{ Warning

LCA does not alert the driver tovehicles outside of the systemdetection zones, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals. It may notprovide alerts when changing lanesunder all driving conditions. Failureto use proper care when changinglanes may result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. Before making alane change, always check mirrors,glance over your shoulder, and usethe turn signals.

LCA Detection Zones

1. SBZA Detection Zone2. LCA Detection Zone

The LCA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m(11 ft). The height of the zone isapproximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. The SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA) warning areastarts at approximately the middle ofthe vehicle and goes back 5 m (16 ft).Drivers are also warned of vehiclesrapidly approaching from up to 70 m(230 ft) behind the vehicle.

How the System Works

The LCA symbol lights up in theoutside mirrors when the systemdetects a moving vehicle in the nextlane over that is in the side blind zoneor rapidly approaching that zone frombehind. A lit LCA symbol indicates itmay be unsafe to change lanes. Beforemaking a lane change, check the LCAdisplay, check mirrors, glance overyour shoulder, and use the turnsignals.

Left Outside MirrorDisplay

Right OutsideMirror Display

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror LCA displays willbriefly come on to indicate the systemis operating. When the vehicle is in aforward gear, the left or right outsidemirror display will light up if a movingvehicle is detected in the next laneover in that blind zone or rapidlyapproaching that zone. If the turn



signal is activated in the samedirection as a detected vehicle, thisdisplay will flash as an extra warningnot to change lanes.

LCA can be disabled. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 155. If LCA isdisabled by the driver, the LCA mirrordisplays will not light up.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The LCA system requires some drivingfor the system to calibrate tomaximum performance. Thiscalibration may occur more quickly ifthe vehicle is driving on a straighthighway road with traffic and roadsideobjects (e.g., guardrails, barriers).

LCA displays may not come on whenpassing a vehicle quickly, for astopped vehicle, or when towing atrailer. The LCA detection zones thatextend back from the side of thevehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing atrailer. LCA may alert to objectsattached to the vehicle, such as a

trailer, bicycle, or object extending outto either side of the vehicle. Attachedobjects may also interfere with thedetection of vehicles. This is normalsystem operation; the vehicle does notneed service.

LCA may not always alert the driver tovehicles in the next lane over,especially in wet conditions or whendriving on sharp curves. The systemdoes not need to be serviced. Thesystem may light up due to guardrails,signs, trees, shrubs, and othernon-moving objects. This is normalsystem operation; the vehicle does notneed service.

LCA may not operate when the LCAsensors in the left or right corners ofthe rear bumper are covered withmud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, or inheavy rainstorms. For cleaninginstructions, see "Washing theVehicle" under Exterior Care 0 353.If the DIC still displays the systemunavailable message after cleaningboth sides of the vehicle toward therear corners of the vehicle, see yourdealer.

If the LCA displays do not light upwhen moving vehicles are in the sideblind zone or are rapidly approachingthis zone and the system is clean, thesystem may need service. Take thevehicle to your dealer.

Radio Frequency Information

See Radio Frequency Statement 0 388.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may provide a warningif the vehicle is crossing a detectedlane marking without using a turnsignal in the lane departure direction.Since this system is part of the LaneKeep Assist (LKA) system, read theentire LKA section before using thisfeature.



Lane Keep Assist (LKA)If equipped, LKA may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel if thevehicle approaches a detected lanemarking without using a turn signal inthat direction. It may also provide aLane Departure Warning (LDW)system alert as the lane marking iscrossed. The LKA system will notassist or provide an LDW alert if itdetects that you are actively steering.Override LKA by turning the steeringwheel. LKA uses a camera to detectlane markings between 60 km/h (37mph) and 180 km/h (112 mph).

{ Warning

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle.It may not keep the vehicle in thelane or give a Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) alert, even if a lanemarking is detected.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

The LKA and LDW systemsmay not:

. Provide an alert or enoughsteering assist to avoid a lanedeparture or crash.

. Detect lane markings underpoor weather or visibilityconditions. This can occur ifthe windshield or headlampsare blocked by dirt, snow,or ice, if they are not inproper condition, or if the sunshines directly into thecamera.

. Detect road edges.

. Detect lanes on winding orhilly roads.

If LKA only detects lane markingson one side of the road, it will onlyassist or provide an LDW alertwhen approaching the lane on theside where it has detected a lanemarking. Even with LKA and LDW,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

you must steer the vehicle. Alwayskeep your attention on the road andmaintain proper vehicle positionwithin the lane, or vehicle damage,injury, or death could occur. Alwayskeep the windshield, headlamps,and camera sensors clean and ingood repair. Do not use LKA in badweather conditions.

{ Warning

Using LKA while towing a trailer oron slippery roads could cause lossof control of the vehicle and acrash. Turn the system off.



How the System Works

The LKA camera sensor is on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror.

To turn LKA on and off, pressAon the center stack.

LKA Indicator Light

When on, the LKA indicator is green ifLKA is available to assist and provideLDW alerts. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel and displayamber if the vehicle approaches adetected lane marking without using aturn signal in that direction. It mayalso provide an LDW alert by flashingamber as the lane marking is crossed.Additionally, there may be threebeeps, or the driver seat may pulsethree times, on the right or left,depending on the lane departuredirection.

Take Steering

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle. If LKAdoes not detect active driver steering,an alert, chime, or DIC message maybe provided. Steer the vehicle todismiss.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The system performance may beaffected by:

. Close vehicles ahead.

. Sudden lighting changes, such aswhen driving through tunnels.

. Banked roads.

. Roads with poor lane markings,such as two-lane roads.

If the LKA system is not functioningproperly when lane markings areclearly visible, cleaning the windshieldmay help.

A camera blocked message maydisplay if the camera is blocked.Cleaning the outside of the windshieldbehind the rearview mirror maycorrect the issue. Some driverassistance systems may have reducedperformance or not work at all. AnLKA or LDW unavailable message maydisplay if the systems are temporarilyunavailable. This message could bedue to a blocked camera. The LKAsystem does not need service. Cleanthe outside of the windshield behindthe rearview mirror.

LKA assistance and/or LDW alertsmay occur due to tar marks, shadows,cracks in the road, temporary orconstruction lane markings, or otherroad imperfections. This is normalsystem operation; the vehicle does notneed service. Turn LKA off if theseconditions continue.



Fuel

Top Tier FuelGM recommends the use of TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline to keep the engineclean, reduce engine deposits, andmaintain optimal vehicle performance.Look for the TOP TIER Logo or seewww.toptiergas.com for a list of TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline marketersand applicable countries.

Recommended FuelDo not use any fuel labeled E85 orFlexFuel. Do not use gasoline withethanol levels greater than 15% byvolume.

Premium unleaded gasoline meetingASTM specification D4814 with aposted octane rating of 93 is highlyrecommended for best performanceand fuel economy. Unleaded gasolinewith an octane rated as low as 87 canbe used. Using unleaded gasolinerated below 93 octane, however, willlead to reduced acceleration and fueleconomy. If knocking occurs, use agasoline rated at 93 octane as soon aspossible, otherwise, the engine couldbe damaged. If heavy knocking isheard when using gasoline with a93 octane rating, the engine needsservice.

Prohibited Fuels

Caution

Do not use fuels with any of thefollowing conditions; doing so maydamage the vehicle and void itswarranty:

. For vehicles that are notFlexFuel, fuel labeled greaterthan 15% ethanol by volume,such as mid-level ethanolblends (16–50% ethanol), E85,or FlexFuel.

. Fuel with any amount ofmethanol, methylal, ferrocene,and aniline. These fuels cancorrode metal fuel systemparts or damage plastic andrubber parts.

. Fuel containing metals suchas methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl(MMT), which can damagethe emissions control systemand spark plugs.

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

. Fuel with a posted octanerating of less than therecommended fuel. Using thisfuel will lower fuel economyand performance, and maydecrease the life of theemissions catalyst.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesThe U.S., Canada, and Mexico postfuel octane ratings in anti-knock index(AKI). For fuel not to use in a foreigncountry, see Prohibited Fuels 0 253.

Fuel AdditivesTOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is highlyrecommended for use with yourvehicle. If your country does not haveTOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, addACDelco Fuel System Treatment Plus−Gasoline to the vehicle’s gasoline fueltank at every oil change or 15,000 km(9,000 mi), whichever occurs first. TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline and ACDelcoFuel System Treatment Plus−Gasoline

will help keep your vehicle’s enginefuel deposit free and performingoptimally.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on thefuel pump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Avoid using electronic deviceswhile refueling.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

. Fuel can spray out if therefueling nozzle is insertedtoo quickly. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearlyfull, and is more likely in hotweather. Insert the refuelingnozzle slowly and wait for anyhiss noise to stop prior tobeginning to flow fuel.



Locate the fuel door. The fuel gaugehas an arrow to indicate the side ofthe vehicle the fuel door is on. Toopen the fuel door, push and releasethe rearward center edge of the door.

The vehicle has a capless refuelingsystem and does not have a fuel cap.The filling nozzle must be fullyinserted and latched prior to startingfuel flow.

{ Warning

Overfilling the fuel tank by morethan three clicks of a standard fillnozzle may cause:

. Vehicle performance issues,including engine stalling anddamage to the fuel system.

. Fuel spills.

. Potential fuel fires.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Wait a fewseconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces assoon as possible. See Exterior Care0 353.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove the nozzle.Shut off the flow of fuel by shuttingoff the pump or by notifying thestation attendant. Leave the areaimmediately.

Filling the Tank With a PortableGas Can

If the vehicle runs out of fuel andmust be filled from a portable gas can:

1. Locate the capless funneladapter from inside the vehicle.

2. Insert and latch the funnel intothe capless fuel system.

{ Warning

Attempting to refuel without usingthe funnel adapter may cause fuelspillage and damage the caplessfuel system. This could cause a fireand you or others could be badlyburned and the vehicle could bedamaged.



3. Remove and clean the funneladapter and return to the storagelocation.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuel vapor.You can be badly burned and thevehicle damaged if this occurs. Tohelp avoid injury to you and others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container whileit is inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle incontact with the inside of thefill opening before operatingthe nozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using electronicdevices.

Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle. Contactyour dealer or trailering dealer forassistance with preparing the vehicleto tow a trailer. Read the entiresection before towing a trailer.

To tow a disabled vehicle, see Towingthe Vehicle 0 348. To tow the vehiclebehind another vehicle such as amotor home, see Recreational VehicleTowing 0 349.

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips

{ Warning

You can lose control when towing atrailer if the correct equipment isnot used or the vehicle is not drivenproperly. For example, if the traileris too heavy or the trailer brakes are

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

inadequate for the load, the vehiclemay not stop as expected. You andothers could be seriously injured.The vehicle may also be damaged,and the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Pull a trailer only if all the steps inthis section have been followed. Askyour dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

Driving with a Trailer

Trailering is different than just drivingthe vehicle by itself. Trailering meanschanges in handling, acceleration,braking, durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takes correctequipment, and it has to be usedproperly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these are

important for your safety and that ofyour passengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

When towing a trailer:

. Become familiar with and followall state and local laws that applyto trailer towing. Theserequirements vary from state tostate.

. State laws may require the use ofextended side view mirrors. Even ifnot required, you should installextended side view mirrors if yourvisibility is limited or restrictedwhile towing.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500 mi) of vehicleuse to prevent damage to theengine, axle, or other parts.

. During the first 800 km (500 mi) oftrailer towing, do not drive over80 km/h (50 mph) and do notmake starts at full throttle.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Tow/Haul Mode is recommendedfor heavier trailers. See Tow/HaulMode 0 214. If the transmission

downshifts too often, a lower gearmay be selected using ManualMode. See Manual Mode 0 213.

If equipped, the following driverassistance features should be turnedoff when towing a trailer:

. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

. Super Cruise Control

. Lane Keep Assist (LKA)

. Park Assist

. Automatic Parking Assist (APA)

. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

If equipped, the following driverassistance features should be turnedto alert or off when towing a trailer:

. Forward Automatic BrakingSystem (FAB)

. Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

. Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)

If equipped with Lane Change Alert(LCA), the LCA detection zones thatextend back from the side of thevehicle do not move further back



when a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing atrailer.

If equipped with Rear Cross TrafficAlert (RCTA), use caution whilebacking up when towing a trailer, asthe RCTA detection zones that extendout from the back of the vehicle donot move further back when a traileris towed.

{ Warning

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear of thevehicle and enter if the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-most windowis open.

When towing a trailer:

. Do not drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.


(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Also adjust the climatecontrol system to a settingthat brings in only outside air.See “Climate Control Systems”in the Index.

For more information about carbonmonoxide, see Engine Exhaust0 209.

Towing a trailer requires experience.The combination of the vehicle andtrailer is longer and not as responsiveas the vehicle itself. Get used to thehandling and braking of thecombination by driving on a level roadsurface before driving on public roads.

The trailer structure, the tires, and thebrakes must be all be rated to carrythe intended cargo. Inadequate trailerequipment can cause the combinationto operate in an unexpected or unsafemanner. Before driving, inspect alltrailer hitch parts and attachments,safety chains, electrical connectors,lamps, tires, and mirrors. See TowingEquipment 0 266. If the trailer has

electric brakes, start the combinationmoving and then manually apply thetrailer brake controller to check thetrailer brakes work. During the trip,occasionally check that the cargo andtrailer are secure and that the lampsand any trailer brakes are working.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the stability controlsystem might be heard. The systemreacts to vehicle movement caused bythe trailer, which mainly occursduring cornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving without a trailer. This can helpto avoid heavy braking and suddenturns.

Passing

More passing distance is needed whentowing a trailer. The combination ofthe vehicle and trailer will notaccelerate as quickly and is muchlonger than the vehicle alone. It is



necessary to go much farther beyondthe passed vehicle before returning tothe lane. Pass on level roadways.Avoid passing on hills if possible.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steering wheelwith one hand. To move the trailer tothe left, move that hand to the left. Tomove the trailer to the right, movethat hand to the right. Always back upslowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Caution

Turn more slowly and make widerarcs when towing a trailer toprevent damage to your vehicle.Making very sharp turns couldcause the trailer to contact thevehicle.

Make wider turns than normal whentowing, so trailer will not go over softshoulders, over curbs, or strike road

signs, trees, or other objects. Alwayssignal turns well in advance. Do notsteer or brake suddenly.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gearbefore starting down a long or steepdownhill grade. If the transmission isnot shifted down, the brakes mayoverheat and result in reduced brakingefficiency.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). Shiftthe transmission to a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often underheavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

When towing at higher altitudes,engine coolant will boil at a lowertemperature than at lower altitudes.If the engine is turned off immediatelyafter towing at high altitude on steepuphill grades, the vehicle could showsigns similar to engine overheating. Toavoid this, let the engine run,preferably on level ground, with thetransmission in P (Park) for a fewminutes before turning the engine off.If the overheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating 0 290.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

To prevent serious injury or death,always park your vehicle and traileron a level surface when possible.

When parking your vehicle and yourtrailer on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but do notshift into P (Park) yet. Turn thewheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, gradually release the brakepedal to allow the chocks toabsorb the load of the trailer.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.



Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

. Start the engine.

. Shift into a gear.

. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Launching and Retrieving a Boat

Backing the Trailer into the Water

{ Warning

. Have all passengers get out ofthe vehicle before backingonto the sloped part of theramp. Lower the driver andpassenger side windowsbefore backing onto the ramp.This will provide a means of

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

escape in the unlikely eventthe vehicle slides into thewater.

. If the boat launch surface isslippery, have the driverremain in the vehicle with thebrake pedal applied while theboat is being launched. Theboat launch can be especiallyslippery at low tide when partof the ramp was previouslysubmerged at high tide. Donot back onto the ramp tolaunch the boat if you are notsure the vehicle can maintaintraction.

. Do not move the vehicle ifsomeone is in the path of thetrailer. Some parts of thetrailer might be underwaterand not visible to people whoare assisting in launchingthe boat.

Disconnect the wiring to the trailerbefore backing the trailer into thewater to prevent damage to theelectrical circuits on the trailer.Reconnect the wiring to the trailerafter removing the trailer from thewater. If the trailer has electric brakesthat can function when the trailer issubmerged, it might help to leave theelectrical trailer connector attached tomaintain trailer brake functionalitywhile on the boat ramp.

To back the trailer into the water:

1. If equipped, place the vehicle infour-wheel-drive high.

2. Slowly back down the boat rampuntil the boat is floating, but nofurther than necessary.

3. Press and hold the brake pedal,but do not shift into P (Park) yet.

4. Have someone place chocksunder the front wheels of thevehicle.

5. Gradually release the brake pedalto allow the chocks to absorb theload of the trailer.



6. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park). If equipped with amanual transmission, turn offthe engine and move the shiftlever into 1 (First) gear.

7. Release the brake pedal.

Pulling the Trailer from the Water

1. Press and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine and shift intoa gear.


4. Let up on the brake pedal.

5. Drive slowly until the tires areclear of the chocks.

6. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

7. Slowly pull the trailer from thewater.

8. Once the vehicle and trailer havebeen driven from the sloped partof the boat ramp, the vehicle canbe shifted from four-wheel-drivehigh. Shift into the drive modethat is appropriate for the roadconditions.

Caution

If the vehicle tires begin to spin andthe vehicle begins to slide towardthe water, remove your foot fromthe accelerator pedal and apply thebrake pedal. Seek help to have thevehicle towed up the ramp.

Maintenance when TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service more oftenwhen used to tow trailers. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 363. It isespecially important to check theautomatic transmission fluid, engineoil, axle lubricant, belts, coolingsystem, and brake system before andduring each trip.

Check periodically that all nuts andbolts on the trailer hitch are tight.

Engine Cooling when TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheating0 290.

Trailer Towing

Caution

Towing a trailer improperly candamage the vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To tow a trailercorrectly, follow the directions inthis section and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.



Trailer Weight

{ Warning

Never exceed the towing capacityfor your vehicle.

Safe trailering requires monitoring theweight, speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, dimensions ofthe front of the trailer, and howfrequently the vehicle is used to tow atrailer.

Trailering Weight Ratings

When towing a trailer, the combinedweight of the vehicle, vehicle contents,trailer, and trailer contents must bebelow all of the maximum weightratings for the vehicle, including:

. GCWR: Gross Combined WeightRating

. GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating

. Maximum Trailer Weight Rating

. GAWR-RR: Gross Axle WeightRating-Rear

. Maximum Trailer Tongue WeightRating

See “Weight-Distributing HitchAdjustment” under Towing Equipment0 266 to determine if equalizer barsare required to obtain the maximumtrailer weight rating.

See “Trailer Brakes” under TowingEquipment 0 266 to determine ifbrakes are required based on yourtrailer's weight.

The only way to be sure the weight isnot exceeding any of these ratings isto weigh the tow vehicle and trailercombination, fully loaded for the trip,getting individual weights for each ofthese items.

{ Warning

You and others could be seriouslyinjured or killed if the trailer is tooheavy or the trailer brakes areinadequate for the load. The vehiclemay be damaged, and the repairswould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Only tow a trailer if all the steps inthis section have been followed. Askyour dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer.

Gross Combined WeightRating (GCWR)

GCWR is the total allowable weight ofthe completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any fuel, passengers,cargo, equipment, and accessories. Donot exceed the GCWR for your vehicle.The GCWR for the vehicle is on theTow Rating Chart following.



To check that the weight of thevehicle and trailer are within theGCWR for the vehicle, follow thesesteps:

. Start with the "curb weight" fromthe trailering information label

. Add the weight of the trailerloaded with cargo and ready forthe trip

. Add the weight of all passengers

. Add the weight of all cargo in thevehicle

. Add the weight of hitch hardwaresuch as a draw bar, ball, loadequalizer bars, or sway bars

. Add the weight of any accessoriesor aftermarket equipment addedto the vehicle

The resulting weight cannot exceedthe GCWR value shown on theTrailering Information Label.

The gross combined weight can alsobe confirmed by weighing the vehicleand trailer on a public scale. Thevehicle and trailer should be loadedfor the trip with passengers and cargo.

Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR)

For information about the vehicle'smaximum load capacity, see VehicleLoad Limits 0 197. When calculatingthe GVWR with a trailer attached, thetrailer tongue weight must beincluded as part of the weight thevehicle is carrying.

Maximum Trailer Weight

The maximum trailer weight rating iscalculated assuming only the driver isin the tow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers, and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

Use the tow rating chart to determinehow much the trailer can weigh, basedon the vehicle model and options.



Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

Escalade 2WD Short Wheelbase 3.23 3 765 kg (8,300 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Escalade 4WD Short Wheelbase 3.23 3 674 kg (8,100 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Escalade 2WD Long Wheelbase 3.23 3 674 kg (8,100 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Escalade 4WD Long Wheelbase with20 inch wheels

3.23 3 583 kg (7,900 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

Escalade 4WD Long Wheelbase with22 inch wheels

3.23 3 538 kg (7,800 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailerincluding any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded.

Maximum Trailer Tongue WeightRating

The Maximum Trailer Tongue WeightRating is the allowable trailer tongueweight that the vehicle can supportusing a conventional trailer hitch.

It may be necessary to reduce theoverall trailer weight to stay withinthe maximum trailer tongue weightrating while still maintaining thecorrect trailer load balance.



Vehicle Series Hitch Type Maximum Tongue Weight

1500 Weight Carrying 272 kg (600 lb)

1500 Weight Distributing 453 kg (1,000 lb)

The trailer tongue weight contributesto the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW).GVW includes the CURB WEIGHT ofyour vehicle, any passengers, cargo,equipment and the trailer tongueweight. Vehicle options, passengers,cargo, and equipment reduce themaximum allowable tongue weightthe vehicle can carry, which alsoreduces the maximum allowabletrailer weight.

Trailer Load Balance

The correct trailer load balance mustbe maintained to ensure trailerstability. Incorrect load balance is aleading cause of trailer sway.

The trailer tongue weight (1) shouldbe 10–15% of the total loaded trailerweight (2). Some specific trailer types,such as boat trailers, fall outside ofthis range. Always refer to the trailerowner’s manual for the recommendedtrailer tongue weight for each trailer.Never exceed the maximum loads foryour vehicle, hitch and trailer.

The trailer load balance percentage iscalculated as: weight (1) divided byweight (2) times 100.

After loading the trailer, separatelyweigh the trailer and then the trailertongue and calculate the trailer loadbalance percentage to see if theweights and distribution areappropriate for your vehicle. If thetrailer weight is too high, it may bepossible to trasfer some of the cargointo your vehicle. If the trailer tongueweight is too high or too low, it maybe possible to rearrange some of thecargo inside of the trailer.

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for yourvehicle. Use the shortest hitchextension available to position thehitch ball closer to your vehicle. Thiswill help reduce the effect of thetrailer tongue weight on the trailerhitch and the rear axle.



If a cargo carrier is used in the trailerhitch receiver, choose a carrier thatpositions the load as close to thevehicle as possible. Make sure thetotal weight, including the carrier, isno more than half of the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle or 227 kg (500 lb), whicheveris less.

Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR-RR)

The GAWR-RR is the total weight thatcan be supported by the rear axle ofthe vehicle. Do not exceed theGAWR-RR for the vehicle, with thetow vehicle and trailer fully loaded forthe trip including the weight of thetrailer tongue. If using aweight-distributing hitch, do notexceed the GAWR-RR before applyingthe weight distribution spring bars.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or assistance.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Always use the correct hitchequipment for your vehicle.Crosswinds, large trucks going by, andrough roads can affect the trailer andthe hitch.

Proper hitch equipment for yourvehicle helps maintain control of thevehicle-trailer combination. Manytrailers can be towed using aweight-carrying hitch which has acoupler latched to the hitch ball, or atow eye latched to a pintle hook.Other trailers may require aweight-distributing hitch that usesspring bars to distribute the trailertongue weight between your vehicleand trailer axles. See “MaximumTrailer Tongue Weight Rating” underTrailer Towing 0 261 for weight limitswith various hitch types.

Never attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches. Only useframe-mounted hitches that do notattach to the bumper.



Hitch Cover

To remove hitch cover, if equipped:

1. Remove the two fasteners on thelower tabs.

2. Pull the lower edge of the coverto about a 45 degree angle.

3. Pull the cover downward todisengage the upperattachments.

To reinstall hitch cover:

1. Hold cover at a 45 degree angleto the vehicle and push theupper tabs into the slots in thebumper.

2. Push the bottom of the coverforward until the lower tabs lineup with the lower slots.

3. Snap the hitch cover into placeby pushing the upper cornersforward.

4. Reinstall the two fasteners onthe lower tabs.

Consider using mechanical swaycontrols with any trailer. Ask atrailering professional about swaycontrols or refer to the trailermanufacturer's recommendations andinstructions.

Weight-Distributing HitchAdjustment

A weight-distributing hitch may beuseful with some trailers. Use thefollowing guidelines to determine if aweight-distributing hitch shouldbe used.



Vehicle Series Trailer WeightWeight-Distributing Hitch

Usage Hitch Distribution

1500 Up to 3 175 kg (7,000 lb) Optional Refer to trailermanufacturer’srecommendation

1500 Over 3 175 kg (7,000 lb) Required 50%

1. Front of Vehicle2. Body to Ground Distance

When using a weight-distributinghitch, measure the front fender heightabove the front axle distance (2)before and after connecting trailer.Adjust the spring bars until the front

fender height distance (2) isapproximately half way between thefirst and second measurements.

If equipped with Automatic LevelControl 0 226, it is recommended toallow the shocks to inflate, levelingthe vehicle prior to adjusting thehitch.

Tires. Do not tow a trailer while using a

compact spare tire on the vehicle.

. Tires must be properly inflated tosupport loads while towing atrailer. See Tires 0 314 forinstructions on proper tireinflation.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer, and attach thechains to the holes on the trailer hitchplatform. Instructions about safetychains may be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer.

Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer to help preventthe tongue from contacting the road ifit becomes separated from the hitch.Always leave just enough slack so thecombination can turn. Never allowsafety chains to drag on the ground.



Trailer Brakes

Loaded trailers over 900 kg (2,000 lb)must be equipped with brake systemsand with brakes for each axle. Trailerbraking equipment conforming toCanadian Standards Association (CSA)requirement CAN3-D313, or itsequivalent, is recommended.

State or local regulations may requiretrailers to have their own brakingsystem if the loaded weight of thetrailer exceeds certain minimums thatcan vary from state to state. Read andfollow the instructions for the trailerbrakes so they are installed, adjusted,and maintained properly. Neverattempt to tap into your vehicle'shydraulic brake system. If you do,both the vehicle anti-lock brakes andthe trailer brakes may not function,which could result in a crash.

Trailer Wiring Harness

The seven-pin trailer connector ismounted in the bumper. Thisconnector can be plugged into aseven-pin universal heavy-duty trailerconnector available through yourdealer.

Use only a round, seven-wireconnector with flat blade terminalsmeeting SAE J2863 specifications forproper electrical connectivity.

The seven-wire harness contains thefollowing trailer circuits:

. Yellow/Grey: Left Stop/Turn Signal

. Green/Violet: Right Stop/TurnSignal

. Grey/Brown: Taillamps

. White: Ground

. White/Green: Back-up Lamps

. Red/Green: Battery Feed

. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake

To help charge a remote (non-vehicle)battery, press the Tow/Haul Modebutton at the end of the shift lever.If the trailer is too light for Tow/HaulMode, turn on the headlamps to helpcharge the battery.

Electric Brake Control WiringProvisions

These wiring provisions are includedwith the vehicle as part of the trailerwiring package. These provisions arefor an electric brake controller.

The harness should be installed byyour dealer or a qualified servicecenter.

Refer to the aftermarket electric trailerbrake controller owner's manual todetermine wire color coding of theelectric trailer brake controller. Thewire colors on the brake controllermay be different from the vehicle.

Trailer Lamps

Always check all trailer lamps areworking at the beginning of each trip,and periodically on longer trips.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

When properly connected, the trailerturn signals should will illuminate toindicate the vehicle is turning,changing lanes, or stopping. Whentowing a trailer, the arrows on the



instrument cluster will illuminateeven if the trailer is not properlyconnected or the bulbs areburned out.

Tow/Haul Mode

For instructions on how to enter Tow/Haul mode, see Tow/Haul Mode 0 214.

Tow/Haul assists when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavy load.

Tow/Haul Mode is designed to bemost effective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75% of the vehicle's Gross CombinedWeight Rating (GCWR). See“Maximum Trailer Weight” underTrailer Towing 0 261.

Tow/Haul Mode is most useful whentowing a heavy trailer or carrying alarge or heavy load:

. through rolling terrain

. in stop-and-go traffic

. in busy parking lots

Operating the vehicle in Tow/HaulMode when lightly loaded or nottowing will not cause damage;however, it is not recommended and

may result in unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristicsand reduced fuel economy.

Integrated Trailer Brake ControlSystem

The vehicle may have an IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) systemfor use with electric trailer brakes ormost electric over hydraulic trailerbrake systems. These instructionsapply to both types of electric trailerbrakes.

This symbol is on the Trailer BrakeControl Panel on vehicles with anITBC system. The power output to thetrailer brakes is proportional to theamount of vehicle braking. Thisavailable power output to the trailerbrakes can be adjusted to a widerange of trailering situations.

The ITBC system is integrated withthe vehicle’s brake, anti-lock brake,and StabiliTrak systems. In traileringconditions that cause the vehicle’santi-lock brake or StabiliTrak systemsto activate, power sent to the trailer'sbrakes will be automatically adjustedto minimize trailer wheel lock-up.This does not imply that the trailerhas StabiliTrak.

If the vehicle’s brake, anti-lock brake,or StabiliTrak systems are notfunctioning properly, the ITBC systemmay not function fully or at all. Makesure all of these systems are fullyoperational to allow the ITBC systemto function properly.

The ITBC system is powered throughthe vehicle's electrical system. Turningthe ignition off will also turn off theITBC system. The ITBC system is fullyfunctional only when the ignition is inON/RUN.



{ Warning

Connecting a trailer that has an airbrake system may result in reducedor complete loss of trailer braking,including increased stoppingdistance or trailer instability whichcould result in serious injury, death,or property damage. Only use theITBC system with electric or electricover hydraulic trailer brake systems.

Trailer Brake Control Panel

1. Manual Trailer Brake ApplyLever

2. Trailer Gain AdjustmentButtons

The ITBC control panel is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering column. See Instrument Panel0 6. The control panel allowsadjustment to the amount of output,referred to as Trailer Gain, available tothe trailer brakes and allows manualapplication of the trailer brakes. Usethe ITBC control panel and the DICtrailer brake display page to adjustand display power output to thetrailer brakes.

Trailer Brake DIC Display Page

The ITBC display page indicates:

. Trailer Gain setting

. Output to the trailer brakes

. Trailer connection

. System operational status.

To display:

. Scroll through the DIC menupages

. Press a Trailer Gain (+) or (−)button

. Activate the Manual Trailer BrakeApply Lever

TRAILER GAIN:

Press a Trailer Gain button to recallthe current Trailer Gain setting. Eachpress and release of the gain buttonswill then change the Trailer Gainsetting. Press the Trailer Gain (+) or(−) to adjust. Press and hold tocontinuously adjust the Trailer Gain.To turn the output to the trailer off,adjust the Trailer Gain setting to 0.0.This setting can be adjusted from 0.0to 10.0 with a trailer connected ordisconnected.

TRAILER OUTPUT: This displaysanytime a trailer with electric brakesis connected. Output to the trailerbrakes is based on the amount ofvehicle braking present and relative tothe Trailer Gain setting. Output isdisplayed from 0 to 100% for eachgain setting.

The Trailer Output will indicate“- - - - - -” on the Trailer Brake DisplayPage whenever the following occur:

. No trailer is connected.


272 DRIVING AND OPERATING. A trailer without electric brakes is

connected, no DIC message willdisplay

. A trailer with electric brakes hasbecome disconnected, a CHECKTRAILER WIRING messagedisplays on the DIC

. There is a fault present in thewiring to the trailer brakes, aCHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage displays on the DIC

. The ITBC system is not workingdue to a fault, a SERVICETRAILER BRAKE SYSTEMmessage displays in the DIC

Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever

Slide this lever left to apply thetrailer’s electric brakes independent ofthe vehicle’s brakes. Use this lever toadjust Trailer Gain to achieve theproper power output to the trailerbrakes. The trailer's and the vehicle'sbrake lamps will come on when eithervehicle brakes or manual trailer brakesare applied and properly connected.

Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure

Trailer Gain should be set for aspecific trailering condition and itmust be readjusted anytime vehicleloading, trailer loading, or road surfaceconditions change.

{ Warning

Trailer brakes that are over-gainedor under-gained may not stop thevehicle and the trailer as intendedand can result in a crash. Alwaysfollow the instructions to set theTrailer Gain for the proper trailerstopping performance.

To adjust Trailer Gain for each towingcondition:

1. Drive the vehicle with the trailerattached on a level road surfacerepresentative of the towingcondition and free of traffic atabout 32 to 40 km/h (20 to25 mph) and fully apply theManual Trailer Brake apply lever.

NoteAdjusting Trailer Gain at speeds lowerthan 32 to 40 km/h (20 to 25 mph)may result in an incorrect gainsetting.

2. Adjust the Trailer Gain, using theTrailer Gain adjustment buttons,to just below the point of trailerwheel lock-up, indicated bytrailer wheel squeal or tire smokewhen a trailer wheel locks.

NoteTrailer wheel lock-up may not occur iftowing a heavily loaded trailer. In thiscase, adjust the Trailer Gain to thehighest allowable setting for thetowing condition.

3. Readjust Trailer Gain any timevehicle loading, trailer loading,or road surface conditionschange or if trailer wheel lock-upis noticed at any time whiletowing.

Other ITBC-Related DIC Messages

TRAILER CONNECTED: This messagewill briefly display when a trailer withelectric brakes is first connected to



the vehicle. This message willautomatically turn off in about10 seconds. This message can beacknowledged before it automaticallyturns off.

CHECK TRAILER WIRING: Thismessage will display if:

. The ITBC system first determinesconnection to a trailer withelectric brakes and then the trailerharness becomes disconnected thevehicle.

If the disconnect occurs while thevehicle is stationary, this messagewill automatically turn off inabout 30 seconds. This messagewill also turn off if it isacknowledged or if the trailerharness is reconnected.

If the disconnect occurs while thevehicle is moving, this messagewill continue until the ignition isturned off. This message will alsoturn off if it is acknowledged or ifthe trailer harness is reconnected.

. There is an electrical fault in thewiring to the trailer brakes. Thismessage will continue as long as

there is an electrical fault in thetrailer wiring. This message willalso turn off if it is acknowledged.

To determine whether the electricalfault is on the vehicle side or trailerside of the trailer wiring harnessconnection:

1. Disconnect the trailer wiringharness from the vehicle.


3. Wait 10 seconds, then turn theignition back to RUN.

4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage reappears, the electricalfault is on the vehicle side.

If the CHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage only reappears whenconnecting the trailer wiringharness to the vehicle, theelectrical fault is on thetrailer side.

SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM:This message will display when thereis a problem with the ITBC system.If this message continues over

multiple ignition cycles, there is aproblem with the ITBC system. Havethe vehicle serviced.

If either the CHECK TRAILER WIRINGor SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEMmessage displays while driving, theITBC system may not be fullyfunctional or may not function at all.When traffic conditions allow,carefully pull the vehicle over to theside of the road and turn the ignitionoff. Check the wiring connection tothe trailer and turn the ignition backon. If either of these messagescontinues, either the vehicle or trailerneeds service.

A GM dealer may be able to diagnoseand repair problems with the trailer.However, any diagnosis and repair ofthe trailer is not covered under thevehicle warranty. Contact your trailerdealer for assistance with trailerrepairs and trailer warrantyinformation.



Trailer Sway Control (TSC)Vehicles with StabiliTrak have aTrailer Sway Control (TSC) feature.Trailer sway is unintended side-to-sidemotion of a trailer while towing. If thevehicle is towing a trailer and the TSCdetects that sway is increasing, thevehicle brakes are selectively appliedat each wheel, to help reduceexcessive trailer sway. If equipped withthe Integrated Trailer Brake Control(ITBC) system, and the trailer has anelectric brake system, StabiliTrak mayalso apply the trailer brakes.

If TSC is enabled, the Traction ControlSystem (TCS)/StabiliTrak warninglight will flash on the instrumentcluster. Reduce vehicle speed bygradually removing your foot from theaccelerator. If trailer sway continues,StabiliTrak can reduce engine torqueto help slow the vehicle. TSC will notfunction if StabiliTrak is turned off.See Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 222.

{ Warning

Trailer sway can result in a crashand in serious injury or death, evenif the vehicle is equipped with TSC.

If the trailer begins to sway, reducevehicle speed by gradually removingyour foot from the accelerator. Thenpull over to check the trailer andvehicle to help correct possiblecauses, including an improperly oroverloaded trailer, unrestrainedcargo, improper trailer hitchconfiguration, or improperlyinflated or incorrect vehicle or

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

trailer tires. See Towing Equipment0 266 for trailer ratings and hitchsetup recommendations.

Aftermarket Electronic TrailerSway Control Devices

Some trailers may come equippedwith an electronic device designed toreduce or control trailer sway.Aftermarket equipment manufacturersalso offer similar devices that connectto the wiring between the trailer andthe vehicle. These devices mayinterfere with the vehicle’s trailerbrake systems or other systems,including integrated anti-swaysystems, if equipped. Messages relatedto trailer connections or trailer brakescould appear on the DIC. The effectsof these aftermarket devices onvehicle handling or trailer brakeperformance is not known.



{ Warning

Use of aftermarket electronic trailersway control devices could result inreduced trailer brake performance,loss of trailer brakes, or othermalfunctions, and result in a crash.You or others could be seriouslyinjured or killed. Before using oneof these devices:

. Ask the device or trailermanufacturer if the devicehas been thoroughly testedfor compatibility with themake, model, and year ofyour vehicle and any optionalequipment installed on yourvehicle.

. Before driving, check thetrailer brakes are workingproperly, if equipped. Drivethe vehicle with the trailerattached on a level roadsurface that is free of trafficat about 32-40 km/h(20-25 mph) and fully apply

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the manual trailer brake applylever. Also, check the trailerbrake lamps and other lampsare functioning correctly.

. If the trailer brakes are notoperating properly at anytime, or if a DIC messageindicates problems with thetrailer connections or trailerbrakes, carefully pull thevehicle over to the side of theroad when traffic conditionsallow.

Trailer Tires

Special Trailer (ST) tires differ fromvehicle tires. Trailer tires are designedwith stiff sidewalls to help preventsway and to support heavy loads.These features can make it difficult todetermine if the trailer tire pressuresare low only based on a visualinspection.

Always check all trailer tire pressuresbefore each trip when the tires arecool. Low trailer tire pressure is aleading cause of trailer tire blow-outs.

Trailer tires deteriorate over time. Thetrailer tire sidewall will show the weekand year the tire was manufactured.Many trailer tire manufacturersrecommend replacing tires more thansix years old.

Overloading is another leading causeof trailer tire blow-outs. Never loadyour trailer with more weight than thetires are designed to support. The loadrating is located on the trailer tiresidewall.

Always know the maximum speedrating for the trailer tires beforedriving. This may be significantlylower than the vehicle tire speedrating. The speed rating may be onthe trailer tire sidewall. If the speedrating is not shown, the default trailertire speed rating is 105 km/h (65 mph).



Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Warning

The Data Link Connector (DLC) isused for vehicle service andEmission Inspection/Maintenancetesting. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light) 0 140.A device connected to the DLC —such as an aftermarket fleet ordriver-behavior tracking device —may interfere with vehicle systems.This could affect vehicle operationand cause a crash. Such devicesmay also access information storedin the vehicle’s systems.

Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always check with yourdealer before adding electricalequipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, see Servicingthe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 97 andAdding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 98.


VEHICLE CARE 277

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

California Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . 284Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . 286Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Battery - North America . . . . . . . . . 295

Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . 299Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Windshield Replacement . . . . . . . . 300Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Electrical SystemElectrical System Overload . . . . . . 303Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . 304Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Instrument Panel Fuse Block(Right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 316Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . 322Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . 331Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333


278 VEHICLE CARE

If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Jump StartingJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . 349

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visit yourdealer. You will receive genuine GMparts and GM-trained and supportedservice people.

Genuine GM parts have one of thesemarks:

California Proposition65 Warning

{ Warning

Most motor vehicles, including thisone, as well as many of its serviceparts and fluids, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the Stateof California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductiveharm. Engine exhaust, many partsand systems, many fluids, andsome component wear by-productscontain and/or emit thesechemicals. For more information goto www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See Battery - North America 0 295 andJump Starting - North America 0 345and the back cover.


VEHICLE CARE 279

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbag initiators,seat belt pretensioners, and lithiumbatteries contained in Remote KeylessEntry transmitters, may containperchlorate materials. Specialhandling may be necessary. Foradditional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non-dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Damage to suspension componentscaused by modifying vehicle heightoutside of factory settings will not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non-GM certifiedparts, including control module orsoftware modifications, is not coveredunder the terms of the vehiclewarranty and may affect remainingwarranty coverage for affected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicle usinggenuine GM Accessories installed by adealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 98.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not have theproper knowledge, service manual,tools, or parts. Always followowner’s manual procedures andconsult the service manual for yourvehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how toservice the vehicle than this manualcan. To order the proper servicemanual, see Publication OrderingInformation 0 387.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 97.


280 VEHICLE CARE

If equipped with remote vehicle start,open the hood before performing anyservice work to prevent remotestarting the vehicle accidentally. SeeRemote Vehicle Start 0 35.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records 0 374.

Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damage tovehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is inside the vehicleunder the steering wheel.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle tofind the secondary hood release.The handle is under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Push the handle to the right andat the same time raise the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps are on properly. Thenbring the hood from full open towithin 15 cm (6 in) from the closedposition, pause, and push the frontcenter of the hood with a swift, firmmotion to fully close the hood.


VEHICLE CARE 281

Engine Compartment Overview


282 VEHICLE CARE

1. Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting - North America 0 345.

2. Battery - North America 0 295.

3. Coolant Surge Tank and PressureCap. See Cooling System 0 287.

4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 286.

5. Remote Negative (–) Location(Out of View). See Jump Starting -North America 0 345.

6. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System 0 287.

7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When toAdd Engine Oil” under Engine Oil0 282.

8. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 282.

9. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid 0 292.

10. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See BrakeFluid 0 294.

11. Engine Compartment Fuse Block0 304.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engine performanceand long life, careful attention mustbe paid to engine oil. Following thesesimple, but important steps will helpprotect your investment:

. Use engine oil approved to theproper specification and of theproper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section.

. Check the engine oil level regularlyand maintain the proper oil level.See “Checking Engine Oil” and“When to Add Engine Oil” in thissection.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System 0 284.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

Check the engine oil level regularly,every 650 km (400 mi), especially priorto a long trip. The engine oil dipstick

handle is a loop. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 281 for thelocation.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handle maybe hot; it could burn you. Use atowel or glove to touch the dipstickhandle.

If a low oil Driver Information Center(DIC) message displays, check the oillevel.

Follow these guidelines:

. To get an accurate reading, parkthe vehicle on level ground. Checkthe engine oil level after theengine has been off for at leasttwo hours. Checking the engine oillevel on steep grades or too soonafter engine shutoff can result inincorrect readings. Accuracyimproves when checking a coldengine prior to starting. Removethe dipstick and check the level.


VEHICLE CARE 283. If unable to wait two hours, the

engine must be off for at least15 minutes if the engine is warm,or at least 30 minutes if theengine is not warm. Pull out thedipstick, wipe it with a clean papertowel or cloth, then push it backin all the way. Remove it again,keeping the tip down, and checkthe level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick and theengine has been off for at least15 minutes, add 1 L (1 qt) of therecommended oil and then recheckthe level. See “Selecting the RightEngine Oil” later in this section for an

explanation of what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications 0 376.

Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oil levelsabove or below the acceptableoperating range shown on thedipstick are harmful to the engine.If you find that you have an oillevel above the operating range, i.e.,the engine has so much oil that theoil level gets above thecross-hatched area that shows theproper operating range, the enginecould be damaged. You shoulddrain out the excess oil or limitdriving of the vehicle and seek aservice professional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 281 for the location of the engine oilfill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oil dependson both the proper oil specificationand viscosity grade. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 372.

Specification

Use full synthetic engine oils thatmeet the dexos1 specification. Engineoils that have been approved by GMas meeting the dexos1 specificationare marked with the dexos1 approvedlogo. See www.gmdexos.com.


284 VEHICLE CARE

Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Viscosity Grade

Use SAE 0W-20 viscosity gradeengine oil.

When selecting an oil of theappropriate viscosity grade, it isrecommended to select an oil of thecorrect specification. See“Specification” earlier in this section.

Engine Oil Additives/Engine OilFlushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting the dexos1specification are all that is needed forgood performance and engineprotection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could cause enginedamage not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change your ownoil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in the trashor pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is based on acombination of factors which include

engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven. Basedon driving conditions, the mileage atwhich an oil change is indicated canvary considerably. For the oil lifesystem to work properly, the systemmust be reset every time the oil ischanged.

When the system has calculated thatoil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message comes on. Change theoil as soon as possible within the next1 000 km (600 mi). It is possible that,if driving under the best conditions,the oil life system might indicate thatan oil change is not necessary for upto a year. The engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once a yearand at this time the system must bereset. Your dealer has trained servicepeople who will perform this work andreset the system. It is also importantto check the oil regularly over thecourse of an oil drain interval andkeep it at the proper level.


VEHICLE CARE 285

If the system is ever reset accidentally,the oil must be changed at 5 000 km(3,000 mi) since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil life systemwhenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystem

Reset the system whenever the engineoil is changed so that the system cancalculate the next engine oil change.To reset the system:

1. Using the DIC controls on theright side of the steering wheel,display OIL LIFE on the DIC. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 149. When remaining oil life islow, the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message will appear onthe display.

2. Press and hold SEL on the DICcontrols for a few seconds toclear the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message and reset the oillife at 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil is

changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oilchange.

The oil life system can also be reset asfollows:

1. Display OIL LIFE on the DIC. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 149.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message is not on, thesystem is reset.

The system is reset when theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messageis off.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeat theprocedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. The onlyreason for fluid loss is a transmissionleak or overheated transmission. Thisvehicle is not equipped with atransmission fluid level dipstick.There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid in these vehicles.Because this procedure is difficult,this should be done at the dealer.Contact the dealer for additionalinformation or the procedure can befound in the service manual. SeePublication Ordering Information 0 387.

Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damage thevehicle, and the damage may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

(Continued)


286 VEHICLE CARE

Caution (Continued)

Always use the correct automatictransmission fluid. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants0 372.

Change the fluid and filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule 0 363.Be sure to use the transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 372.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overview0 281 for the location of the engineair cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

For intervals on changing andinspecting the engine air cleaner/filtersee Maintenance Schedule 0 363.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Do not start the engine or have theengine running with the engine aircleaner/filter housing open. Beforeremoving the engine air cleaner/filter,make sure that the engine air cleaner/filter housing and nearby componentsare free of dirt and debris. Remove theengine air cleaner/filter. Lightly tapand shake the engine air cleaner/filter(away from the vehicle), to releaseloose dust and dirt. Inspect the engineair cleaner/filter for damage, andreplace if damaged. Do not clean theengine air cleaner/filter orcomponents with water orcompressed air.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Screws2. Electrical Connector3. Air Duct Clamp

1. Locate the air cleaner/filterassembly. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 281.

2. Disconnect the outlet duct byloosening the air duct clamp (3).

3. Disconnect the electricalconnector (2) and the connectorharness from the cover.


VEHICLE CARE 287

4. Remove the four screws (1) ontop of the cover of the housingand lift up the cover.

5. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Take careto dislodge as little dirt aspossible.

6. Clean the engine air cleaner/filtersealing surfaces and the housing.

7. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

8. Reverse Steps 2-4 to reinstall thefilter cover housing.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. Use cautionwhen working on the engine. Donot start the engine or drive thevehicle with the air cleaner/filteroff, as flames may be present if theengine backfires.

Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Always havethe air cleaner/filter in place whendriving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows the engineto maintain the correct workingtemperature.

1. Coolant Surge Tank

2. Coolant Surge TankPressure Cap

3. Engine Cooling Fan

{ Warning

An underhood electric fan can startup even when the engine is notrunning and can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Do not touch heater or radiatorhoses, or other engine parts. Theycan be very hot and can burn you.Do not run the engine if there is aleak; all coolant could leak out.That could cause an engine fire andcan burn you. Fix any leak beforedriving the vehicle.


288 VEHICLE CARE

Engine Coolant

The cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL engine coolant.This coolant is designed to remain inthe vehicle for 5 years or 240 000 km(150,000 mi), whichever occurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating, seeEngine Overheating 0 290.

What to Use

{ Warning

Plain water, or other liquids such asalcohol, can boil before the propercoolant mixture will. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, theengine could get too hot but therewould not be an overheat warning.The engine could catch fire and youor others could be burned.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. This mixture:

. Gives freezing protection down to−37 °C (−34 °F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129 °C (265 °F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Caution

Do not use anything other than amix of DEX-COOL coolant thatmeets GM Standard GMW3420 andclean, drinkable water. Anythingelse can cause damage to theengine cooling system and thevehicle, which would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, or by pouring iton the ground or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding used coolantdisposal. This will help protect theenvironment and your health.

Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank is in theengine compartment on the passengerside of the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 281.

The vehicle must be on a level surfacewhen checking the coolant level.


VEHICLE CARE 289

Check to see if coolant is visible in thecoolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, wait until it cools down. Thecoolant level should be at or above thefull cold mark. If it is not, there maybe a leak in the cooling system.

If coolant is visible but the coolantlevel is not at or above the full coldmark, see “How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank” following.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

{ Warning

Spilling coolant on hot engine partscan burn you. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn ifthe engine parts are hot enough.

{ Warning

Plain water, or other liquids such asalcohol, can boil before the propercoolant mixture will. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, theengine could get too hot but therewould not be an overheat warning.The engine could catch fire and youor others could be burned.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system are underpressure. Turning the pressure cap,even a little, can cause them tocome out at high speed and youcould be burned. Never turn the capwhen the cooling system, includingthe pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and pressurecap to cool.

Caution

Failure to follow the specificcoolant fill procedure could causethe engine to overheat and couldcause system damage. If coolant isnot visible in the surge tank,contact your dealer.


290 VEHICLE CARE

If no coolant is visible in the surgetank, add coolant:

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one fullturn. If a hiss is heard, wait forthat to stop. A hiss means thereis still some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly, and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to the fullcold mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start the engineand let it run until the enginecoolant temperature gaugeindicates approximately 90 °C(195 °F).

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surgetank until the level reaches thefull cold mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.

6. Verify coolant level after theengine is shut off and thecoolant is cold. If necessary,repeat coolant fill procedureSteps 1-6.

Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and enginedamage may occur. Be sure the capis properly and tightly secured.

Engine Overheating

Caution

Do not run the engine if there is aleak in the engine cooling system.This can cause a loss of all coolantand can damage the system andvehicle. Have any leaks fixedright away.

The vehicle has several indicators towarn of engine overheating.

There is a coolant temperature gaugein the vehicle's instrument cluster. SeeEngine Coolant Temperature Gauge0 137.

In addition, there are ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE,and ENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDmessages in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears, getservice help right away. See RoadsideService 0 382.


VEHICLE CARE 291

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle is parkedon a level surface.

Check to see if the engine coolingfan(s) are running. If the engine isoverheating, the fans should berunning. If they are not, do notcontinue to run the engine. Have thevehicle serviced.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system are underpressure. Turning the pressure cap,even a little, can cause them tocome out at high speed and youcould be burned. Never turn the capwhen the cooling system, includingthe pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and pressurecap to cool.

If No Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message,along with a low coolant condition,can indicate a serious problem.

If there is an engine overheat warning,but no steam is seen or heard, theproblem may not be too serious.Sometimes the engine can get a littletoo hot when the vehicle:

. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

. Stops after high-speed driving.

. Idles for long periods in traffic.

. Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towing0 261.

If the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE messageappears with no sign of steam, try thisfor a minute or so:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral), and let theengine idle.

If the engine coolant temperaturegauge is no longer in the overheatzone or an overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normallyand have the cooling system checkedfor proper fill and function.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam andthe vehicle is equipped with an enginedriven cooling fan, push down theaccelerator until the engine speed isabout twice as fast as normal idlespeed for at least five minutes whilethe vehicle is parked. If the warning is


292 VEHICLE CARE

still there, turn off the engine and geteveryone out of the vehicle until itcools down.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for five minutes while parked.If the warning is still displayed, turnoff the engine until it cools down.

Engine FanIf the vehicle has electric cooling fans,the fans may be heard spinning at lowspeed during most everyday driving.The fans may turn off if no cooling isrequired. Under heavy vehicle loading,trailer towing, high outsidetemperatures, or operation of the airconditioning system, the fans maychange to high speed and an increasein fan noise may be heard. This isnormal and indicates that the coolingsystem is functioning properly. Thefans will change to low speed whenadditional cooling is no longerrequired.

The electric engine cooling fans mayrun after the engine has been turned.off. This is normal and no service isrequired.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid needsto be added, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. Use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing in an areawhere the temperature may fall belowfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

The vehicle has a low washer fluidmessage on the DIC that comes onwhen the washer fluid is low. Themessage is displayed for 15 seconds atthe start of each ignition cycle. Whenthe WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUIDmessage displays, washer fluid willneed to be added to the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.

Open the cap with the washer symbolon it. Add washer fluid until the tankis full. See Engine CompartmentOverview 0 281 for reservoir location.

Caution

. Do not use washer fluid thatcontains any type of waterrepellent coating. This cancause the wiper blades tochatter or skip.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

(Continued)


VEHICLE CARE 293

Caution (Continued)

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

BrakesDisc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or can beheard all the time when the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes will notwork well. That could lead to a

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 376.

Brake pads should be replaced ascomplete sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedal doesnot return to normal height, or ifthere is a rapid increase in pedaltravel. This could be a sign that brakeservice may be required.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes may notwork properly. The brakingperformance expected can change inmany other ways if the wrongreplacement brake parts are installedor if parts are improperly installed.


294 VEHICLE CARE

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoir isfilled with GM approved DOT 3 brakefluid as indicated on the reservoir cap.See Engine Compartment Overview0 281 for the location of the reservoir.

Checking Brake Fluid

With the vehicle in P (Park) on a levelsurface, the brake fluid level should bebetween the minimum and maximummarks on the brake fluid reservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoir maygo down:

. Normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are installed, the fluidlevel goes back up.

. A fluid leak in the brake hydraulicsystem. Have the brake hydraulicsystem fixed. With a leak, thebrakes will not work well.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoircap and the area around the capbefore removing it.

Do not top off the brake fluid. Addingfluid does not correct a leak. If fluid isadded when the linings are worn,there will be too much fluid whennew brake linings are installed. Add orremove fluid, as necessary, only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. You orothers could be burned, and thevehicle could be damaged. Addbrake fluid only when work is doneon the brake hydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System Warning Light0 142.

Brake fluid absorbs water over timewhich degrades the effectiveness ofthe brake fluid. Replace brake fluid atthe specified intervals to preventincreased stopping distance. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 363.

What to Add

Use only GM approved DOT 3 brakefluid from a clean, sealed container.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 372.

{ Warning

The wrong or contaminated brakefluid could result in damage to thebrake system. This could result inthe loss of braking leading to apossible injury. Always use theproper GM approved brake fluid.


VEHICLE CARE 295

Caution

If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces, the paintfinish can be damaged. Immediatelywash off any painted surface.

Battery - North AmericaThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not remove thecap and do not add fluid.

Refer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview 0 281for battery location.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Batteries also contain otherchemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer. WASHHANDS AFTER HANDLING. Formore information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See California Proposition 65 Warning0 278 and the back cover.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode. Youcan be badly hurt if you are notcareful. See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 345 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove the black,negative (−) cable from the battery tokeep the battery from running down.

Extended Storage: Remove the black,negative (−) cable from the battery oruse a battery trickle charger.

Four-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

If the vehicle is equipped withFour-Wheel Drive, be sure to performthe lubricant checks described in thissection.

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to Maintenance Schedule 0 363to determine how often to check thelubricant.


296 VEHICLE CARE

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicleshould be on a level surface.

1. Fill Plug2. Drain Plug

If the level is below the bottom of thefill plug (1) hole, located on thetransfer case, some lubricant will needto be added. Add enough lubricant toraise the level to the bottom of the fillplug (1) hole. Use care not toovertighten the plug.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 372 to determine whatkind of lubricant to use.

Front AxleWhen to Check and ChangeLubricant

It is not necessary to regularly checkfront axle fluid unless a leak issuspected, or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.



1. Fill Plug2. Drain Plug

. When the differential is cold, addenough lubricant to raise the levelfrom 0 mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm(1/8 in) below the fill plug (1) hole.

. When the differential is atoperating temperature (warm), addenough lubricant to raise the levelto the bottom of the fillplug (1) hole.


VEHICLE CARE 297

What to Use


Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularly checkrear axle fluid unless a leak issuspected or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.

All axle assemblies are filled byvolume of fluid during production.They are not filled to reach a certainlevel. When checking the fluid levelon any axle, variations in the readingscan be caused by factory filldifferences between the minimum andthe maximum fluid volume. Also, if avehicle has just been driven beforechecking the fluid level, it may appearlower than normal because fluid hastraveled out along the axle tubes andhas not drained back to the sumparea. Therefore, a reading takenfive minutes after the vehicle has been

driven will appear to have a lowerfluid level than a vehicle that hasbeen stationary for an hour or two.The rear axle assembly must besupported on a flat, level surface toget a true reading.



The proper level is 1.0 mm to19.0 mm (0.04 in to 0.7 in) below thebottom of the fill hole, located on therear axle. Add only enough fluid toreach the proper level.

What to Use


Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this inspection,the vehicle could move suddenly.If the vehicle moves, you or otherscould be injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the accelerator pedal,and be ready to turn off theengine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).


298 VEHICLE CARE

If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock Control FunctionCheck

{ Warning

When you are doing this inspection,the vehicle could move suddenly.If the vehicle moves, you or otherscould be injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle beginsto move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check, thevehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured andproperty could be damaged. Makesure there is room in front of thevehicle in case it begins to roll. Beready to apply the regular brake atonce should the vehicle beginto move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keeping yourfoot on the regular brake, set theparking brake.

. To check the parking brake'sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park) mechanism'sholding ability: With the enginerunning, shift to P (Park). Thenrelease the parking brake followedby the regular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.


VEHICLE CARE 299

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking.

For the proper type and size, seeMaintenance Replacement Parts 0 373.

Caution

Allowing the wiper arm to touchthe windshield when no wiper bladeis installed could damage thewindshield. Any damage that occurswould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not allow the wiperarm to touch the windshield.

Front Wiper Blade Replacement

To replace the wiper blade assembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.

2. Lift up on the latch in the middleof the wiper blade where thewiper arm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade down toward thewindshield far enough to releaseit from the J-hooked end of thewiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

To replace the rear wiper blade:

1. With the rear wiper in the offposition, open the liftglass toaccess the rear wiper arm/blade.

The rear wiper blade will notlock in a vertical position so usecare when pulling it away fromthe vehicle.

2. Push the release lever (2) todisengage the hook and push thewiper arm (1) out of the bladeassembly (3).


300 VEHICLE CARE

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely in the wiper arm hookuntil the release lever clicks intoplace.

4. Return the wiper arm and bladeassembly to the rest position onthe glass.

Glass ReplacementIf the windshield or front side glassmust be replaced, see your dealer todetermine the correct replacementglass.

Windshield Replacement

HUD System

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. If the windshield must bereplaced, get one that is designed forHUD or the HUD image may look outof focus.

Driver Assistance Systems

If the windshield needs to be replacedand the vehicle is equipped with afront camera sensor for the DriverAssistance Systems, a GMreplacement windshield isrecommended. The replacementwindshield must be installedaccording to GM specifications forproper alignment. If it is not, thesesystems may not work properly, theymay display messages, or they maynot work at all. See your dealer forproper windshield replacement.

Gas Strut(s)This vehicle is equipped with gasstrut(s) to provide assistance in liftingand holding open the hood/trunk/liftgate system in full open position.

{ Warning

If the gas struts that hold open thehood, trunk, and/or liftgate fail, youor others could be seriously injured.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice immediately. Visuallyinspect the gas struts for signs ofwear, cracks, or other damageperiodically. Check to make sure thehood/trunk/liftgate is held openwith enough force. If struts arefailing to hold the hood/trunk/liftgate, do not operate. Have thevehicle serviced.


VEHICLE CARE 301

Caution

Do not apply tape or hang anyobjects from gas struts. Also do notpush down or pull on gas struts.This may cause damage to thevehicle.

See Maintenance Schedule 0 363.

Hood

Trunk

Liftgate

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.


302 VEHICLE CARE

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, or any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contact yourdealer.

Caution

Do not replace incandescent bulbswith aftermarket LED replacementbulbs. This can cause damage tothe vehicle electrical system.

LED LightingThis vehicle has several LED lamps.For replacement of any LED lightingassembly, contact your dealer.

License Plate Lamp

Passenger Side Shown, Driver SideSimilar

1. Bulb Socket2. Bulb3. Lamp Assembly

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Push the lamp assembly (3)toward the center of the vehicle.

2. Pull the lamp assembly down toremove.


VEHICLE CARE 303

3. Turn the bulb socket (1)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (3).

4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out ofthe bulb socket (1).

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall it into the lamp assembly.

6. Push the lamp assembly backinto position until the release tablocks into place.

Electrical System

Electrical System OverloadThe vehicle has fuses to protectagainst an electrical system overload.Fuses also protect power devices inthe vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new one ofthe identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, there aresome spare fuses and a fuse puller inthe left instrument panel fuse block.The same amperage fuse can also beborrowed. Choose some feature of thevehicle that is not needed to use andreplace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may cause thelamps to go on and off, or in somecases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right away ifthe lamps go on and off or remain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protected fromelectrical overload, overload due toheavy snow or ice may cause wiperlinkage damage. Always clear ice andheavy snow from the windshieldbefore using the windshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.


304 VEHICLE CARE

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused by electricalproblems.

{ Danger

Fuses and circuit breakers aremarked with their ampere rating.Do not exceed thespecified amperage rating whenreplacing fuses and circuit breakers.Use of an oversized fuse or circuitbreaker can result in a vehicle fire.You and others could be seriouslyinjured or killed.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replace abad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage can betemporarily borrowed from anotherfuse location, if a fuse goes out.Replace the fuse as soon as possible.

Engine Compartment FuseBlockThe engine compartment fuse block isin the engine compartment, on thedriver side of the vehicle.

Lift the cover to access the fuse block.

Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep the coverson any electrical component.

A fuse puller is available in the leftinstrument panel fuse block.


VEHICLE CARE 305

Fuses Usage

1 Electric runningboards

Fuses Usage

2 Antilock brakesystem pump

Fuses Usage

3 Interior BEC LT1


306 VEHICLE CARE

Fuses Usage

4 Passenger motorizedseat belt

5 Suspension levelingcompressor

6 4WD transfer caseelectronic control

7 –

8 –

10 Electric parkingbrake/–

11 –

12 –

13 Interior BEC LT2

14 Rear BEC 1

15 –

16 –

17 Driver motorizedseat belt

18 –

19 –

20 –

Fuses Usage

21 Automatic headlampleveling/Exhaustsolenoid

22 Fuel pump

23 Integrated chassiscontrol module

24 Real timedampening

25 Fuel pump powermodule

26 Active HydraulicAssist/ Batteryregulated voltagecontrol

27 –

28 Upfitter 2

30 Wiper

31 Trailer interfacemodule

32 –

33 –

34 Reverse lamps

Fuses Usage

35 Antilock brakesystem valve

36 Trailer brakes

38 –

39 Right trailerstoplamp/Turnsignal lamp

40 Left trailerstoplamp/turnsignal lamp

41 Trailer parkinglamps

42 Right parking lamps

43 Left parking lamps

44 Upfitter 3

45 Automatic levelcontrol/Run/Crank

46 –

47 Upfitter 4

49 Reverse lamps

50 –

52 –


VEHICLE CARE 307

Fuses Usage

53 –

54 –

55 –

56 –

57 –

58 –

59 Euro trailer

60 Air conditioningcontrol

61 –

62 –

63 Upfitter 1

64 –

65 –

66 –

67 Trailer battery

68 Secondaryfuel pump

69 RC upfitter 3 and 4

70 VBATupfitter 3 and 4

Fuses Usage

71 –

73 –

74 Engine controlmodule/Ignition

75 Miscellaneous/Ignition/–

76 Transmission/Ignition

77 RC upfitter 1 and 2

78 VBATupfitter 1 and 2

79 –

80 –

81 –

82 –

83 Euro trailer/RC

85 –

86 –

87 MAF/IAT/Humidity/TIAP sensor

88 Injector A – odd

Fuses Usage

89 Injector B – even

90 O2 sensor B

91 Throttle control

93 Horn

94 Fog lamps

95 High-beamheadlamps

96 –

97 –

98 –

99 –

100 O2 sensor A

101 Engine controlmodule

102 Engine controlmodule/Transmissioncontrol module

103 Auxiliary interiorheater

104 Starter

105 –


308 VEHICLE CARE

Fuses Usage

106 –

107 Aeroshutter

108 –

109 Police upfitter

110 –

111 –

113 –

114 Front windshieldwasher

115 Rear window washer

116 Left cooling fan

117 Fuel pump prime

118 –

119 –

120 –

121 Right HID headlamp

122 Left HID headlamp

123 Right cooling fan

Relays Usage

9 Fuel pump

29 Upfitter 2

37 Upfitter 3

48 Upfitter 4

51 Parking lamp

64 Secondaryfuel pump

72 Upfitter 1

84 Run/Crank

92 Engine controlmodule

112 Starter

120 Fuel pump prime

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Right)

The right instrument panel fuse blockaccess door is on the passenger sideedge of the instrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.


VEHICLE CARE 309

There are relays on the back of thefuse block. To access, press the tabsand remove the fuse block.

The vehicle may not be equipped withall of the fuses, relays, and featuresshown.

Fuses Usage

1 –

2 –

3 –

4 Accessory poweroutlet 4

5 –

6 –

7 –

8 Glove box

9 –

10 –

11 –

12 Steering wheel controls

13 Body control module 8

14 –

15 –

16 –

17 –

18 –



310 VEHICLE CARE

Fuses Usage

20 Rear seatentertainment

21 Sunroof

22 –

23 –

24 –

25 –

26 Infotainment/Airbag

27 –/RF window switch/Rain sensor

28 Obstacle detection/USB

29 Radio

30 –

31 –

32 –

33 –

34 –

35 –

36 Special equipmentoption B2

Fuses Usage

37 Special equipmentoption


39 DC to AC inverter

40 –

41 –

42 –

43 –

44 Right door windowmotor

45 Front blower



48 Amplifier

49 Right front seat


51 –

53 –

54 –

55 –

Fuses Usage

56 –

Relays Usage

52 Retained accessorypower

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Left)

The left instrument panel fuse blockaccess door is on the driver side edgeof the instrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.


VEHICLE CARE 311

There are relays on the back of thefuse block. To access, press the tabsand remove the fuse block.


Fuses Usage

1 –

2 –

3 –


5 Accessory power outletfrom retained accessorypower

6 Accessory power outletfrom battery power

7 Universal remotesystem/Interiorrearview mirror

8 SEO/Retained accessorypower

9 –



12 Steering wheel controlbacklighting

13 –

14 –


312 VEHICLE CARE

Fuses Usage

15 –

16 Discrete logic ignitionsensor

17 Video processingmodule/Virtual keymodule

18 Mirror window module


20 Front bolster

21 –

22 –

23 –

24 HVAC ignition/AUXHVAC ignition

25 Instrument cluster/Ignition sensingdiagnostic moduleignition

26 Tilt column/Tiltcolumn lock 1/SEO 1/SEO 2

27 Data link connector/Driver seat module

Fuses Usage

28 Passive locking, Passivetheft-deterrent/HVACbattery

29 Content theft deterrent

30 –

31 –

32 –

33 SEO/Left heated seat

34 Park enable/Electricadjustable pedal

35 –

36 Miscellaneous runcrank loads

37 Heated steering wheel

38 Steering column lock 2

39 Instrument clusterbattery

40 –

41 –

42 Euro trailer

43 Left door

Fuses Usage

44 Driver power seat

45 –

46 Right heated, cooled,or ventilated seat

47 Left heated, cooled,or ventilated seat

48 –

49 –

Relays Usage


51 –

52 Retained accessorypower

53 Miscellaneous runcrank

54 –

55 –

56 –


VEHICLE CARE 313

Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block isbehind the access panel on the leftside of the compartment.

Pull the panel out by grabbing thefinger access slot at the rear edge.


Fuses Usage

2 –

3 Right heated secondrow seat

4 Heated mirrors

5 Liftgate

6 Glass breakage

7 Liftglass

8 Liftgate module logic

9 Rear wiper

10 Rear heating,ventilation, and airconditioning blower

11 Second row seat

12 Liftgate module

13 Third row seat

14 Rear accessory poweroutlet

15 Rear window defogger

19 Rear fog lamp (ifequipped)


314 VEHICLE CARE

Relays Usage

1 Rear window defogger

16 Liftgate

17 Liftglass

18 Rear fog lamp

20 Heated mirror

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. See thewarranty manual for informationregarding the tire warranty andwhere to get service. Foradditional information refer to thetire manufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowoutand a serious crash. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 197.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash could causeserious injury. Check alltires frequently tomaintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

(Continued)


VEHICLE CARE 315

Warning (Continued)

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or an authorizedtire service center shouldrepair, replace, dismount,and mount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

See Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation 0 322 for inflationpressure adjustment forhigh-speed driving.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come with all-seasontires. These tires are designed toprovide good overall performance onmost road surfaces and weatherconditions. Original equipment tiresdesigned to GM's specific tireperformance criteria have a TPCspecification code molded onto thesidewall. Original equipmentall-season tires can be identified bythe last two characters of this TPCcode, which will be “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires on thevehicle if frequent driving on snow orice-covered roads is expected.All-season tires provide adequateperformance for most winter drivingconditions, but they may not offer thesame level of traction or performanceas winter tires on snow or ice-coveredroads. See Winter Tires 0 315.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-covered

roads. Consider installing winter tireson the vehicle if frequent driving onice or snow covered roads is expected.See your dealer for details regardingwinter tire availability and proper tireselection. Also, see Buying New Tires0 329.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction, increasedroad noise, and shorter tread life.After changing to winter tires, be alertfor changes in vehicle handling andbraking.

If using winter tires:

. Use tires of the same brand andtread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, and speedrating as the original equipmenttires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.


316 VEHICLE CARE

Low-Profile TiresThe vehicle has low profile tiresthat are classified as touring tiresand are designed for on road use.The low-profile, wide tread designis not recommended for off-roaddriving. See Off-Road Driving 0 190,for additional information.

Caution

Low-profile tires are moresusceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact thanstandard profile tires. Tire and/orwheel assembly damage can occurwhen coming into contact withroad hazards like potholes, or sharpedged objects, or when sliding intoa curb. The warranty does not coverthis type of damage. Keep tires setto the correct inflation pressure andwhen possible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other roadhazards.

All-Terrain TiresThis vehicle may have all-terrain tires.These tires provide good performanceon most road surfaces, weatherconditions, and for off-road driving.See Off-Road Driving 0 190.

The tread pattern on these tires maywear more quickly than other tires.Consider rotating the tires morefrequently than at 12 000 km(7,500 mi) intervals if irregular wear isnoted when the tires are inspected.See Tire Inspection 0 327.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into the sidewall. Theexample shows a typical passengervehicle tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric)/Spare Tire

(1) Tire Size : The tire size code isa combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(2) TPC Spec (Tire PerformanceCriteria Specification) : Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification code


VEHICLE CARE 317

molded onto the sidewall. GM'sTPC specifications meet or exceedall federal safety guidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that the tireis in compliance with the U.S.Department of TransportationMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

DOT Tire Date of Manufacture :The last four digits of the TINindicate the tire manufactureddate. The first two digits representthe week (01-52) and the last twodigits, the year. For example, thethird week of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and datethe tire was manufactured. The

TIN is molded onto both sides ofthe tire, although only one sidemay have the date ofmanufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies in thesidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) : Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more information,see Uniform Tire Quality Grading0 331.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and the maximumpressure needed to supportthat load. For information onrecommended tire pressure seeTire Pressure 0 320 and VehicleLoad Limits 0 197.

(8) Temporary Use Only : Onlyuse a temporary spare tire untilthe road tire is repaired andreplaced. This spare tire shouldnot be driven on over 112 km/h(70 mph), or 88 km/h (55 mph)when pulling a trailer, with theproper inflation pressure. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire 0 344.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The example shows a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire :The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passenger


318 VEHICLE CARE

vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tire andRim Association.

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspectratio is 75, as shown in item C ofthe tire illustration, it would meanthat the tire's sidewall is75 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire. Theletter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description : Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of the tire.The load index represents the loadcarrying capacity a tire is certifiedto carry. The speed rating is themaximum speed a tire is certifiedto carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure : The amount of airinside the tire pressing outwardon each square inch of the tire.Air pressure is expressed in kPa(kilopascal) or psi (pounds persquare inch).

Accessory Weight : The combinedweight of optional accessories.Some examples of optionalaccessories are automatictransmission, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio : The relationship ofa tire's height to its width.

Belt : A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead : The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords thathold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire inwhich the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline of thetread.

Cold Tire Pressure : The amountof air pressure in a tire, measuredin kPa (kilopascal) or psi (poundsper square inch) before a tire hasbuilt up heat from driving. SeeTire Pressure 0 320.

Curb Weight : The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengersand cargo.


VEHICLE CARE 319

DOT Markings : A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT code includesthe Tire Identification Number(TIN), an alphanumeric designatorwhich can also identify the tiremanufacturer, production plant,brand, and date of production.

GVWR : Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limits0 197.

GAWR FRT : Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 197.

GAWR RR : Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 197.

Intended Outboard Sidewall :The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa) : The metric unitfor air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index : An assigned numberranging from 1 to 279 thatcorresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure :The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating : The loadrating for a tire at the maximumpermissible inflation pressure forthat tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight : The sum of curb weight,accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production optionsweight.

Normal Occupant Weight : Thenumber of occupants a vehicle isdesigned to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 197.

Occupant Distribution :Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall : Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bears whitelettering, or bears manufacturer,brand, and/or model namemolding that is higher or deeperthan the same moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : A tireused on passenger cars and somelight duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.


320 VEHICLE CARE

Recommended InflationPressure : Vehicle manufacturer'srecommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tireplacard. See Tire Pressure 0 320and Vehicle Load Limits 0 197.

Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatic tirein which the ply cords that extendto the beads are laid at 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Rim : A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beads areseated.

Sidewall : The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating : An alphanumericcode assigned to a tire indicatingthe maximum speed at which atire can operate.

Traction : The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface. Theamount of grip provided.

Tread : The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators : Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)of tread remains. See When It IsTime for New Tires 0 328.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards) : A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for a tire'straction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings are determinedby tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading 0 331.

Vehicle Capacity Weight : Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated cargoload. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 197.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire : Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard : A labelpermanently attached to a vehicleshowing the vehicle capacityweight and the original equipmenttire size and recommendedinflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” underVehicle Load Limits 0 197.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operate effectively.

{ Warning

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tires thatdo not have enough air, canresult in:

(Continued)


VEHICLE CARE 321

Warning (Continued)

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, can result in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and Loading Informationlabel on the vehicle indicates theoriginal equipment tires and thecorrect cold tire inflationpressures. The recommendedpressure is the minimum air

pressure needed to support thevehicle's maximum load carryingcapacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and an exampleof the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see Vehicle LoadLimits 0 197. How the vehicle isloaded affects vehicle handlingand ride comfort. Never load thevehicle with more weight than itwas designed to carry.

When to Check

Check the pressure of the tiresonce a month or more.

Do not forget the spare tire, if thevehicle has one. See Full-Size SpareTire 0 344 for additionalinformation.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.

Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been driven forat least three hours or no morethan 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve to geta pressure measurement. If thecold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and LoadingInformation label, no furtheradjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add airuntil the recommended pressure isreached. If the inflation pressureis high, press on the metal stem inthe center of the tire valve torelease air.

Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems to keep out dirt andmoisture and prevent leaks. Useonly valve caps designed for the


322 VEHICLE CARE

vehicle by GM. TPMS sensorscould be damaged and would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ Warning

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100 mph) or higher, puts additionalstrain on tires. Sustainedhigh-speed driving causes excessiveheat buildup and can cause suddentire failure. This could cause acrash, and you or others could bekilled. Some high-speed rated tiresrequire inflation pressureadjustment for high-speedoperation. When speed limits androad conditions allow the vehicle tobe driven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high-speedoperation, are in excellentcondition, and are set to the correctcold tire inflation pressure for thevehicle load.

When driving the vehicle at speeds of160 km/h (100 mph) or higher, set thecold inflation pressure to 20 kPa(3 psi) above the recommended tirepressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. Return thetires to the recommended cold tireinflation pressure when high-speeddriving has ended. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 197 and Tire Pressure 0 320.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitor theair pressure in your tires and transmittire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to theinflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire

inflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of your tiresis significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tire causesthe tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire treadlife, and may affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance,and it is the driver's responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder-inflation has not reached thelevel to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.


VEHICLE CARE 323

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combinedwith the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as longas the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation0 323.


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). The TPMS isdesigned to warn the driver when alow tire pressure condition exists.TPMS sensors are mounted onto eachtire and wheel assembly, excluding thespare tire and wheel assembly. TheTPMS sensors monitor the airpressure in the tires and transmit thetire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure condition isdetected, the TPMS illuminates thelow tire pressure warning light on theinstrument cluster. If the warning

light comes on, stop as soon aspossible and inflate the tires to therecommended pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label.See Vehicle Load Limits 0 197.

A message to check the pressure in aspecific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The low tirepressure warning light and the DICwarning message come on at eachignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tire pressurelevels can be viewed. For additionalinformation and details about the DICoperation and displays see DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 149.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that the airpressure is getting low and needs tobe inflated to the proper pressure.


324 VEHICLE CARE

A Tire and Loading Information label,attached to your vehicle, shows thesize of the original equipment tiresand the correct inflation pressure forthe tires when they are cold. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 197 for anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location.Also see Tire Pressure 0 320.

The TPMS can warn about a low tirepressure condition but it does notreplace normal tire maintenance. SeeTire Inspection 0 327, Tire Rotation0 327, and Tires 0 314.

Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properly ifone or more of the TPMS sensors aremissing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the lowtire pressure warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignition cycle.A DIC warning message also displays.The malfunction light and DICwarning message come on at eachignition cycle until the problem iscorrected. Some of the conditions thatcan cause these to come on are:

. One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have a TPMSsensor. The malfunction light andDIC message should go off afterthe road tire is replaced and thesensor matching process isperformed successfully. See “TPMSSensor Matching Process” later inthis section.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. The malfunction

light and the DIC message shouldgo off after successfullycompleting the sensor matchingprocess. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. See yourdealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires 0 329.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.


VEHICLE CARE 325

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire pressure condition. See yourdealer for service if the TPMSmalfunction light and DIC messagecome on and stay on.

Tire Fill Alert (If Equipped)

This feature provides visual andaudible alerts outside the vehicle tohelp when inflating an underinflatedtire to the recommended cold tirepressure.

When the low tire pressure warninglight comes on:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe, levelplace.

2. Set the parking brake firmly.

3. Place the vehicle in P (Park).

4. Add air to the tire that isunderinflated. The turn signallamp will flash.

When the recommendedpressure is reached, the hornsounds once and the turn signallamp will stop flashing andbriefly turn solid.

Repeat these steps for allunderinflated tires that haveilluminated the low tire pressurewarning light.

{ Warning

Overinflating a tire could cause thetire to rupture and you or otherscould be injured. Do not exceed themaximum pressure listed on thetire sidewall. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 316 and Vehicle LoadLimits 0 197.

If the tire is overinflated by more than35 kPa (5 psi), the horn will soundmultiple times and the turn signallamp will continue to flash for severalseconds after filling stops. To releaseand correct the pressure, while theturn signal lamp is still flashing,briefly press the center of the valvestem. When the recommendedpressure is reached, the hornsounds once.

If the turn signal lamp does not flashwithin 15 seconds after starting toinflate the tire, the tire fill alert hasnot been activated or is not working.

If the hazard warning flashers are on,the tire fill alert visual feedback willnot work properly.

The TPMS will not activate the tire fillalert properly under the followingconditions:

. There is interference from anexternal device or transmitter.

. The air pressure from the inflationdevice is not sufficient to inflatethe tire.

. There is a malfunction inthe TPMS.

. There is a malfunction in the hornor turn signal lamps.

. The identification code of theTPMS sensor is not registered tothe system.

. The battery of the TPMS sensoris low.


326 VEHICLE CARE

If the tire fill alert does not operatedue to TPMS interference, move thevehicle about 1 m (3 ft) back orforward and try again. If the tire fillalert feature is not working, use a tirepressure gauge.

TPMS Sensor Matching Process

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one or moreof the TPMS sensors. The TPMSsensor matching process should alsobe performed after replacing a sparetire with a road tire containing theTPMS sensor. The malfunction lightand the DIC message should go off atthe next ignition cycle. The sensorsare matched to the tire/wheelpositions, using a TPMS relearn tool,in the following order: driver sidefront tire, passenger side front tire,passenger side rear tire, and driverside rear tire. See your dealer forservice or to purchase a relearn tool.A TPMS relearn tool can also bepurchased. See Tire Pressure MonitorSensor Activation Tool at

www.gmtoolsandequipment.comor call 1-800-GM TOOLS(1-800-468-6657).

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takes longer,the matching process stops and mustbe restarted.

The TPMS sensor matching process is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Place the vehicle in ServiceMode. See Ignition Positions0 203.

3. Make sure the Tire Pressure infodisplay option is turned on. Theinfo displays on the DIC can beturned on and off through theSettings menu. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 149.

4. Use the five-way DIC control onthe right side of the steeringwheel to scroll to the TirePressure screen under the DICinfo page. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 149.

5. Press and hold SEL in the centerof the five-way DIC control.

The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage displays on the DICscreen.

6. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

7. Place the relearn tool against thetire sidewall, near the valve stem.Then press the button to activatethe TPMS sensor. A horn chirpconfirms that the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to this tire and wheelposition.

8. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

9. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

10. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedure inStep 7. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensor


VEHICLE CARE 327

identification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.


12. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressure levelas indicated on the Tire andLoading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspected forsigns of wear or damage at leastonce a month.

Replace the tire if:

. The indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire canbe seen.

. There is cord or fabric showingthrough the tire's rubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snagged deepenough to show cord or fabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 363.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. The firstrotation is the most important.

Anytime unusual wear is noticed,rotate the tires as soon aspossible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Time forNew Tires 0 328 and WheelReplacement 0 333.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.


328 VEHICLE CARE

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire and LoadingInformation label after the tireshave been rotated. See TirePressure 0 320 and Vehicle LoadLimits 0 197.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 323.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacities andSpecifications 0 376, and“Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire” underTire Changing 0 335.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause a crash. When

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

changing a wheel, remove any rustor dirt from places where the wheelattaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, a cloth or a paper towelcan be used; however, use a scraperor wire brush later to remove allrust or dirt.

Lightly coat the inner diameter ofthe wheel hub opening with wheelbearing grease after a wheelchange or tire rotation to preventcorrosion or rust buildup. Do notget grease on the wheel mountingsurface or on the wheel nuts orbolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors, such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds, vehicleloading, and road conditions affect thewear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear when thetires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) orless of tread remaining. Somecommercial truck tires may not havetreadwear indicators. See TireInspection 0 327 and Tire Rotation0 327 for additional information.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factors includingtemperatures, loading conditions, andinflation pressure maintenance affecthow fast aging takes place. GMrecommends that tires, including the


VEHICLE CARE 329

spare if equipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Toidentify the age of a tire, use the tiremanufacture date which is the lastfour digits of the DOT TireIdentification Number (TIN) which ismolded into one side of the tiresidewall. The first two digits representthe week (01-52) and the last twodigits, the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 would have afour-digit DOT date of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Park avehicle that will be stored for at leasta month in a cool, dry, clean areaaway from direct sunlight to slowaging. This area should be free ofgrease, gasoline, or other substancesthat can deteriorate rubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires that mayresult in vibrations while driving.When storing a vehicle for at least amonth, remove the tires or raise thevehicle to reduce the weight from thetires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec) systemrating. When replacement tires areneeded, GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Spec systemconsiders over a dozen criticalspecifications that impact theoverall performance of the vehicle,including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressuremonitoring performance. GM'sTPC Spec number is molded ontothe tire's sidewall near the tiresize. If the tires have an all-seasontread design, the TPC Specnumber will be followed by MS for

mud and snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 316 for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handling performancemay be adversely affected if all thetires are not replaced at the sametime. If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done, allfour tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation 0 327 for information onproper tire rotation. However, if itis necessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tires, place thenew tires on the rear axle.

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attempting tomount or dismount a tire could

(Continued)


330 VEHICLE CARE

Warning (Continued)

cause injury or death. Only yourdealer or authorized tire servicecenter should mount ordismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may cause lossof control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires onall wheels.

This vehicle may have adifferent size spare than theroad tires originally installed onthe vehicle. When new, thevehicle included a spare tire andwheel assembly with a similaroverall diameter as the roadtires and wheels, so it is all

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

right to drive on it. The sparetire was developed for use onthis vehicle and will not affectvehicle handling.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheel rimflanges to develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenlyand cause a crash. Use onlyradial-ply tires with the wheelson the vehicle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H, V,W, Y and ZR speed rated tires.Never exceed the winter tires’

maximum speed capability whenusing winter tires with a lowerspeed rating.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, loadrange, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressuremonitoring system could give aninaccurate low-pressure warning ifnon-TPC Spec rated tires areinstalled. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem 0 322.

The Tire and Loading Informationlabel indicates the originalequipment tires on the vehicle.See Vehicle Load Limits 0 197 forthe label location and moreinformation about the Tire andLoading Information label.


VEHICLE CARE 331

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed that area different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also be affected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. This increasesthe chance of a crash and seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheeland tire systems developed for thevehicle, and have them properlyinstalled by a GM certifiedtechnician.

See Buying New Tires 0 329 andAccessories and Modifications 0 279.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingThe following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold in theUnited States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of mostpassenger car tires. The UniformTire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deeptread, winter tires, compact sparetires, tires with nominal rimdiameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary with

respect to these grades, they mustalso conform to federal safetyrequirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) standards.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government test course.For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half(1½) times as well on the


332 VEHICLE CARE

government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differencesin road characteristics andclimate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highestto lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.Those grades represent the tire'sability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlledconditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance. Warning: Thetraction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does not

include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representingthe tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its abilityto dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life,and excessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passengercar tires must meet under theFederal Motor Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance onthe laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.Warning: The temperature gradefor this tire is established for a tire

that is properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were aligned andbalanced at the factory to provide thelongest tire life and best overallperformance. Adjustments to wheelalignment and tire balancing are notnecessary on a regular basis. Consideran alignment check if there is unusualtire wear or the vehicle is significantlypulling to one side or the other. Someslight pull to the left or right,depending on the crown of the roadand/or other road surface variationssuch as troughs or ruts, is normal.If the vehicle is vibrating when drivingon a smooth road, the tires andwheels may need to be rebalanced.See your dealer for proper diagnosis.


VEHICLE CARE 333

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted or corroded.If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nutsshould be replaced. If the wheel leaksair, replace it. Some aluminum wheelscan be repaired. See your dealer if anyof these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter,width, offset, and be mounted thesame way as the one it replaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors with new GM originalequipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nutscan be dangerous. It could affectthe braking and handling of the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle. Tires can lose air, andcause loss of control, causing acrash. Always use the correct wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer or odometercalibration, headlamp aim, bumperheight, vehicle ground clearance,and tire or tire chain clearance tothe body and chassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a used oneis dangerous. How it has been usedor how far it has been driven may

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

be unknown. It could fail suddenlyand cause a crash. When replacingwheels, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

Do not use tire chains. There is notenough clearance. Tire chains usedon a vehicle without the properamount of clearance can causedamage to the brakes, suspension,or other vehicle parts. The areadamaged by the tire chains couldcause loss of control and a crash.Use another type of traction deviceonly if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle's tiresize combination and roadconditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, drive slowly

(Continued)


334 VEHICLE CARE

Warning (Continued)

and readjust or remove the tractiondevice if it contacts the vehicle. Donot spin the wheels. If tractiondevices are used, install them onthe rear tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile driving, especially if the tires aremaintained properly. If air goes out ofa tire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire createsa drag that pulls the vehicle towardthat side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip the steeringwheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to astop, well off the road, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid and mayrequire the same correction as used ina skid. Stop pressing the accelerator

pedal and steer to straighten thevehicle. It may be very bumpy andnoisy. Gently brake to a stop, well offthe road, if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash. Neverattempt to re-inflate a tire that hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat. Have yourdealer or an authorized tire servicecenter repair or replace the flat tireas soon as possible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without the appropriatesafety equipment and training. If a

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

jack is provided with the vehicle, itis designed only for changing a flattire. If it is used for anything else,you or others could be badly injuredor killed if the vehicle slips off thejack. If a jack is provided with thevehicle, only use it for changing aflat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See Hazard WarningFlashers 0 171.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can be dangerous.The vehicle can slip off the jack androll over or fall causing injury ordeath. Find a level place to changethe tire. To help prevent the vehiclefrom moving:

(Continued)


VEHICLE CARE 335

Warning (Continued)

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).

3. For vehicles with four-wheeldrive with an N (Neutral)transfer case position, be surethe transfer case is in a drivegear — not in N (Neutral).

4. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

5. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

6. Place wheel blocks,if equipped, on both sides ofthe tire at the opposite cornerof the tire being changed.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as a guideto assist in the placement of thewheel blocks (1), if equipped.

1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to use the jack and change a tire.

Tire ChangingBefore changing a flat tire, see“Hands-Free Operation” under Liftgate0 40.

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The equipment needed to change aflat tire is stored in the rear of thevehicle, on the driver side, behind adoor in the trim panel.

1. Jack Knob2. Wing Nut Retaining the

Wheel Blocks3. Wing Nut Retaining the

Tool Bag

If equipped, the tow eye boltwill be in a bag secured tothe tool bag.


336 VEHICLE CARE

1. Pull to open the trim panel door.

The third row driver side seatmay need to be folded to accessthe trim panel door.

2. Lift the acoustic pad to accessthe jack and tools.

3. Turn the wing nut retaining thetool bag (3) counterclockwise toremove it.

Pull the tool bag toward the frontof the vehicle and lift the rearportion of the bag upward toremove it.

4. Turn the jack knob (1)counterclockwise to release thejack and wheel blocks from thebracket.

5. Turn the wing nut retaining thewheel blocks (2)counterclockwise to remove thewheel blocks and the wheel blockretainer.

Use the following tools:

1. Jack2. Wheel Blocks3. Jack Handle4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench

To access the spare tire, refer to thefollowing graphics and instructions:

1. Hoist Assembly2. Hoist Shaft3. Hoist Shaft Access

Cover/Hole4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench6. Spare Tire Lock7. Hoist End of Extension Tool8. Hoist Shaft Access Hole9. Spare Tire (Valve Stem

Pointed Down)10. Tire/Wheel Retainer11. Hoist Cable


VEHICLE CARE 337

1. Open the hoist shaft accessdoor (3) on the bumper to accessthe spare tire lock (6).

If equipped with a hitch cover,turn the hitch cover retainerscounterclockwise and pull thecover downward to remove itbefore removing the hoist shaftaccess door.

2. To remove the spare tire lock (6),insert the key located inside theremote, turn it clockwise, andthen pull it straight out.

3. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (4) and wheelwrench (5), as shown.

4. Insert the open end of theextension (7) through the hole inthe rear bumper (8) (hoist shaftaccess hole).

Be sure the hoist end of theextension (7) connects to thehoist shaft. The ribbed squareend of the extension is used tolower the spare tire.

5. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.Continue to turn the wheelwrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.

6. Pull the spare tire out fromunder the vehicle.


338 VEHICLE CARE

7. Tilt the tire toward the vehiclewith some slack in the cable toaccess the tire/wheel retainer.

Tilt the retainer and pull it andthe cable and spring through thecenter of the wheel.

8. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire Goes Flat0 334 for more information.

2. If the vehicle has a center capthat covers the wheel fasteners,place the chisel end of the wheelwrench in the slot on the wheeland gently pry the cap out.

3. Use the wheel wrench to loosenall the wheel nuts. Turn thewheel wrench counterclockwiseto loosen the wheel nuts. Do notremove the wheel nuts yet.

Jacking Locations (Overall View)

4. Position the jack under thevehicle, as shown.


VEHICLE CARE 339

Left Front Shown, Right Front Similar

Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire ison a front tire of the vehicle, usethe jack handle and only onejack handle extension. Attach thewheel wrench to the jack handleextension. Attach the jack handleto the jack. Position the jack onthe frame behind the flat tirewhere the frame sections overlap.Turn the wheel wrench clockwiseto raise the vehicle. Raise thevehicle far enough off the groundso there is enough room for thespare tire to clear the ground.

Rear Position

Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire ison a rear tire of the vehicle, usethe jack handle (2) and both jackhandle extensions (3). Attach thewheel wrench (4) to the jackhandle extensions (3). Attach thejack handle (2) to the jack (1).Use the jacking pad (5) providedon the rear axle. Turn the wheelwrench (4) clockwise to raise thevehicle. Raise the vehicle farenough off the ground so there isenough room for the spare tire toclear the ground.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, you couldbe badly injured or killed. Never getunder a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damagethe vehicle and even make thevehicle fall. To help avoid personalinjury and vehicle damage, be sureto fit the jack lift head into theproper location before raising thevehicle.


340 VEHICLE CARE

5. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

6. Take off the flat tire.

7. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfaces,and spare wheel.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause a crash. Whenchanging a wheel, remove any rustor dirt from places where the wheelattaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, a cloth or a paper towelcan be used; however, use a scraperor wire brush later to remove allrust or dirt.

8. Put the wheel nuts back on withthe rounded end of the nutstoward the wheel after mountingthe spare tire.

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on bolts ornuts because the nuts might comeloose. The vehicle's wheel could falloff, causing a crash.

9. Tighten each wheel nut by hand.Then use the wheel wrench totighten the nuts until the wheelis held against the hub.

10. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thevehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.


VEHICLE CARE 341

11. Tighten the nuts firmly in acrisscross sequence as shown byturning the wheel wrenchclockwise.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can cause thewheels to become loose or come off.The wheel nuts should be tightenedwith a torque wrench to the propertorque specification after replacing.Follow the torque specificationsupplied by the aftermarketmanufacturer when using accessorylocking wheel nuts. See Capacitiesand Specifications 0 376 for originalequipment wheel nut torquespecifications.

Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensive

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

brake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torquespecification. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 376 for the wheelnut torque specification.

When reinstalling the regular wheeland tire, also reinstall the center cap,if equipped. Line up the tab on thecenter cap with the slot in the wheel.The cap only goes in one way. Placethe cap on the wheel and press until itsnaps into place.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

{ Warning

Failure to follow these tire storageinstructions carefully could resultin personal injury or propertydamage if the hoist cable fails or ifthe tire comes loose. Make sure thetire is stored securely beforedriving.

Caution

Storing an aluminum wheel with aflat tire under your vehicle for anextended period of time or with thevalve stem pointing up can damagethe wheel. Always stow the wheel

(Continued)


342 VEHICLE CARE

Caution (Continued)

with the valve stem pointing downand have the wheel/tire repaired assoon as possible.

Caution

The tire hoist can be damaged ifthere is no tension on the cablewhen using it. To have thenecessary tension, the spare or roadtire and wheel assembly must beinstalled on the tire hoist to use it.

{ Warning

An improperly stored spare tirecould come loose and cause a crash.To avoid personal injury or propertydamage, always store the spare tirewhen the vehicle is parked on alevel surface.

Store the tire under the rear of thevehicle in the spare tire carrier. Referto the following graphics andinstructions:

1. Hoist Assembly2. Hoist Shaft3. Hoist Shaft Access

Cover/Hole4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench6. Spare Tire Lock7. Hoist End of Extension Tool8. Hoist Shaft Access Hole9. Spare Tire (Valve Stem

Pointed Down)

10. Tire/Wheel Retainer11. Hoist Cable

1. Put the tire (9) on the ground atthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem pointed down, and tothe rear.

2. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle.Separate the tire/wheel retainerfrom the guide pin. Pull the pinthrough the center of the wheel.Tilt the retainer down throughthe center wheel opening.

Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel.


VEHICLE CARE 343

3. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (4) and wheelwrench (5).

Caution

Use of an air wrench or other powertools with the hoist mechanism isnot recommended and coulddamage the system. Use only thetools supplied with the hoistmechanism.

4. Insert the open end of theextension (7) through the hole inthe rear bumper (8) (hoist shaftaccess hole).

5. Raise the tire part way upward.Make sure the retainer is seatedin the wheel opening.

6. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle byturning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you hear twoclicks or feel it skip twice. Thecable cannot be overtightened.

7. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull, and then tryto turn the tire. If the tire moves,use the wheel wrench to tightenthe cable.

Repeat this tightness checkprocedure when checking thespare tire pressure according tothe scheduled maintenanceinformation or any time thespare tire is handled due toservice of other components.

Correctly Stored


344 VEHICLE CARE

Incorrectly Stored

8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.

9. Reinstall the hoist shaft accesscover.

If equipped, reinstall the hitchcover and turn the retainersclockwise.

To store the tools:

1. Return the tools (wheel wrench,jack handle, and jack handleextensions) to the tool bag.

2. Assemble the wheel blocks andjack together with the wing nut.

3. Position the jack and wheelblocks in the driver side trimpanel over the wheelhouse.

4. Turn the jack knob clockwiseuntil the jack is secured tight inthe mounting bracket. Be sure toposition the holes in the base ofthe jack onto the pin in themounting bracket.

5. Use the retaining bracket tofasten the tool bag on the studand turn the wing nut clockwiseto secure.

6. Close the trim panel door.

Full-Size Spare TireIf this vehicle came with a full-sizespare tire, it was fully inflated whennew, however, it can lose air overtime. Check the inflation pressureregularly. See Tire Pressure 0 320 andVehicle Load Limits 0 197. Forinstructions on how to remove, install,or store a spare tire, see Tire Changing0 335.

If equipped with a temporary usefull-size spare tire, it is indicated onthe tire sidewall. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 316. This spare tire shouldnot be driven on over 112 km/h(70 mph), or 88 km/h (55 mph) whenpulling a trailer, at the properinflation pressure. Repair and replacethe road tire as soon as it isconvenient, and stow the spare tire forfuture use.

Caution

If the vehicle has four-wheel driveand a different size spare tire isinstalled, do not drive in four-wheeldrive until the flat tire is repairedand/or replaced. The vehicle couldbe damaged and the repairs wouldnot be covered by the warranty.Never use four-wheel drive when adifferent size spare tire is installedon the vehicle.

The vehicle may have a different sizespare tire than the road tires originallyinstalled on the vehicle. This spare tirewas developed for use on this vehicle,


VEHICLE CARE 345

so it is all right to drive on it. If thevehicle has four-wheel drive and adifferent size spare tire is installed,drive only in two-wheel drive.

After installing the spare tire on thevehicle, stop as soon as possible andcheck that the spare tire is correctlyinflated.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced and installedback onto the vehicle as soon aspossible so the spare tire will beavailable in case it is needed again.

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep your spare tire and its wheeltogether. If the vehicle has a spare tirethat does not match the original roadtires and wheels in size and type, donot include the spare in the tirerotation.

Jump Starting

Jump Starting - NorthAmericaFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery - NorthAmerica 0 295.

If the vehicle's battery has run down,you may want to use another vehicleand some jumper cables to start yourvehicle. Be sure to use the followingsteps to do it safely.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.Batteries also contain otherchemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer. WASHHANDS AFTER HANDLING. For

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

more information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See California Proposition 65 Warning0 278 and the back cover.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of these thingscan hurt you.


346 VEHICLE CARE

Caution

Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to the vehicle thatwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Trying to start the vehicleby pushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Caution

If the other vehicle does not have a12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. Get the vehicles close enough sothe jumper cables can reach, butbe sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are,it could cause an unwanted

ground connection. You wouldnot be able to start your vehicle,and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put the automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parking brake.For vehicles withfour-wheel-drive with aN (Neutral) transfer caseposition, be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear — notN (Neutral).

Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Wheneverpossible, turn off or unplug allaccessories on either vehicle whenjump starting.

3. Turn the ignition off on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into theaccessory power outlets. Turn offthe radio and all the lamps thatare not needed. This will avoidsparks and help save bothbatteries. And it could save theradio!

4. Open the hood on the othervehicle and locate the positive (+)and negative (−) terminallocations on that vehicle.

The positive (+) terminal is undera red plastic cover at the positivebattery post. To uncover thepositive (+) terminal, open thered plastic cover.

For more information on thelocation of the remotepositive (+) and remote negative(−) terminals, see EngineCompartment Overview 0 281.


VEHICLE CARE 347

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not running andcan injure you. Keep hands,clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode. Peoplehave been hurt doing this, andsome have been blinded. Use aflashlight if you need more light.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you.If you accidentally get it in youreyes or on your skin, flush the placewith water and get medical helpimmediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engine partscan injure you badly. Keep yourhands away from moving partsonce the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one. Negative (−) willgo to a heavy, unpainted metalengine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect the

negative (−) cable to the negative(−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cableto the positive (+) terminal of thevehicle with the dead battery.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Connect the black negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminalof the good battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.


348 VEHICLE CARE

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to the metalbracket that is bolted to theengine and supports theresonator, on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

10. Start the vehicle with the goodbattery and run the engine for awhile.

11. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, it probablyneeds service.

Caution

If the jumper cables are connectedor removed in the wrong order,electrical shorting may occur anddamage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always connect andremove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

After starting the disabled vehicle andremoving the jumper cables, allow itto idle for several minutes.

Towing the Vehicle

Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not lash orhook to suspension components.Use the proper straps around thetires to secure the vehicle. Do notdrag a locked wheel/tire whileloading the vehicle. Do not use asling type lift to tow the vehicle.This could damage the vehicle.

GM recommends a flatbed tow truckto transport a disabled vehicle. Useramps to help reduce approach angles,if necessary. A towed vehicle shouldhave its drive wheels off the ground.Contact Roadside Service or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.


VEHICLE CARE 349

Front Attachment Points

The vehicle is equipped with specificattachment points to be used to pullthe vehicle onto a flatbed car carrierfrom a flat road surface. Do not usethese attachment points to pull thevehicle from snow, mud or sand.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as a motor home. Thetwo most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are dinghy

and dolly towing. Dinghy towing istowing the vehicle with all four wheelson the ground. Dolly towing is towingthe vehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels on a dolly.

Follow the tow vehicle manufacturer’sinstructions. See your dealer ortrailering professional for additionaladvice and equipmentrecommendations.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:

. Before towing the vehicle, becomefamiliar with the local laws thatapply to recreational vehicletowing. These laws may vary byregion.

. What is the towing capacity of thetowing vehicle? Be sure to read thetow vehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betraveled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See your dealeror trailering professional foradditional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to be towed?Just as preparing the vehicle for along trip, make sure the vehicle isprepared to be towed.

Caution

Use of a shield mounted in front ofthe vehicle grille could restrictairflow and cause damage to thetransmission. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.If using a shield, only use one thatattaches to the towing vehicle.


350 VEHICLE CARE

Dinghy Towing

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Caution

If the two-wheel-drive vehicle istowed with all four wheels on theground, the drivetrain componentscould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with all four wheels on theground.

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Only dinghy tow four-wheel-drivevehicles with a two-speed transfercase that have an N (Neutral) and aFour-Wheel Drive Low (4 n) setting.

{ Warning

Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle'stransfer case into N (Neutral) cancause the vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in P (Park). You orothers could be injured. Set theparking brake before shifting thetransfer case to N (Neutral).

To dinghy tow:

1. Position the vehicle being towedbehind the tow vehicle, facingforward and on a level surface.

2. Securely attach the vehicle beingtowed to the tow vehicle.

3. Apply the parking brake andstart the engine.

For vehicles with Electric ParkingBrakes (EPB), the EPB cannot beapplied and the tires must bechocked.

4. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoN (Neutral)” under Four-WheelDrive 0 215. Check that thevehicle is in N (Neutral) byshifting the transmission toR (Reverse) and then to D(Drive). There should be nomovement of the vehicle whileshifting.

5. Shift the transmission intoD (Drive). Turn the engine off.


VEHICLE CARE 351

Caution

Failure to disconnect the negativebattery cable or to have it contactthe terminals can cause damage tothe vehicle.

6. Disconnect the negative batterycable at the battery and securethe nut and bolt. Cover thenegative battery post with anon-conductive material toprevent any contact with thenegative battery terminal.

7. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

Caution

If the steering column is locked,vehicle damage may occur.

8. Move the steering wheel to makesure the steering column isunlocked.

9. With a foot on the brake pedal,release the parking brake.

10. If equipped with Keyless Access,keep the RKE transmitter outsideof the vehicle, and manually lockthe doors. Access the vehicle asif it has a dead RKE transmitterbattery, by using the key in thedoor lock.

Disconnecting the Towed Vehicle

Before disconnecting the towedvehicle:

1. Park on a level surface.

2. Set the parking brake, then shiftthe transmission to P (Park).

3. Connect the battery.

4. Apply the brake pedal.

5. Turn the ignition to ON/RUNwith the engine off. Shift thetransfer case out of N (Neutral)to 2 m. See “Shifting out ofN (Neutral)” under Four-WheelDrive 0 215. See your dealer ifthe transfer case cannot beshifted out of N (Neutral).

6. Check that the vehicle is in 2 mby starting the engine andshifting the transmission toR (Reverse) and then to D(Drive). There should bemovement of the vehicle whileshifting.

7. Shift the transmission to P (Park)and turn off the ignition.

8. Disconnect the vehicle from thetow vehicle.


10. Reset any lost presets.

The outside temperature displaywill default to 0 °C (32 °F) butwill reset with normal usage.


352 VEHICLE CARE

Dolly Towing – Front Towing(Front Wheels Off the Ground)

Caution

If a two-wheel-drive vehicle istowed with the rear wheels on theground, the transmission could bedamaged. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never tow the vehicle with the rearwheels on the ground.

Caution

Towing a four-wheel-drive vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground,or even with only two of its wheelson the ground, will damagedrivetrain components. Do not towa four-wheel-drive vehicle with anyof its wheels on the ground.

This vehicle should not be towed withthe rear wheels on the ground.

Dolly Towing – Rear Towing(Rear Wheels Off the Ground) –Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Caution

Towing a four-wheel-drive vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground,or even with only two of its wheelson the ground, will damagedrivetrain components. Do not towa four-wheel-drive vehicle with anyof its wheels on the ground.

This vehicle should not be towed withany wheels on the ground.


VEHICLE CARE 353

Dolly Towing – Rear Towing(Rear Wheels Off the Ground) –Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

To dolly tow the vehicle from the rear:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake 0 219.

4. Put the transmission in P (Park).

5. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

6. Use an adequate clamping devicedesigned for towing to ensurethat the front wheels are lockedinto the straight position.

7. Turn the ignition to OFF.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants0 372.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish, washit often and out of direct sunlight.

Caution

Do not use petroleum-based, acidic,or abrasive cleaning agents as theycan damage the vehicle's paint,metal, or plastic parts. If damageoccurs, it would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Approvedcleaning products can be obtainedfrom your dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regarding

(Continued)


354 VEHICLE CARE

Caution (Continued)

correct product usage, necessarysafety precautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Caution

Avoid using high-pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 in) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8,274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Caution

Do not power wash any component

under the hood that has thisesymbol.

This could cause damage thatwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

If using an automatic car wash, followthe car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that may bedamaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, before washingand after, to remove all cleaningagents completely. If they are allowedto dry on the surface, they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfaces aredamaged, see your dealer to have thedamage assessed and repaired. Foreignmaterials such as calcium chlorideand other salts, ice melting agents,road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrialchimneys, etc., can damage thevehicle's finish if they remain onpainted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as

soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are markedsafe for painted surfaces to removeforeign matter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. See yourdealer for approved cleaning products.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, decals,simulated wood, or flat paint asdamage can occur.

Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may damageit. Use only non-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish onthe vehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.


VEHICLE CARE 355

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can result ina hazy white finish or pitting. Thisdamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum, chrome orstainless steel. To prevent damagealways follow these cleaninginstructions:

. Be sure the molding is cool to thetouch before applying any cleaningsolution.

. Use only approved cleaningsolutions for aluminum, chrome orstainless steel. Some cleaners arehighly acidic or contain alkalinesubstances and can damage themoldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses,Emblems, Decals, and Stripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soap toclean exterior lamps, lenses, emblems,decals, and stripes. Follow instructionsunder "Washing the Vehicle"previously in this section.

Lamp covers are made of plastic, andsome have a UV protective coating. Donot clean or wipe them when dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:

. Abrasive or caustic agents.

. Washer fluids and other cleaningagents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels, or otherharsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessive heatgenerated.

Caution

Failure to clean lamps properly cancause damage to the lamp coverthat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Caution

Using wax on low gloss black finishstripes can increase the gloss leveland create a non-uniform finish.Clean low gloss stripes with soapand water only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshield,when washing the vehicle.


356 VEHICLE CARE

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning the blades.Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildupof vehicle wash/wax treatments maycause wiper streaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dusty conditions,sand, salt, heat, sun, snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply weatherstrip lubricant onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesmay require more frequentapplication. Black marks from rubbermaterial on painted surfaces can beremoved by rubbing with a cleancloth. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 372.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Caution

Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on the vehicle maydamage the paint finish and/ortires. When applying a tire dressing,always wipe off any overspray fromall painted surfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Wheel Trim

Use a soft, clean cloth with mild soapand water to clean the wheels. Afterrinsing thoroughly with clean water,dry with a soft, clean towel. A waxmay then be applied.

Caution

Chrome wheels and chrome wheeltrim may be damaged if the vehicleis not washed after driving on roadsthat have been sprayed with

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

magnesium chloride or calciumchloride. These are used on roadsfor conditions such as dust and ice.Always wash the chrome with soapand water after exposure.

Caution

To avoid surface damage on wheelsand wheel trim, do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, or brushes. Use only GMapproved cleaners. Do not drive thevehicle through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbide tire/wheel cleaning brushes. Damagecould occur and the repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Brake System

Visually inspect brake lines and hosesfor proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake


VEHICLE CARE 357

pads for wear and rotors for surfacecondition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect allother brake parts.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering, suspension,and chassis components for damaged,loose, or missing parts or signs ofwear at least once a year.

Inspect power steering for properattachment, connections, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

For 1500 Series vehicles, at least everyother oil change lubricate the outer tierod ends.

Control arm ball joints on 1500 Seriesvehicles are maintenance-free.

Caution

Lubrication of applicable steering/suspension points should not bedone unless the temperature is−12 °C (10 °F) or higher, or damagecould result.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hoodhinges, liftgate hinges, steel fuel doorhinge and power assist step hinges,unless the components are plastic.Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and fall,use plain water to flush any corrosivematerials from the underbody. Takecare to thoroughly clean any areaswhere mud and other debris cancollect. If equipped with power assiststeps, extend them and then use ahigh pressure wash to clean all jointsand gaps.

Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure water canovercome the seals and contaminatethe fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfer caseand/or axles and should be replaced.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged and requiressheet metal repair or replacement,make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material toparts repaired or replaced to restorecorrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.


358 VEHICLE CARE

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care” previously inthis section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils.Newspapers or dark garments cantransfer color to the vehicle’s interior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mild soapsolution, immediately remove handlotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Use cleaners specifically designed forthe surfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply all cleanersdirectly to the cleaning cloth. Do notspray cleaners on any switches orcontrols. Remove cleaners quickly.

Before using cleaners, read and followall safety instructions on the label.While cleaning the interior, open thedoors and windows to get properventilation.

To prevent damage, do not clean theinterior using the following cleanersor techniques:

. Never use a razor or any othersharp object to remove soil fromany interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surface aggressivelyor with too much pressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners, useapproximately 20 drops per 3.8 L(1 gal) of water. A concentratedsoap solution will create streaksand attract dirt. Do not usesolutions that contain strong orcaustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.If necessary, use a commercial glasscleaner after cleaning with plain water.

Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six months ofownership will reduce tendency to fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will not bedamaged. Clean spots with water andmild soap.


VEHICLE CARE 359

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.

. When lightly soiled, wipe with asponge or soft, lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surface usinga soft brush attachment. If a rotatingvacuum brush attachment is beingused, only use it on the floor carpet.Before cleaning, gently remove asmuch of the soil as possible:

. Gently blot liquids with a papertowel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as much aspossible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean, lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth is recommendedto prevent lint transfer to thefabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth toa clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completely removed,it may be necessary to use acommercial upholstery cleaner or spotlifter. Test a small hidden area forcolorfastness before using acommercial upholstery cleaner or spotlifter. If ring formation occurs, cleanthe entire fabric or carpet.

After cleaning, use a paper towel toblot excess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

Use a microfiber cloth on high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays. First, usea soft bristle brush to remove dirt thatcan scratch the surface. Then gentlyclean by rubbing with a microfibercloth. Never use window cleaners orsolvents. Periodically hand wash themicrofiber cloth separately, using mildsoap. Do not use bleach or fabricsoftener. Rinse thoroughly and air drybefore next use.

Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. This maycause damage and would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.


360 VEHICLE CARE

Instrument Panel, Leather, Vinyl,Other Plastic Surfaces, LowGloss Paint Surfaces, andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber cloth dampenedwith water to remove dust and loosedirt. For a more thorough cleaning,use a soft microfiber cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.

Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, as wellas other interior surfaces, maycause permanent damage. Wipeexcess moisture from these surfacesafter cleaning and allow them todry naturally. Never use heat,steam, or spot removers. Do not usecleaners that contain silicone orwax-based products. Cleanerscontaining these solvents canpermanently change the appearanceand feel of leather or soft trim, andare not recommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plastics andpainted surfaces. If an air freshenercomes in contact with any plasticor painted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage caused byair fresheners would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

If equipped, wash with warm waterand mild detergent. Do not usechlorine bleach. Rinse with cold water,and then dry completely.

Care of Seat Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, they mightnot be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean and rinse seat beltwebbing only with mild soap andlukewarm water. Allow the webbingto dry.

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size or isnot properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distancewhich can cause a crash and injury.Make sure the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.


VEHICLE CARE 361

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage:

. The original equipment floor matswere designed for your vehicle.If the floor mats need replacing, itis recommended that GM certifiedfloor mats be purchased. Non-GMfloor mats may not fit properlyand may interfere with the pedals.Always check that the floor matsdo not interfere with the pedals.

. Do not use a floor mat if thevehicle is not equipped with afloor mat retainer on the driverside floor.

. Use the floor mat with the correctside up. Do not turn it over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat on thedriver side.

. Do not place one floor mat on topof another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

Pull up on the rear of the floor mat tounlock each retainer and remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snapping into position.

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does not interferewith the pedals.


362 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Special Application ServicesSpecial Application Services . . . . . 369

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describes therequired maintenance for the vehicle.Follow this schedule to help protectagainst major repair expensesresulting from neglect or inadequatemaintenance. It may also help tomaintain the value of the vehicle if itis sold. It is the responsibility of theowner to have all requiredmaintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and online schedulingto assist with service needs.

Your dealer recognizes the importanceof providing competitively pricedmaintenance and repair services. Withtrained technicians, the dealer is theplace for routine maintenance such asoil changes and tire rotations and

additional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Maintenanceintervals, checks, inspections,recommended fluids, and lubricantsare important to keep the vehicle ingood working condition.

Do not have chemical flushes thatare not approved by GM performedon the vehicle. The use of flushes,solvents, cleaners, or lubricants thatare not approved by GM coulddamage the vehicle, requiringexpensive repairs that are notcovered by the vehicle warranty.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.


SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 363

Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy, andreduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be more frequentchecks and services. The AdditionalRequired Services - Normal are forvehicles that:

. Carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 197.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal driving limits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel 0 253.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:

. Mainly driven in heavy city trafficin hot weather.

. Mainly driven in hilly ormountainous terrain.

. Frequently towing a trailer.

. Used for high speed or competitivedriving.

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can cause seriousinjury. Perform maintenance workonly if the required information,proper tools, and equipment areavailable. If they are not, see yourdealer to have a trained techniciando the work. See Doing Your OwnService Work 0 279.

Maintenance ScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop

. Check the engine oil level. SeeEngine Oil 0 282.

Once a Month

. Check the tire inflation pressures,including the spare. See TirePressure 0 320.

. Inspect the tires for wear. See TireInspection 0 327.

. Check the windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid 0 292.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, the engineoil life system may not indicate theneed for vehicle service for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and theoil life system must be reset. Yourtrained dealer technician can perform



this work. If the engine oil life systemis reset accidentally, service thevehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 mi sincethe last service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed. SeeEngine Oil Life System 0 284.

Power Take Off (PTO) andExtended Idle Use

When the vehicle is used with thePTO equipment or used in a way thatrequires extended idle time, one hourof use shall be deemed the same as53 km (33 mi). See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 149 for hourmeter.

Air Conditioning Desiccant(Replace Every Seven Years)

The air conditioning system requiresmaintenance every seven years. Thisservice requires replacement of thedesiccant to help the longevity andefficient operation of the airconditioning system. This service canbe complex. See your dealer.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform the followingservices. See Tire Rotation 0 327.

. Check engine oil level and oillife percentage. If needed, changeengine oil and filter, and reset oillife system. See Engine Oil 0 282and Engine Oil Life System 0 284.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeCooling System 0 287.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid 0 292.

. Check tire inflation pressures,including the spare. See TirePressure 0 320.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection 0 327.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 286.

. Inspect brake system. See ExteriorCare 0 353.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damage, includingcracks or tears in the rubber boots,loose or missing parts, or signs ofwear at least once a year. SeeExterior Care 0 353.

. Inspect power steering for properattachment, connections, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

. Visually inspect halfshafts anddrive shafts for excessive wear,lubricant leaks, and/or damageincluding: tube dents or cracks,constant velocity joint or universaljoint looseness, cracked or missingboots, loose or missing bootclamps, center bearing excessivelooseness, loose or missingfasteners, and axle seal leaks.

. Lubricate the suspension andsteering components at least everyother oil change (if equipped withgrease fittings).

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck 0 86.


SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 365. Visually inspect fuel system for

damage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields for looseor damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care 0 353.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check 0 297.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission Shift LockControl Function Check 0 298.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check 0 298.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut for signsof wear, cracks, or other damage.Check the hold open ability of thestrut. If the hold open is low,service the gas strut. See GasStrut(s) 0 300.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof 0 58.

. Verify spare tire key lock operationand lubricate as needed. See TireChanging 0 335.

. Visually inspect the spare tire toensure that it is tightly stowedunder the vehicle. Push, pull, andtry to turn the tire. If the sparetire moves, tighten as necessary.Verify that the wheel retainerplate compression spring is fullycompressed. See Tire Changing0 335.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional Required Services -Normal

12000km/7

,500mi

24000km/1

5,000mi

36000km/2

2,500mi

48000km/3

0,000mi

60000km/3

7,500mi

72000km/4

5,000mi

84000km/5

2,500mi

96000km/6

0,000mi

108000km/6

7,500mi

120000km/7

5,000mi

132000km/8

2,500mi

144000km/9

0,000mi

156000km/9

7,500mi

168000km/1

05,000mi

180000km/1

12,500mi

192000km/1

20,000mi

204000km/1

27,500mi

216000km/1

35,000mi

228000km/1

42,500mi

240000km/1

50,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services. Checkengine oil level and oil life percentage. Changeengine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with 4WD. (4) @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7)

Replace windshield wiper blades. (8) @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace hood and/or body lift support gas struts. @ @



Footnotes — Maintenance ScheduleAdditional Required Services -Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequent passengercompartment air filter replacementmay be needed if driving in areas withheavy traffic, poor air quality, highdust levels, or environmentalallergens. Passenger compartment airfilter replacement may also be neededif there is reduced airflow, windowfogging, or odors. Your GM dealer canhelp determine when to replace thefilter.

(2) Visually check all fuel and vaporlines and hoses for proper attachment,connection, routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure water canovercome the seals and contaminatethe transfer case fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or axles and shouldbe replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System 0 287.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage; replace,if needed.

(7) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 294.

(8) Or every 12 months, whichevercomes first. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 299.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional Required Services -Severe

12000km/7

,500mi

24000km/1

5,000mi

36000km/2

2,500mi

48000km/3

0,000mi

60000km/3

7,500mi

72000km/4

5,000mi

84000km/5

2,500mi

96000km/6

0,000mi

108000km/6

7,500mi

120000km/7

5,000mi

132000km/8

2,500mi

144000km/9

0,000mi

156000km/9

7,500mi

168000km/1

05,000mi

180000km/1

12,500mi

192000km/1

20,000mi

204000km/1

27,500mi

216000km/1

35,000mi

228000km/1

42,500mi

240000km/1

50,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services. Checkengine oil level and oil life percentage. Changeengine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. @ @ @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with 4WD. (4) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7)

Replace windshield wiper blades. (8) @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace hood and/or body lift support gas struts. @ @

Footnotes — Maintenance ScheduleAdditional Required Services -Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequent passengercompartment air filter replacement

may be needed if driving in areas withheavy traffic, poor air quality, highdust levels, or environmentalallergens. Passenger compartment airfilter replacement may also be neededif there is reduced airflow, window

fogging, or odors. Your GM dealer canhelp determine when to replace thefilter.

(2) Visually check all fuel and vaporlines and hoses for proper attachment,connection, routing, and condition.



(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure water canovercome the seals and contaminatethe transfer case fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or axles and shouldbe replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System 0 287.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage; replace,if needed.

(7) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 294.

(8) Or every 12 months, whichevercomes first. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 299.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use Vehicles

Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every oil change.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See "UnderbodyMaintenance" in Exterior Care0 353.

Additional Maintenanceand CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additional maintenanceservices may be required.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — their traineddealer technicians know your vehiclebest. Your dealer can also perform athorough assessment with amulti-point inspection to recommendwhen your vehicle may needattention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditions tolook for that may indicate services arerequired.



Battery

The 12-volt battery supplies power tostart the engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.

. To avoid break-down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts

. Belts may need replacing if theysqueak or show signs of crackingor splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipment toinspect the belts and recommendadjustment or replacement whennecessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and are crucialto safe driving.

. Signs of brake wear may includechirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipment toinspect the brakes and recommendquality parts engineered for thevehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approved fluidsprotect the vehicle’s systems andcomponents. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants 0 372 for GM approvedfluids.

. Engine oil and windshield washerfluid levels should be checked atevery fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to be filled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and should beregularly inspected to ensure thatthere are no cracks or leaks. With amulti-point inspection, your dealercan inspect the hoses and advise ifreplacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.

. Signs that the headlamps needattention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage. Thebrake lamps need to be checkedperiodically to ensure that theylight when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.



Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.

. Signs of wear may include steeringwheel vibration, bounce/swaywhile braking, longer stoppingdistance, or uneven tire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signs ofleaking, blown seals, or damage,and can advise when service isneeded.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.

. Signs that the tires need to bereplaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in the treador sidewall; or a bulge or split inthe tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can also providetire/wheel balancing services toensure smooth vehicle operationat all speeds. Your dealer sells andservices name brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care 0 358 andExterior Care 0 353.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliver optimalwear and performance.

. Signs that the alignment may needto be adjusted include pulling,improper vehicle handling,or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure proper wheelalignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and the bestviewing, keep the windshield cleanand clear.

. Signs of damage include scratches,cracks, and chips.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacement ifneeded.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleaned andkept in good condition to provide aclear view.

. Signs of wear include streaking,skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades and replacethem when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Automatic Transmission DEXRON ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19352619, inCanada 19352620).

Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant. SeeCooling System 0 287.

Engine Oil Engine oil meeting the dexos1 specification of the proper SAE viscosity grade.ACDelco dexos1 full synthetic is recommended. See Engine Oil 0 282.

Front Axle (4WD Only) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401, inCanada 89021678).

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19353126, in Canada 19353127).

Key Lock Cylinders, Hood Hinges, BodyDoor Hinge Pins, Power Assist Steps,Liftgate Hinge, Linkage, and Outer

Liftgate Handle Pivot Points, and FuelDoor Hinge

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Rear Axle SAE 75W-85 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 19300457, inCanada 19300458).



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Transfer Case DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orequivalent.

Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, inCanada 10953437).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22845992 A3181C

Oil Filter 19330000 PF63E

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 23281440 CF188

Spark Plugs 12622441 41-114

Wiper Blades

Front Driver Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 23360288 —

Front Passenger Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 23360288 —

Rear – 33 cm (13.0 in) 22956295 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type ofservices performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed


TECHNICAL DATA 375

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Vehicle DataCapacities and Specifications . . . . 376Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . 377

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, on thedriver side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) also appears on theVehicle Certification and Service Partslabels and certificates of title andregistration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is theengine code. This code identifies thevehicle's engine, specifications, andreplacement parts. See “Engine

Specifications” under Capacities andSpecifications 0 376 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service Parts IdentificationLabelThere may be a label on the inside ofthe glove box that contains thefollowing information:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Model designation

. Paint information

. Production options and specialequipment

If there is no label, there is a barcodeon the certification label on thecenter (B) pillar to scan for this sameinformation.


376 TECHNICAL DATA

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants0 372 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System 16.8 L 17.8 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 7.6 L 8.0 qt

Fuel Tank

Short Wheelbase 98.4 L 26.0 gal

Long Wheelbase 119.2 L 31.5 gal

Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 L 1.6 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual.Recheck fluid level after filling.


TECHNICAL DATA 377

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Spark Plug Gap

6.2L V8 J 0.95–1.10mm (0.037–0.043 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing


378 CUSTOMER INFORMATION

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Customer Assistance Offices . . . . 380Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . 381

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . 385Publication OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . 388

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects to theUnited States Government . . . . . 388

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian Government . . . . . . . . . 389

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . 390OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toCadillac. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or the operationof the vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer's sales or service departments.Sometimes, however, despite the bestintentions of all concerned,misunderstandings can occur. If yourconcern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following stepsshould be taken:

STEP ONE : Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concerns canbe quickly resolved at that level. If thematter has already been reviewed withthe sales, service or parts manager,contact the owner of your dealershipor the general manager.


CUSTOMER INFORMATION 379

STEP TWO : If after contacting amember of dealership management, itappears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theCadillac Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800–458–8006. In Canada, callthe Canadian Cadillac Customer CareCentre at 1-888-446-2000.

We encourage you to call the toll-freenumber in order to give your inquiryprompt attention. Have the followinginformation available to give theCustomer Assistance representative:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date and presentmileage.

When contacting Cadillac, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners : BothGeneral Motors and your dealer arecommitted to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with the newvehicle. However, if you continue toremain unsatisfied after following theprocedure outlined in Steps One andTwo, you can file with the BetterBusiness Bureau (BBB) Auto LineProgram to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administered bythe Council of Better Business Bureausto settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or theinterpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, you mayreject it and proceed with any othervenue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-free telephonenumber or write them at the followingaddress:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.3033 Wilson BoulevardSuite 600Arlington, VA 22201

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100http://www.bbb.org/council/programs-services/dispute-handling-and-resolution/bbb-auto-line

This program is available in all50 states and the District of Columbia.Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,mileage, and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to changeeligibility limitations and/ordiscontinue its participation in thisprogram.



STEP THREE — Canadian Owners :In the event that you do not feel yourconcerns have been addressed afterfollowing the procedure outlined inSteps One and Two, General Motors ofCanada Company wants you to beaware of its participation in ano-charge mediation/arbitrationprogram. General Motors of CanadaCompany has committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims.The program provides for the reviewof the facts involved by an impartialthird party arbiter, and may includean informal hearing before the arbiter.The program is designed so that theentire dispute settlement process,from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should becompleted in about 70 days. Webelieve our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe Cadillac Customer Care Centre,1-888-446-2000, or write to:

General Motors Cadillac CustomerCare CentreGeneral Motors of Canada CompanyMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesCadillac encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail Cadillac, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Cadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169www.Cadillac.com

1-800-458-80061-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Service: 1-800-224-1400

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada CompanyCadillac Customer Care Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-888-446-2000 (English/French)Cadillac Roadside Service:1-800-882-1112

Overseas

Contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Cadillac has TTY equipment availableat its Customer Assistance Center. AnyTTY user can communicate withCadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-2622.TTY users in Canada can dial1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience (U.S.)my.cadillac.com

The Cadillac online owner experienceallows interaction with Cadillac andkeeps important vehicle-specificinformation in one place.

Membership Benefits

E : Download owner’s manuals andview vehicle-specific how-to videos.

G : View maintenance schedules,alerts, and Vehicle DiagnosticInformation. Schedule serviceappointments.

I : View printable dealer-recordedservice records and self-recordedservice records.

D : Select a dealer and viewlocations, maps, phone numbers, andhours.

r : Track your vehicle’s warrantyinformation.

J : View active recalls or search byVehicle Identification Number (VIN).See Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)0 375.

H : View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio (if equipped), and OnStaraccount information.

F : Chat with online helprepresentatives.

See my.cadillac.com to register yourvehicle.

Cadillac Owner Centre (Canada)www.cadillacowner.ca

Visit the Cadillac Owner Centre:

. Chat live with online helprepresentatives.

. Locate owner resources such aslease-end, financing, and warrantyinformation.

. Retrieve favorite articles, quizzes,tips, and multimedia galleriesorganized into the FeaturedArticles and Auto Care Sections.

. Download owner’s manuals.


382 CUSTOMER INFORMATION. Find Cadillac-recommended

maintenance services.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available to qualifiedapplicants for cost reimbursement, upto certain limits, of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such as handcontrols or a wheelchair/scooter liftfor the vehicle.

To learn about the GM Mobilityprogram, see www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has aMobility program. See www.gm.ca orcall 1-800-GM-DRIVE (800-463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside ServiceU.S.: 1-800-224-1400.

Canada: 1-800-882-1112.

Text Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.Only): 1-888-889-2438.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Service

When calling Roadside Service, havethe following information ready:

. Your name, home address, andhome telephone number

. Telephone number of yourlocation

. Location of the vehicle

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided for the durationof the vehicle’s powertrain warranty.

In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicleis covered. In Canada, a person drivingthe vehicle without permission fromthe owner is not covered.

Roadside Service is not a part of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andCadillac reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue the RoadsideService program at any time withoutnotification.

General Motors North America andCadillac reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner ordriver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.



Cadillac Owner Privileges™. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identification beforethis service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Cadillac dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is not givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with a spare tire.The spare tire, if equipped, mustbe in good condition and properlyinflated. It is your responsibilityfor the repair or replacement ofthe tire if it is not covered by thewarranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andService: If your trip is interrupteddue to a warranty failure,incidental expenses may bereimbursed during the Powertrainwarranty period. Items consideredare hotel, meals, and rental car ora vehicle being delivered back tothe customer, up to 500 miles.

Cadillac Technician RoadsideService (U.S. Only)

Cadillac's exceptional Roadside Serviceis more than an auto club or towingservice. It provides every Cadillacowner in the United States with theadvantage of contacting a Cadillacadvisor and, where available, aCadillac trained dealer technician whocan provide on-site service.

A dealer technician will travel to yourlocation within a 30-mile radius of aparticipating Cadillac dealership.If beyond this radius, we will arrangeto have your car towed to the nearestCadillac dealership. Each techniciantravels with a specially equipped

service vehicle complete with thenecessary Cadillac parts and toolsrequired to handle most roadsiderepairs.

Services Not Included inRoadside Service. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws

. Legal fines

. Mounting, dismounting,or changing of snow tires, chains,or other traction devices

Service is not provided if a vehicle isin an area that is not accessible to theservice vehicle or is not a regularlytraveled or maintained public road,which includes ice and winter roads.Off-road use is not covered.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is

up to 7 liters. Diesel fuel deliverymay be restricted. Propane andother fuels are not providedthrough this service.


384 CUSTOMER INFORMATION. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle

registration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andService: Pre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy of therepair orders are required. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Service advisor willhelp you make arrangements andexplain how to receive payment.Items considered are hotel, meals,and rental car or a vehicle beingdelivered back to the customer, upto 800 km.

. Alternative Service: If assistancecannot be provided right away, theRoadside Service advisor may giveyou permission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100, aftersending the original receipt toRoadside Service. Mechanicalfailures may be covered, howeverany cost for parts and labor forrepairs not covered by thewarranty are the ownerresponsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointment andadvising the service consultant ofyour transportation needs, your dealercan help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safetyrelated. If it is, please call yourdealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you are urgedto do so as early in the work day aspossible to allow for same-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada), extendedpowertrain, and/or hybrid-specificwarranties in both the U.S. andCanada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a partof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.A separate booklet entitled “LimitedWarranty and Owner AssistanceInformation” furnished with each newvehicle provides detailed warrantycoverage information.



Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to do so, your dealermay offer the following transportationoptions:

Shuttle Service

This includes one-way or round-tripshuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters of yourdealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If overnight warranty repairs areneeded, and public transportation isused, the expense must be supportedby original receipts and within themaximum amount allowed by GM forshuttle service. If U.S. customersarrange their own transportation,limited reimbursement for reasonablefuel expenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by original receipts.See your dealer for information.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

For an overnight warranty repair, thedealer may provide an availablecourtesy rental vehicle or provide forreimbursement of a rental vehicle.Reimbursement is limited and mustbe supported by original receipts aswell as a signed and completed rentalagreement and meet state/provincial,local, and rental vehicle providerrequirements. Requirements vary andmay include minimum agerequirements, insurance coverage,credit card, etc. Additional fees suchas fuel usage charges, taxes, levies,usage fees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair are also your responsibility.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional Program Information

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available at everydealer. Contact your dealer for specificavailability.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue Courtesy

Transportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at its solediscretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in a collisionand it is damaged, have the damagerepaired by a qualified technicianusing the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorlyperformed collision repairs diminishthe vehicle resale value, and safetyperformance can be compromised insubsequent collisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as the partswith which the vehicle was originallybuilt. Genuine GM Collision parts arethe best choice to ensure that thevehicle's designed appearance,durability, and safety are preserved.The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain the GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.



Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses in priorcrashes. In most cases, the parts beingrecycled are from undamaged sectionsof the vehicle. A recycled originalequipment GM part may be anacceptable choice to maintain thevehicle's originally designedappearance and safety performance;however, the history of these parts isnot known. Such parts are not coveredby the GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any related failures arenot covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fit poorly,exhibit premature durability/corrosionproblems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions.Aftermarket parts are not covered bythe GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failurerelated to such parts is not covered bythat warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that you choosea collision repair facility that meetsyour needs before you ever needcollision repairs. Your dealer may havea collision repair center withGM-trained technicians andstate-of-the-art equipment, or be ableto recommend a collision repair centerthat has GM-trained technicians andcomparable equipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. There aresignificant differences in the quality ofcoverage afforded by variousinsurance policy terms. Manyinsurance policies provide reducedprotection to the GM vehicle bylimiting compensation for damagerepairs by using aftermarket collisionparts. Some insurance companies willnot specify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.

If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your current insurancecarrier, consider switching to anotherinsurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Readthe lease carefully, as you may becharged at the end of the lease forpoor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of. Movethe vehicle only if its position putsyou in danger, or you are instructed tomove it by a police officer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involved inthe crash.

For emergency towing see RoadsideService 0 382.



Gather the following information:

. Driver name, address, andtelephone number

. Driver license number

. Owner name, address, andtelephone number

. Vehicle license plate number

. Vehicle make, model, andmodel year

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Insurance company and policynumber

. General description of the damageto the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facility thatuses quality replacement parts. See“Collision Parts” earlier in this section.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an Airbag Inflates?0 92.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommends thatyou take an active role in its repair.If you have a pre-determined repairfacility of choice, take the vehiclethere, or have it towed there. Specifyto the facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new GenuineGM parts or recycled original GMparts. Remember, recycled parts willnot be covered by the GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits, yourinsurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts.Discuss this with the repairprofessional, and insist on GenuineGM parts. Remember, if the vehicle isleased, you may be obligated to havethe vehicle repaired with Genuine GMparts, even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurance companyis paying for the repairs, you are notobligated to accept a repair valuationbased on that insurance company'scollision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with thatcompany. In such cases, you can havecontrol of the repair and parts choicesas long as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Publication OrderingInformation

Service Manuals

Service manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on the engine,transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,electrical system, steering system,body, etc.

Customer Literature

Owner’s manuals are writtenspecifically for owners and areintended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. Theowner’s manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for all models.



Customer literature publicationsavailable for purchase include owner’smanuals, warranty manuals,infotainment manuals, and portfolios.Portfolios include an owner’s manual,warranty manual, infotainmentmanual, if applicable, and zip lock bagor pouch.

Current and Past Models

Service manuals and customerliterature are available for manycurrent and past model year GMvehicles.

To order, call 1-800-551-4123Monday–Friday, 8:00 a.m.–6:00 p.m.eastern time

For credit card orders only (VISA,MasterCard, or Discover), see Helm,Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

To order by mail, write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Make checks payable in U.S. funds.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems that operateon a radio frequency that complieswith Part 15/Part 18 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Innovation, Scienceand Economic Development (ISED)Canada's RSP-100 / license-exemptRSS's / ICES-001.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could cause acrash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or GeneralMotors.



To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, and notifyGeneral Motors of CanadaCompany. Call Transport Canadaat 1-800-333-0510; go to:

www.tc.gc.ca/recalls (English)

www.tc.gc.ca/rappels (French)

or write to:

Transport CanadaMotor Vehicle Safety DirectorateDefect Investigations and RecallsDivision80 Noel StreetGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

In the U.S., call 1-800-458-8006,or write:

Cadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000,or write:

Canadian Cadillac Customer CareCentre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005General Motors of Canada Company1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

In Mexico, call 01-800-466-0805 or01-800-212-234-5522.

In other Central America andCaribbean Countries, call52-722-236-0680.



Vehicle Data Recordingand PrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, to monitorthe conditions for airbag deploymentand deploy them in a crash, and,if equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may store datato help the dealer technician servicethe vehicle. Some modules may alsostore data about how the vehicle isoperated, such as rate of fuelconsumption or average speed. Thesemodules may retain personalpreferences, such as radio presets, seatpositions, and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with an eventdata recorder (EDR). The mainpurpose of an EDR is to record, incertain crash or near crash-like

situations, such as an air bagdeployment or hitting a road obstacle,data that will assist in understandinghow a vehicle’s systems performed.The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. The EDRin this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:

. How various systems in yourvehicle were operating;

. Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstances inwhich crashes and injuries occur.

NoteEDR data are recorded by your vehicleonly if a non-trivial crash situationoccurs; no data are recorded by theEDR under normal driving conditions

and no personal data (e.g., name,gender, age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties, suchas law enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have the specialequipment, can read the informationif they have access to the vehicle orthe EDR.

GM will not access these data or shareit with others except: with the consentof the vehicle owner or, if the vehicleis leased, with the consent of thelessee; in response to an officialrequest by police or similargovernment office; as part of GM'sdefense of litigation through thediscovery process; or, as required bylaw. Data that GM collects or receivesmay also be used for GM researchneeds or may be made available to



others for research purposes, where aneed is shown and the data is not tiedto a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStarIf the vehicle is equipped with OnStarand has an active service plan,additional data may be collectedthrough the OnStar system. Thisincludes information about thevehicle’s operation; collisions involvingthe vehicle; the use of the vehicle andits features; and, in certain situations,the location and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to theOnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

See OnStar Additional Information0 394.

Infotainment SystemUsing the navigation system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. See theinfotainment manual for informationon stored data and for deletioninstructions.


392 ONSTAR

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

OnStar Overview

= Voice Command Button

Q Blue OnStar Button

> Red Emergency Button

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle system thatcan connect to an OnStar Advisor forEmergency, Security, Navigation,Connections, and Diagnostics Services.OnStar services may require a paidservice plan and data plan. OnStarrequires the vehicle battery andelectrical system, cellular service, andGPS satellite signals to be availableand operating. OnStar acts as a link toexisting emergency service providers.OnStar may collect information aboutyou and your vehicle, includinglocation information. See OnStar UserTerms, Privacy Statement, andSoftware Terms for more details

including system limitations atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

The OnStar system status light is nextto the OnStar buttons. If the statuslight is:

. Solid Green: System is ready.

. Flashing Green: On a call.

. Red: Indicates a problem.

. Off: System is off. PressQ twiceto speak with an OnStar Advisor.

PressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton may vary by vehicle andregion.

Press= to:

. Open the OnStar app on theinfotainment display. See theinfotainment manual forinformation on how to use theOnStar app.


ONSTAR 393

Or

. Make a call, end a call, or answeran incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.

. Obtain and customize the Wi-Fihotspot name or SSID andpassword, if equipped.

PressQ to connect to an Advisor to:

. Verify account information orupdate contact information.

. Get driving directions.

. Receive a Diagnostic check of thevehicle's key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

. Manage Wi-Fi Settings,if equipped.

Press> to get a priority connectionto an OnStar Advisor available 24/7 to:

. Get help for an emergency.

. Be a Good Samaritan or respondto an AMBER Alert.

. Get assistance in severe weatheror other crisis situations and findevacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyEmergency Services require an activesafety and security plan. WithAutomatic Crash Response, built-insensors can automatically alert aspecially trained OnStar Advisor whois immediately connected in to thevehicle to help.

Press> for a priority connection toan OnStar Advisor who can contactemergency service providers, directthem to your exact location, and relayimportant information.

With OnStar Crisis Assist, speciallytrained Advisors are available24 hours a day, 7 days a week, toprovide a central point of contact,assistance, and information during acrisis.

With Roadside Assistance, Advisorscan locate a nearby service provider tohelp with a flat tire, a battery jump,or an empty gas tank.


394 ONSTAR

SecurityIf equipped, OnStar provides theseservices:

. With Stolen Vehicle Assistance,OnStar Advisors can use GPS topinpoint the vehicle and helpauthorities quickly recover it.

. With Remote Ignition Block,if equipped, OnStar can block theengine from being restarted.

. With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown,if equipped, OnStar can work withlaw enforcement to gradually slowthe vehicle down.

Theft Alarm Notification

If equipped, if the doors are lockedand the vehicle alarm sounds, anotification by text, e-mail, or phonecall will be sent. If the vehicle isstolen, an OnStar Advisor can workwith authorities to recover the vehicle.

OnStar AdditionalInformationIn-Vehicle Audio Messages

Audio messages may play importantinformation at the following times:

. Prior to vehicle purchase. PressQto set up an account.

. After change in ownership and at90 days.

Transferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan cancel or change accountinformation.

Selling/Transferring the Vehicle

Call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)immediately to terminate your OnStaror connected services if the vehicle isdisposed of, sold, transferred, or if thelease ends.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible. The Advisor will updatevehicle records and explain OnStar orconnected service options.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, RemoteServices, Roadside Assistance, andHands-Free Calling are available onmost vehicles. Not all OnStar servicesare available everywhere or on allvehicles. For more information, a fulldescription of OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar User Terms,Privacy Statement, and SoftwareTerms:

. Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).

. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).

. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.

. PressQ to speak with an Advisor.


ONSTAR 395

OnStar or connected services cannotwork unless the vehicle is in a placewhere OnStar has an agreement witha wireless service provider for servicein that area. The wireless serviceprovider must also have coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStar orconnected services. Service involvinglocation information about the vehiclecannot work unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStar hardware.OnStar or connected services may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar or connectedservices may not work. Otherproblems beyond the control ofOnStar — such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of the vehicle,damage to the vehicle in a crash,or wireless phone network congestionor jamming — may prevent service.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to help withphysical disabilities and medicalconditions.

PressQ to help:

. Locate a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Find a hotel, restaurant, etc., thatmeets accessibility needs.

. Provide directions to the closesthospital or pharmacy in urgentsituations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability to communicateto deaf, hard-of-hearing,or speech-impaired customers while inthe vehicle. The availabledealer-installed TTY system canprovide in-vehicle access to all OnStarservices, except Virtual Advisor andOnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation.

If equipped, TTY mode can be turnedon or off by touching Settings, thenApps, and then Phone. When TTY

mode is on, phone calls can be madeor received with OnStar using theinfotainment display.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access someOnStar services. The PIN will need tobe changed the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. To changethe OnStar PIN, contact an OnStarAdvisor by pressingQ or calling1-888-4ONSTAR.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may be warrantedas part of the vehicle warranty.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask for an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish, and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.


396 ONSTAR

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform Remote DoorUnlock or Stolen Vehicle Assistanceafter the vehicle has been offcontinuously for 10 days without anignition cycle. If the vehicle has notbeen started for 10 days, OnStar cancontact Roadside Assistance or alocksmith to help gain access to thevehicle.

Global Positioning System (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can occur

in a large city with tall buildings;in parking garages; aroundairports; in tunnels andunderpasses; or in an area withvery dense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to call OnStar.However, OnStar could havedifficulty identifying the exactlocation.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

A temporary loss of GPS can causeloss of the ability to send aTurn-by-Turn Navigation route. TheAdvisor may give a verbal route ormay ask for a call back after thevehicle is driven into an open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Cellular reception is required forOnStar to send remote signals to thevehicle. Do not place items over ornear the antenna to prevent blockingcellular and GPS signal reception.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverage orthe cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this message maycome on. PressQ to try the call againor try again after driving a few milesinto another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service, andGPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for features to

function properly. These systems maynot operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integrated intothe electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 276. Added electricalequipment may interfere with theoperation of the OnStar system andcause it to not operate.

Vehicle Software Updates

OnStar or GM may remotely deliversoftware updates or changes to thevehicle without further notice orconsent. These updates or changesmay enhance or maintain safety,security, or the operation of thevehicle or the vehicle systems.Software updates or changes mayaffect or erase data or settings thatare stored in the vehicle, such asOnStar Hands-Free Calling name tags,saved navigation destinations,or pre-set radio stations. NeitherOnStar nor GM is responsible for anyaffected or erased data or settings.


ONSTAR 397

These updates or changes may alsocollect personal information. Suchcollection is described in the OnStarprivacy statement or separatelydisclosed at the time of installation.These updates or changes may alsocause a system to automaticallycommunicate with GM servers tocollect information about vehiclesystem status, identify whetherupdates or changes are available,or deliver updates or changes. Anactive OnStar agreement constitutesconsent to these software updates orchanges and agreement that eitherOnStar or GM may remotely deliverthem to the vehicle.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Werecommend that you review it. If youhave any questions, call1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) orpressQ to speak with an Advisor.Users of wireless communications arecautioned that the privacy of anyinformation sent via wireless cellular

communications cannot be assured.Third parties may unlawfully interceptor access transmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - SoftwareAcknowledgements

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associatedwith libcurl and unzip and forother third party software please seehttp://opensource.lge.com/index

www.onstar.com/us/en/

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify, anddistribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee is herebygranted, provided that the abovecopyright notice and this permissionnotice appear in all copies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “ASIS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANYKIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TOTHE WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE ANDNONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRDPARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALLTHE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHTHOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANYCLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHERLIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTIONOF CONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUTOF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THESOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHERDEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, thename of a copyright holder shall notbe used in advertising or otherwise topromote the sale, use or otherdealings in this Software without priorwritten authorization of the copyrightholder.


398 ONSTAR

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license.The definitive version of thisdocument should be available atftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyright andlicense, “Info-ZIP” is defined as thefollowing set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth,Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, RobertHeath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz,David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onnovan der Linden, Igor Mandrichenko,Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, KeithOwens, George Petrov, Greg Roelofs,Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind, expressor implied. In no event shall Info-ZIPor its contributors be held liable forany direct, indirect, incidental, specialor consequential damages arising outof the use of or inability to use thissoftware.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of a

self-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has not beenremoved from the binary ordisabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existing portswith new graphical interfaces,and dynamic, shared, or staticlibrary versions–must be plainlymarked as such and must not bemisrepresented as being theoriginal source. Such alteredversions also must not bemisrepresented as being Info-ZIPreleases–including, but notlimited to, labeling of the alteredversions with the names“Info-ZIP” (or any variationthereof, including, but notlimited to, differentcapitalizations), “Pocket UnZip,”“WiZ” or “MacZip” without theexplicit permission of Info-ZIP.Such altered versions arefurther prohibited frommisrepresentative use of the


ONSTAR 399

Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,” and“MacZip” for its own source andbinary releases.


400 CONNECTED SERVICES

Connected Services

Connected ServicesNavigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Connected Services

NavigationNavigation requires a specific OnStaror connected service plan.

PressQ to receive Turn-by-Turndirections or have them sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to anAdvisor.

2. Request directions to bedownloaded to the vehicle.

3. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.

Using Voice Commands During aPlanned Route

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton, if equipped, may vary byvehicle and region. For some vehicles,press= to open the OnStar app onthe infotainment display. For othervehicles press= as follows.

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want to canceldirections?”

3. Say “Yes.” System responds: “OK,request completed, thank you,goodbye.”

Route Preview


2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given,then responds with “OnStarready,” then a tone.


CONNECTED SERVICES 401

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.” Systemresponds with the address anddistance to the destination, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.

Send Destination to Vehicle

Directions can be sent to the vehicle’snavigation screen, if equipped.

PressQ, then ask the Advisor todownload directions to the vehicle’snavigation system, if equipped. Afterthe call ends, the navigation screenwill provide prompts to begin drivingdirections. Routes that are sent to thenavigation screen can only becanceled through the navigationsystem.

See www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsThe following services help withstaying connected.

For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

Ensuring Security

. Change the default passwords forthe Wi-Fi hotspot and myCadillacmobile app. Make these passwordsdifferent from each other and usea combination of letters, numbers,and symbols to increase thesecurity.

. Change the default name of theSSID (Service Set Identifier). Thisis your network’s name that isvisible to other wireless devices.Choose a unique name and avoidfamily names or vehicledescriptions.

Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)

The vehicle may have a built-in Wi-Fihotspot that provides access to theInternet and web content at 4G LTEspeed. Up to seven mobile devices canbe connected. A data plan is required.Use the in-vehicle controls only whenit is safe to do so.

1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspotinformation, press= to openthe OnStar app on theinfotainment display, then selectWi-Fi Hotspot. On some vehicles,touch Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Settings onthe screen.

2. The Wi-Fi settings will displaythe Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID),password, and on some vehicles,the connection type (no Internetconnection, 3G, 4G, 4G LTE), andsignal quality (poor, good,excellent).

3. To change the SSID or password,pressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTARto connect with an Advisor. Onsome vehicles, the SSID andpassword can be changed in theWi-Fi Hotspot menu.

After initial set-up, your vehicle’sWi-Fi hotspot will connectautomatically to your mobile devices.Manage data usage by turning Wi-Fion or off on your mobile device, byusing the myCadillac mobile app,or by contacting an OnStar Advisor.


402 CONNECTED SERVICES

On some vehicles, Wi-Fi can also bemanaged from the Wi-FiHotspot menu.

MyCadillac Mobile App (If Available)

Download the myCadillac mobile appto compatible Apple and Androidsmartphones. Cadillac users canaccess the following services from asmartphone:

. Remotely start/stop the vehicle,if factory-equipped.

. Lock/unlock doors, if equippedwith automatic locks.

. Activate the horn and lamps.

. Check the vehicle’s fuel level, oillife, or tire pressure,if factory-equipped with the TirePressure Monitor System.

. Send destinations to the vehicle.

. Locate the vehicle on a map (U.S.market only).

. Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspoton/off, manage settings, andmonitor data consumption,if equipped.

. Locate a dealer and scheduleservice.

. Request roadside assistance.

. Set a parking reminder with pindrop, take a photo, make a note,and set a timer.

. Connect with Cadillac on socialmedia.

Features are subject to change. FormyCadillac mobile app informationand compatibility, see my.cadillac.com.

An active OnStar or connected serviceplan may be required. A compatibledevice, factory-installed remote start,and power locks are required. Datarates apply. See www.onstar.com fordetails and system limitations.

Remote Services

Contact an OnStar Advisor to unlockthe doors or sound the horn and flashthe lamps.

Marketplace

OnStar Advisors can provide offersfrom restaurants and retailers on yourroute, help locate hotels, or book aroom. These services vary by market.

OnStar Hands-Free Calling

Make and receive calls with thebuilt-in wireless calling service, whichrequires available minutes.Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton may vary by vehicle andregion. For some vehicles, press= toopen the OnStar app on theinfotainment display, then selectHands-Free calling. For other vehiclespress= as follows.

Make a Call

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds: “Call.Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds: “OK,calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency



CONNECTED SERVICES 403

2. Say “Call.” System responds: “Call.Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds: “OK,dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

If equipped, press= and touchAccount Services to view the numberof remaining minutes, available Wi-Fidata, and other account information.

DiagnosticsBy monitoring and reporting on thevehicle’s key systems, OnStarAdvanced Diagnostics, if equipped,provides a way to keep up onmaintenance. Capabilities vary bymodel. See www.onstar.com for detailsand system limitations. Features aresubject to change. For updates onfeature capabilities, seemy.cadillac.com. Message and datarates may apply.


404 INDEX

Index AAccessories and Modifications . . . . . 279Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Active Fuel Management . . . . . . . . . . . 209Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . 276Additional InformationOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 286Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177, 182Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . .92Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . .93What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . .92What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Airbag System (cont'd)Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . .89

AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Passenger Status Indicator . . . . . . . 139Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

AlertLane Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . 248

All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . 219Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Assistance Systems for Driving . . . . 244Assistance Systems for Parkingand Backing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238


INDEX 405

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Forward Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

BBatteryExterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Battery - North America . . . . . .295, 345Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . . . . . 299BrakeParking, Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Pedal and Adjustable Throttle . . . 202System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Brakes (cont'd)Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Automatic Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Bulb ReplacementHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127CaliforniaPerchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .278, 295, 345,

Back CoverCanadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . 376Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

CargoTie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . . . . .3Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333ChargingWireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140CheckEngine Light (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Child RestraintsInfants and Young Children . . . . . . 101Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 116Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Child-View Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127


406 INDEX

Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . 385CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Connected ServicesConnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

ConnectionsConnected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51CoolantEngine Temperature Gauge . . . . . . 137Engine Temperature WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177, 182Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Cornering Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Cruise Control, Adaptive . . . . . . . . . . . 229Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 381

Customer InformationPublications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . . . . . 385Danger, Warning, and Caution . . . . . . . .3Data CollectionInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . 169Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38DiagnosticsConnected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Door (cont'd)Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . . . . 377Driver Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . 237Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224DrivingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188For Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . .26Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 195If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Winter Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177


INDEX 407

EElectric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Electric Parking Brake Light . . . . . . . 143Electrical Equipment, Add-On . . . . . 276Electrical SystemEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . 304Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 310

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

EmergencyOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Check Light (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . 281Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . 137Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Engine (cont'd)Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . 210Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . . . . 169Exterior Lighting Battery Saver . . . . 175

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

FeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . 171Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . 285Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Four-Wheel DriveTransfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Forward Automatic Braking . . . . . . . . 247Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215, 295Frequency StatementRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Front SeatsHeated and Cooled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

FuelAdditives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 147Management, Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253


408 INDEX

Fuel (cont'd)Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Top Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344FusesEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . 304Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 310

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300GaugesEngine Coolant Temperature . . . . 137Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . . . . 362

General Information (cont'd)Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

HHazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . 171Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . 169Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

HeatedRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Heated and Cooled Front Seats . . . . . 69Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177, 182High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . 195Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124How to Wear Seat Belts Properly . . . 79HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177, 182

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50IndicatorVehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

InformationPublication Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 53Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2


INDEX 409

JJump Starting - North America . . . . 345

KKeyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316LampsCornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . 169Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . . 169Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Malfunction Indicator (CheckEngine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . . . . . 248Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Lane Keep Assist Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after a Crash . . . . 113

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Level ControlAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . 142Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Check Engine (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Lights (cont'd)Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . 169Lane Keep Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Service Electric Parking Brake . . . 143Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144StabiliTrak OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Winter Driving Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . 147Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316


410 INDEX

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) . . . . . . . . 106

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

MMagnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225MaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Maintenance and CareAdditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . 140Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65MessagesEngine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

MirrorChild-View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming Rearview . . . . .53Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . 53Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Driver Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Monitor System, Tire Pressure . . . . . 322

NNavigationConnected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . 284Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391OnStar Additional Information . . . . 394OnStar Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392OnStar Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Parking or BackingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . 93


INDEX 411

Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . . . . . 279

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . . . . . . 207Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . 85PrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . 390

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . 384

Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Proposition65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278, 295, 345,

Back CoverPublication OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

RRadio Frequency Statement . . . . . . . . 388Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Rear Camera Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Rear Climate Control System . . . . . . 182Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . 238Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . . . . 126Rearview MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . 349Reimbursement Program, GMMobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

ReplacementGlass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Replacing LATCH System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Replacing Seat Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . 389General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Ride Control SystemsMagnetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327


412 INDEX

Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . 377Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

SSafety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . 389General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . 384Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . .87Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

SeatsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . .63Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . .62Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Seats (cont'd)Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65Second Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Securing Child Restraints . . . . .114, 116SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . . . 279Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . . . . . 374Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . 375Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . 384

Service Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . 248Signals, Turn and Lane-Change . . . . 171Special Application Services . . . . . . . 369Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . 376Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Sport Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Start Assist, Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

StepsPower Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

StorageRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119


INDEX 413

Storage Areas (cont'd)Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119StrutsGas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3SystemForward Collision Alert (FCA) . . . . 244Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 391Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

SystemsDriver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . 381Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Tires (cont'd)All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315All-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320, 322Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . 323Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . 322Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Terminology and Definitions . . . . 318Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . 331Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Top Tier Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . 256Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . 274Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

TractionControl System(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . 145

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . 171


414 INDEX

UUniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . 331Universal Remote System . . . . . . . . . . 164Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . 375Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

WarningsHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance . . . . . 332Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . 328Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . 105Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

WindshieldReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Winter Driving Mode Light . . . . . . . . 144Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 299WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

84161699 A

Escalade

2019

Escalade

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

19_CAD_Escalade_COV_en_US_84161699A_2018APR27.ai 1 4/10/2018 2:40:44 PM19_CAD_Escalade_COV_en_US_84161699A_2018APR27.ai 1 4/10/2018 2:40:44 PM

Documents

2019 Escalade Escalade - Cadillac...84161699 A Escalade 2019 Escalade Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals